Konica-Minolta BizHub Pro 1050,1050P Theory of Operation

1050ma.book Page 1 Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

SERVICE MANUAL

Theory of Operation

2005.03 Ver. 2.0


1050matce.fm Page i Wednesday, March 2, 2005 11:10 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0

CONTENTS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

I Outline

CONTENTS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-12 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Revision history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v Composition of the service manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi Notation of the service manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii

Measures to take in case of an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x I

OUTLINE

1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 2.1

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

2.2

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

2.3

Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

2.4

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

2.5

Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

2.6

Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

3. UNIT CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 4. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

II

COMPOSITION/OPERATION

1. OVERALL COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1.1

Timing chart when the power is on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.2

Control block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2. SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2.3.1

Scanner/exposure lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.3.2

Original size detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2.3.3

AE/AES control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2.3.4

Image processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

3. WRITE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 3.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

3.2

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 3.2.1

Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

3.2.2

Laser beam path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

3.2.3

Write control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

i

II Composition/Operation

SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2

1050matce.fm Page ii Wednesday, March 2, 2005 11:10 PM

CONTENTS


3.2.4

Image stabilization control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

I Outline

4. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 4.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

4.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

4.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 4.3.1

Drum claw drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

4.3.2

Cooling around the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

4.3.3



5. CHARGING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 5.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

5.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

5.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 5.3.1

Charging control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

5.3.2

Wire cleaning control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

5.3.3

Erase lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

6. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 6.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

6.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

6.3

6.4

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 6.3.1

Transfer guide control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

6.3.2

Transfer/separation control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

6.3.3

Transfer exposure lamp control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

6.3.4

Transfer assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

6.3.5

Wire cleaning control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

PCS correspondence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 6.4.1

Transfer assist sheet by paper sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

7. DEVELOPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 7.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

7.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

7.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 7.3.1

Flow of developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

7.3.2

Developing bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

7.3.3

Developing suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

7.3.4


8. TONER SUPPLY SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 8.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

8.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

8.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 8.3.1

Toner conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

8.3.2

Toner supply control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

8.3.3

Toner remaining detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

9. CLEANING/RECYCLE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

ii

9.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

9.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

9.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 9.3.1

Cleaning operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

9.3.2

Toner collection mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

9.3.3

Toner conveyance operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

9.3.4


1050matce.fm Page iii Wednesday, March 2, 2005 11:10 PM


CONTENTS

10. PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 10.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 10.2.1 Tray lift drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 10.2.2 Paper feed drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 10.2.3 Pick-up drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

I Outline

10.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

10.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 10.3.1 Up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 10.3.3 Pick-up mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 10.3.4 Separation mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 10.3.5 Air assist mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 10.3.6 Paper empty detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 10.3.7 Remaining paper detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 10.3.8 Tray lock control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 10.3.9 Dehumidification heater control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 10.4 PCS corresponding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 10.4.1 Corresponding to additional prints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 11. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 11.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62 11.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 11.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 11.3.1 Pre-registration control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 11.3.2 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 11.3.3 Exit conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 11.3.4 Paper dust removing mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 12. REGISTRATION SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 12.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 12.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 12.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 12.3.1 Multi feed detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 12.3.2 Loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 12.3.3

Paper mis-centering adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

12.3.4 Paper leading edge timing adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68 13. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 13.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 13.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 13.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 13.3.1 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 14. ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 14.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 14.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72 14.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 14.3.1 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 15. FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 15.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 15.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 15.2.1 Web drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 15.2.2 Fusing drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 15.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76

iii


10.3.2 Size detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53

1050matce.fm Page iv Wednesday, March 2, 2005 11:10 PM

CONTENTS


15.3.1 Fusing roller drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 15.3.2 Web drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 I Outline

15.3.3 Fusing temperature control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 15.3.4 Thick paper conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 15.3.5 Protection against an error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 16. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 16.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 16.2 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79


16.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 16.3.1 Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80 17. INTERFACE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 17.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 18.1 Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 18.2 Operation flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 18.2.1 Image stabilization control flow when the power switch (SW2) is ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 18.2.2 Image stabilization control flow while in the print and during idling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86 19. IMAGE PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88 19.1 Image processing in the scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88 19.1.1 Shading correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89 19.1.2 AE control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90 19.1.3 Area discrimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91 19.1.4 Brightness/density conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91 19.1.5 Filter/magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 19.1.6 Scanner gamma correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 19.1.7 Halftone processing (error diffusion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 19.1.8 Tilt adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 19.1.9 Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 19.1.10 Storage of image data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94 19.2 Image processing in the write section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 20. OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 20.1 Other fan controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 20.1.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 20.1.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97 20.2 HDD control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 20.2.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 20.2.2 Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 20.3 Counter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 20.3.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 20.3.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 20.4 Parts that operate when the power switch is turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105 20.4.1 Parts that operate when the main power switch is turned ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105

iv

1050ma.book Page v Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM


Introduction

Introduction Revision history After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.

Revision mark: •

To indicate clearly a section revised, show A number within

•

To indicate clearly a section revised, show A number within

to the left of the revised section.

represents the number of times the revision has been made.

1

1

in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.

represents the number of times the revision has been made.

Note: Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. • When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted. • When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.

2005/03

2.0

2004/10

1.0

Date

Service manual Ver.

Revision due to the addition of a new option (SD, RC) — Revision mark

Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision

v

1050ma.book Page vi Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

Introduction


Composition of the service manual This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:

I. OUTLINE:

System configuration, product specifications, unit configuration, and paper path

II. COMPOSITION/OPERATION: Configuration of each unit, explanation of the operating system, and explanation of the control system This section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of each part.

I. OUTLINE:

System configuration, and product specifications

II. MAINTENANCE:

Service schedule *, maintenance steps, list of service tools and directions for use *, firmware version up method *, and removal/reinstallation methods of major parts

III. ADJUSTMENT/SETTING:

Utility mode *, service mode *, security *, mechanical adjustment and POD corresponding adjustment

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING *:

List of jam codes, their causes, operation when a jam occurs and its release method, and list of error codes, their causes, operation when a warning is issued and estimated abnormal parts.

V. APPENDIX *:

Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing chart, overall layout drawing

This section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the customer's premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.

The details of items with an asterisk "*" are described only in the service manual of the main body.

vi

1050ma.book Page vii Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM


Introduction

Notation of the service manual 1. Product name In this manual, each of the products is described as follows: (1) IC board:

Standard printer

(2) KonicaMinolta bizhub PRO 1050:

Main body

(3) PS-502 PostScript3 Option:

PS3 Option

(4) Microsoft Windows 95:

Windows 95

Microsoft Windows 98:

Windows 98

Microsoft Windows Me:

Windows Me

Microsoft Windows NT 4.0:

Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT

Microsoft Windows 2000:

Windows 2000

Microsoft Windows XP:

Windows XP

When the description is made in combination of the OS's mentioned above: Windows 95/98/Me Windows NT 4.0/2000 Windows NT/2000/XP Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP

2. Brand name The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered trademark of each company.

3. Electrical parts and signals Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many. Classification Load symbol

Ex. of signal name

Description

IN PS Sensor

PS

Door PS1

Sensor detection signal

SIG 102 PS 24V Solenoid

SD

DRV SOL 24V

Clutch

CL

DRV SOL

Motor

M

Power to drive the solenoid Drive signal Power to drive the clutch Drive signal

24V

Power to drive the motor

CONT

Drive signal

DRV1 DRV2 D1

Drive signals of two kinds

D2

vii

1050ma.book Page viii Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

Introduction


Classification Load symbol

Ex. of signal name

Description

_U _V _W DRV1

Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds

DRV2 DRV3 D1 D2 D3 D4 DRV A DRV A DRV B

Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds

DRV B

Motor, phases A and B control signals

A Motor

M

/A B /B AB BB CLK, PLL

PLL control signal

LCK, Lock, LD

PLL lock signal

FR

Forward/reverse rotation signal

EM, Lock, LCK, LD

Motor lock abnormality

BLK

Drive brake signal

P/S

Power/stop

S/S SS

Fan

Others Ground

viii

FM

Operating load start/stop signal

CW/CCW, F/R

Rotational direction switching signal

ENB

Effective signal

TEMP_ER

Motor temperature abnormality detection signal

24V

Power to drive the fan motor

CONT, DRIVE

Drive signal

HL

Speed control signal (2 speeds)

EM, Lock, LCK, FEM

Detection signal

TH1.S, ANG

Analog signal

SG, S.GND, S_GND

Signal ground

PG, P.GND

Power ground

1050ma.book Page ix Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 Classification Load symbol

Serial communication

Introduction

Ex. of signal name

Description

DCD

Data carrier detection

SIN

Serial input

SOUT

Serial output

DTR

Data terminal operation available

GND

Signal ground (earth)

DSR, DSET

Data set ready

RTS

Transmission request signal

CTS

Consent transmission signal

RI

Ring indicator

TXD

Serial transmission data

RXD

Serial reception data

ix

1050ma.book Page x Tuesday, March 1, 2005 9:50 PM

Measures to take in case of an accident


Measures to take in case of an accident 1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.

2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.

3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.

4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in "Serious Accident Report/Follow-up Procedures."

x



SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

I Outline

I OUTLINE 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A. System configuration

[3]

[4]

[8]

[1]

[2]

[5]

[9]

[6]

[11]

[10]

[7] [12]

1050to1001e

1

1 -1


I Outline

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION


[1]

Main body

[8]

Toner recycle cut kit (RC-501)

[2]

Large capacity paper feed unit (PF-701)

[9]

Expanded memory: 256 MB (EM-701) for

[3]

Double sided original auto feeder (DF-603) *1

[4]

Flat stapling finisher (FS-503)

[10]

Side cover *2

[5]

Punch and multi folding finisher (FD-501)

[11]

Saddle stitching trimmer finisher (SD-501)

[6]

Large capacity stacker (LS-501)

[12]

Hand cart (LC-501)

[7]

Large capacity stacker (LS-502)

the image controller

*1

In the case of the 1050P, no scanner/DF function is provided.

*2

Attach the side cover when PF-701 is not connected. The side cover is available as the service parts.

B. Option coupling formation NOTE • The option can be connected. However, be sure to take note of the AC connection mode.

Coupling combination of the main body and the finisher option 1

Main body

LS-502

2

Main body

3

Main body

4

Main body

FD-501

5

Main body

FD-501

6

Main body

7

Main body

FD-501

FS-503

AC power to be connected to Inch

Metric

—

—

—

External (FD-501)

SD-501

External (SD-501) SD-501

SD-501

FS-503

FS-503 LS-501

External (FD-501/SD-501) External (FD-501/SD-501) —

LS-501

FS-503

—

Inlet: (1st tandem LS-501) Inlet: (2nd tandem LS-501)

8

Main body

LS-501

LS-502

Inlet: (LS-501)

9

Main body

LS-501

FS-503

Inlet: (LS-501)

NOTE • Any coupling formation other than the above is unavailable. • PF-701 can be either connected or disconnected.

1 -2

1



PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Type

Type:

Console type (floor-mounted type)

Copying method:

Indirect electrostatic method

Original stand:

Fixed

Original alignment:

Left rear standard

Photosensitive material:

OPC

Sensitizing method:

Laser writing

Paper feed trays:

I Outline

2.1

Two trays (1,500 sheets x 2, 20lb, 80 gsm) PF-701 (2,000 x 3, 80 gsm) *1

*1

The PF-701 is optional.

2.2

Functions

Original:

Sheet, book, solid object

Maximum original size:

A3, or 11 x 17

Copy size: Tray /1, /2:

Inch: 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, B4, A4, B5, B5R, 8 x 13, 8.12 x 13.2, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm), standard index paper Metric:A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8 x 13, 8.12 x 13.2, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm), standard index paper

ADU:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5 x 11R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)

Magnification: Fixed magnification:

Inch: x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.545, x 1.294, x 1.214, x 0.785, x 0.772, x 0.647, x 0.500 Metric:x 1.000, x 2.000, x 1.414, x 1.224, x 1.154, x 0.866, x 0.816, x 0.707, x 0.500

Special magnification setting:

3 types

Zoom magnification:

x 0.250 to x 4.000 (at the step of 0.1%)

Vertical magnification:


Horizontal magnification:


Warm-up time:

Less than 6 min. (at temperature of 20°C, at rated voltage)

First copy out time:

Less than 3.0 sec.

Continuous copy speed:

105 copies/min. (for A4/8.5 x 11)

Continuous copy count:

Up to 9,999 sheets

Copy density selection:

AE/AES, manual (9 steps), user density (2 steps)

Resolution: Scan:

600 dpi x 600 dpi

Write:

600 dpi x 600 dpi

Memory:

256 MB (DRAM) + 10 GB (HDD1)

Interface section:

RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C): Main body right side Serial port (USB Type B), Parallel port: Mounted on the Image processing board (IPB)

1 -3




No. of originals to be stored:

More than 10,000 sheets Under the following conditions:

I Outline

Original: FAX#4CHART/A4 Density: Manual 5 Mode: Text/photo

2.3

Type of paper

Plain paper *2:

60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2, high-quality paper

Special paper *3:

OHP film, label paper, *4 coated paper, 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 recycled paper, 50 g/m2 to 60 g/m2, 16lb, high-quality paper (thin), 91 g/m2 to 300 g/m2, 25lb to 72lb, high-quality paper (thick) *5

*2

Standard specified paper:

*3

Inch:

Hammermill Tidal MP (75 g/m2),

Metric:

Konica Minolta Profi (80 g/m2),

Special paper/recommended paper: Thick paper:

Inch:

HM-Cover65lb (176 g/m2), XeroxDigitalLasr65lb (176 g/m2), DomterCdor65lb, COUGARCOVER65lb (176 g/m2)

Metric:

RDEREY200 (200 g/m2), RDEREY160 (160 g/m2), NEUCOLORCOPY (200 g/m2), XeroxColotech (200 g/m2), Xerox3R91798 (160 g/m2)

Thin paper: Label paper: Coated paper:

Inch:

Domter16lb (Doqupach16lb)

Metric:

Clair Mail (60 g/m2)

Inch:

AVERY 5160

Metric:

AVERY DSP24

Inch:

KROMEKOTE PLUSLASER HIGH GROSS 183 g/m2 (Smart Paper Company), Futural Laser 105 g/m2 (Stora Enso Paper Company)

Metric:

—

*4

Label paper is loaded and fed one sheet at a time.

*5

245 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 paper is available only for the middle stage tray of the PF-701.

2.4

1 -4

Maintenance

Maintenance:

Once every 750,000 prints

Machine service life:

40,000,000 prints or 7 years (whichever earlier)



Machine data

Power source:

Inch: Metric:

AC230V ± 10%, 50Hz

Power consumption:

Inch:

Less than 3600W (full option)

Metric:

Less than 3450W (full option)

Weight:

AC208V to 240V ± 10%, 60Hz

I Outline

2.5


1050: Approx. 330 kg (with DF provided) / 1050P: Approx. 310 kg

Dimensions: 1050:

W 895 mm x D 775 mm x H 1190 mm

1050P:

W 895 mm x D 775 mm x H 1020 mm

1050 + PF-701 + FD-501 + FS-503:

W 2902 mm x D 775 mm x H 1190 mm

1050P + PF-701 + LS-501 + LS-502: W 3292 mm x D 775 mm x H 1020 mm (with no operation board included in each case)

2.6

Operating environment

Temperature:

10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)

Humidity:

10% RH to 80% RH

NOTE • The information herein May be subject to change for improvement without notice.

1 -5


UNIT CONFIGURATION


3. UNIT CONFIGURATION I Outline

[11]

[12]

[14]

[13]

[1]

[10]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[9]

[8]

[5]

[7]

1 -6

[6]

[1]

Operation panel

[8]

Toner supply section

[2]

Write section

[9]

Paper exit section

[3]

Developing section

[10]

Reverse/exit section

[4]

Registration section

[11]

Fusing section

[5]

ADU

[12]

Scanner section

[6]

Vertical conveyance section

[13]

Cleaning section

[7]

Paper feed section

[14]

Photo conductor section

1050to1002c



PAPER PATH

4. PAPER PATH [7]

[5]

[4]

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Registration conveyance

[5]

Reversed paper exit

[2]

Tray /2 paper feed

[6]

Straight paper exit

[3]

Tray /1 paper feed

[7]

ADU reverse conveyance

[4]

ADU Paper feed

I Outline

[6]

1050to1003c

1 -7



I Outline

PAPER PATH

Blank page

1 -8

1050ma.book Page 1 Wednesday, March 2, 2005 3:52 PM


OVERALL COMPOSITION

II COMPOSITION/OPERATION 1. OVERALL COMPOSITION Timing chart when the power is on [1][2][3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7] II Composition/Operation

1.1

Time (sec)

Item Scanner motor (M27)

F R

Exposure lamp (L1) Fusing heater lamps /1, /2 (L2, L3) Fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) Fusing motor (M1) Charger cleaning limit sensor (PS27) Charger cleaning motor (M23)

F R

Charger cleaning home sensor (PS26) Transfer/separation cleaning limit sensor (PS39) Transfer/separation cleaning motor (M20)

F R

Transfer/separation cleaning home sensor (PS38) Drum motor (M2) Developing motor (M3) Polygon motor (M21) Laser (LDB) Paper lift motor /1 (M25) Upper limit sensor (PS6) Paper lift motor /2 (M26) Upper limit sensor /2 (PS12)

1050to2322c

[1]

Power switch (SW2) on

[5]

Start of consumable stabilization control

[2]

Initial communication between the overall

[6]

Start of image stabilization control (for the

control board (OACB) and the printer con-

drum potential correction control, the maxi-

trol board (PRCB)

mum density adjustment control and the

[3]

Shading correction starts

[4]

The thermistor /1 (TH1) and the thermistor /

gamma correction control) [7]

Warming-up completed

3 (TH3) get to the specified temperature NOTE • Various types of operations vary depending on the software DIPSW setting and the environmental settings in the service mode. • The power is ON with the DF closed. • The power is turned ON with the paper lift plate of the tray brought down.

2 -1


OVERALL COMPOSITION

1.2


Control block diagram CCD

HDD

USB I/F

Parallel I/F

APS

RS232C PCI I/F I/F


IPB

DF

OB

LAN I/F

OACB

Write Section

M

FM

CL

SD

PS

PRCB

SDB

ACDB

[6]

2 -2

ADUDB1

[5]

ADUDB2

[4]

FD/FS/LS

[3]

[2]

[1]

Image bus

[4]

UART bus

[2]

Parallel bus

[5]

Other bus

[3]

Clock-synchronized serial bus

[6]

Individual signal line

[1]

PF

1050to2005c



SCANNER SECTION

2. SCANNER SECTION 2.1

Composition [5]

[6]

[7]

[8]


[4]

[3] Symbol

[2]

[1]

Item

1050to2006c

Specification/mechanism

[1]

Platen mode exposure method

Original stand fixed, exposure unit scan

[2]

DF mode exposure method

Exposure unit fixed, original scan

[3]

Exposure unit cooling method (DF mode)

Fan

[4]

Exposure unit home position detection

Photo sensor + stepping motor pulse control

method [5]

Read light reflection method

V-mirror unit

[6]

Exposure light source

Xenon lamp 75,000 lx

[7]

Original size detection method

Photo sensor + CCD sensor

[8]

Image read method

Lens + CCD sensor

2 -3


SCANNER SECTION

2.2


Drive [4]

[5]


[3]

[2]

2 -4

[1]

[1]

Scanner wire /Fr

[4]

Scanner wire /Rr

[2]

V-mirror unit

[5]

Exposure unit

[3]

Scanner motor (M27)

1050to2007c



2.3

Operation

2.3.1

Scanner/exposure lamp control

SCANNER SECTION

A. Operations when the power is ON When the power switch (SW2) is turned ON, the exposure unit conducts the home position search and the shading correction. (1) Home position search II Composition/Operation

The operation of the home position search varies depending on the ON/OFF condition of the scanner home sensor (PS51) [2]. • Home position search when the scanner home sensor (PS51) is OFF.

[2]

[1]

1050to2008c

[1]

Position at which the platen APS is read

[2]

Scanner home sensor (PS51)

• Home position search when the scanner home sensor (PS51) is ON.

[2]

[1]

1050to2009c

[1]

Position at which the platen APS is read

[2]


2 -5


SCANNER SECTION


(2) Shading correction After completion of the home position search [3], the exposure unit conducts shading corrections. There are three types of shading corrections: white correction 1 [4], white correction 2 [5] and black correction [6]. For the shading correction at the time of the power ON, these corrections are carried out in a series of operations.

[2]

[1]


[3]

[4] [5] [6]

[7]

[8] [9] [10]

2 -6

1050to2010c

[1]

Position at which the APS is read

[6]

Black correction

[2]


[7]

Home position search

[3]

Home position search terminated

[8]

Standby position while in the DF mode

[4]

White correction 1

[9]

Exposure lamp (L1) ON

[5]

White correction 2

[10]

Movement of the exposure lamp



SCANNER SECTION

B. Operations when the start button is turned ON (1) When the platen is in use When the start button is turned ON, the exposure unit conducts the shading correction and then the exposure scan. When the AE/AES is selected, the AE/AES scan [7] is made before the exposure scan is made. For the shading correction while in the exposure scan, the black correction is not conducted because of the exposure lamp being left turned on.

[2]


• While in the AE/AES copy

[1] [3] [4] [5] [6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10] [11]

1050to2011c

[1]


[7]

AE/AES scan

[2]


[8]

Position at which the original is read

[3]

DF close

[9]


[4]

Start button ON

[10]


[5]

White correction 1

[11]


[6]

White correction 2

2 -7


SCANNER SECTION


• While in the manual copy

[2]

[1] [3] [4] [5]


[6]

[7]

[8]

[9] [10]

2 -8

1050to2012c

[1]


[6]

White correction 2

[2]


[7]


[3]

DF close

[8]


[4]

Start button ON

[9]


[5]

White correction 1

[10]




SCANNER SECTION

(2) When the DF is in use When the start button is turned ON [3], the exposure unit conducts the shading correction and then moves to the position at which the DF is read. The same operations are made when the AE/AES is selected. And, for the shading correction in the DF mode, the black correction is not made because of the exposure lamp being left turned on.

[1]


[2]

[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

[8] [9]

1050to2013c

[1]


[6]


[2]


[7]


[3]

Start button ON

[8]


[4]

White correction 1

[9]


[5]

White correction 2

2 -9


SCANNER SECTION 2.3.2


Original size detection control

A. Detection method The DF mode and the platen mode is different in the detection method of the original size. (1) DF mode • See the DF-603. (2) Platen mode II Composition/Operation

• In the direction of the main scan Read by the CCD sensor. • In the direction of the sub-scan Detected by the combination of the ON/OFF of the APS sensor /1 (PS52) and the APS sensor /2 (PS53).

Original size

*

2 -10

CCD sensor

PS52

PS53

(Length of detection: mm)

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

Smallest

102.0

OFF

OFF

B6R

128.0

OFF

OFF

B5R

182.0

ON

OFF

B5

257.0

OFF

OFF

B4

257.0

—

ON

A5R

148.0

OFF

OFF

A5

210.0

OFF

OFF

A4R

210.0

ON

OFF

A4

297.0

OFF

OFF

A3

297.0

—

ON

Wide paper

304.8

—

ON

5.5 x 8.5R

139.7

OFF

OFF

5.5 x 8.5

215.9

OFF

OFF

8.5 x 14

215.9

—

ON

8.5 x 11R

215.9

ON

OFF

8.5 x 11

279.4

OFF

OFF

11 x 17

279.4

—

ON

16K

267.0

OFF

OFF

8K

267.0

—

ON

16KR

195.0

ON

OFF

For "—" in the table above, either of ON and OFF is acceptable as a result of the detection.



SCANNER SECTION

B. Detection timing

[1]

[2]

APS timing sensor (PS317) RADF open/close sensor (PS301)

1050to2016c

[1]

2.3.3

1st original size detection (with DF closed)

[2]

2nd original size detection

AE/AES control

When the AE/AES is selected, the density level of the original is detected automatically to adjust it to an appropriate density. The sampling range of the original density when the AE/AES is controlled is different for the platen mode and the DF mode. (1) AE/AES sampling range in the platen mode

[1] [1]

1050to2014c

30 mm

2 -11


Exposure lamp (L1)


SCANNER SECTION



(2) AE/AES sampling range in the DF mode

[2] [1] [1]

2.3.4

4 mm

1050to2015c

[2]

1 mm

Image processing

There are following items for the image processing. For particulars, see "19. IMAGE PROCESSING." • Shading correction • AE/AES processing • Area discrimination • Brightness/density conversion • Filter/magnification • Density gamma (conversion) • Halftone processing (error diffusion) • Tilt adjustment • Compression • Storage of image data

2 -12



WRITE SECTION

3. WRITE SECTION Composition

[5]

[6]


3.1

[1]

[4]

[3]

[2] Symbol

1050to2017c

Item


[1]

Laser beam scan assist

Collimator lens + CY1 lens + fθ lens + CY2 lens

[2]

Laser scan method

Polygon mirror (6 faces) + motor 57874.02 rpm (line speed: 490 mm/s) 50196.85 rpm (line speed: 425 mm/s) 34251.97 rpm (line speed: 290 mm/s)

[3]

Light source

1-chip 2-beam light emitting diode Output: 15 mW per beam

[4]

Positioning method

Index sensor + Index mirror

[5]

Laser refraction

Write mirror

[6]

Polygon motor cooling method

Fan

2 -13


WRITE SECTION

3.2

Operation

3.2.1

Outline


Analog image data read by the CCD sensor is AD converted by the CCD board (CCDB) before being sent out to the image processing board (IPB) for data processing. The image data thus processed is converted into laser beams by the laser drive board (LDB) and written onto the drum. The laser emits 2 beams with a single laser diode and writes 2 lines in one scan. The position at which the write starts is detected by the index board (INDEXB). II Composition/Operation

The 2 image memory control ASIC's equipped on the image processing board (IPB) conduct the compression/ decompression processing of the image data on the main image memory (256 MB) and the sub image memory (64 MB). This is to improve the multi access and realize the thumb-nail display function. Through the control of the HDD controller on the IPB, the space of 10 GB out of the large capacity hard disk /1 (HDD1) of 40 GB is used as an image memory. This space of 10 GB serves as an extension of each of the on-board image memories to reduce the occurrence of memory overflow.

2 -14


bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 3.2.2

WRITE SECTION

Laser beam path

[7] [1]

[2] [6] [3] [4]

[5]

1050to2018c

[1]

Polygon mirror

[5]

Drum

[2]

CY1 lens

[6]

CY2 lens

[3]

Collimator

[7]

Write mirror

[4]

Laser diode

[8]

fθ lens

3.2.3

Write control

To prevent the mis-centering of written images, an INDEX signal detected by the index board (INDEXB) is used to decide a reference position for writing in the direction of the drum shaft (main scan direction) and control the starting position of the laser writing on the drum according to the paper edge detected by the centering sensor (PS54).

2 -15


[8]


WRITE SECTION 3.2.4


Image stabilization control

A. MPC (Maximum power control) The image processing board (IPB) indicates to the laser drive board (LDB) a maximum output value emitted by the laser to set the maximum output value. The LDB stores this set value and maintains the amount of the laser beam stored through the APC (automatic power control) operations. See "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing II Composition/Operation

• When the power switch (SW2) is turned ON. After this, the MPC value is controlled by the dot diameter adjustment control. B. APC (Auto power control) The laser drive board (LDB) monitors the laser beam output for each scanned line. When the image processing board (IPB) completes the MPC setting, the LDB controls the laser output to the MPC value for each scanned line. C. Dot diameter correction control The patch image density on the drum is detected by the sensor on the toner control sensor board (TCSB), and the laser drive board (LDB) controls the amount of the laser beam so that its output value becomes the specified value. See "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing while in the print • When selecting "auto dot diameter adjustment" in the service mode. (2) Execution timing other than while in the print • After completion of the job for each 40,000 prints on the PM counter.

2 -16



PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION

4. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION Composition [6]

[7]

[2]

[1]

[5] Symbol

Item

[4]

[3] 1050to2019c


[1]

Environment temperature detection

Drum temperature sensor (thermistor contact type)

[2]

Drum potential detection method

Drum potential sensor (surface electrometer)

[3]

Gradation detection

Gamma sensor (diffused light detection type)

[4]

Paper jam prevention method

Drum claw

[5]


4.1

Maximum density detection

Maximum density sensor (reflective light detection type)

Drum jam detection

Jam sensor (reflective light detection type)

[6]

Drum

OPC (φ99.7 mm)

[7]

Drum periphery cooling method

Fan + duct

2 -17



4.2


Drive

A. Drum drive


[1]

[3]

[2] [1]

Drum

[3]

[2]

Drum motor (M2)

1050to2020c

Flywheel

B. Drum claw drive

[1]

[2]

[3]

1050to2021c

[1]

Drum claw

[2]

Drum claw solenoid (SD5)

2 -18

[3]

Drum motor (M2) drive input gear



4.3

Operation

4.3.1

Drum claw drive


A. Purpose To prevent the occurrence of a drum wrap jam, 3 drum claws are employed to prevent the drum from being wrapped with the copy paper. The contact and the release of contact of the drum claws onto the drum is made by turning ON/OFF the drum claw solenoid (SD5).

To prevent the transfer paper from getting soiled in certain areas and the drum from being damaged, the drum claws oscillate front to rear on the drum surface about 8 mm. There is a projection on the rear side of the drum claw unit. A cam provided on the gear presses this projection to push the drum claw unit to the front side. When the gear rotation releases the cam, the drum claw unit is returned to its former position by the spring. Repeating this operation oscillates the drum claws. 4.3.2

Cooling around the drum

To improve the durability of the developer, the ducts [2] are provided along the drum [4] shaft to exhaust heat around the drum.

[4]

[3]

[1]

[2]

1050to2022c

[1]

Developing suction assembly

[3]

Suction filter

[2]

Duct /Lw

[4]

Drum

2 -19


B. Oscillation operation


PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION 4.3.3



A. Drum potential correction The drum potential is controlled to keep the image quality at a fixed level at all times, regardless of the operating environment and the number of prints. For the drum potential correction control, a latent patch is formed on the drum surface with the laser PWM set to maximum. Next the potential difference between the latent patch and the developing bias are measured to adjust the charging current, the grid voltage and developing bias potential so that this potential difference


becomes a prescribed voltage at all times. See "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing • When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with the power switch (SW2) ON. • When the prescribed conditions (number of prints, and developing theta) are met. B. Environmental decision control The temperature of the environment in which the main body is installed is detected by the drum temperature sensor (TH5), and the environmental humidity is detected by the humidity sensor mounted in the printer control board (PRCB). Data thus detected are used as information to keep the image quality at a fixed level. See "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing • When the prescribed conditions are met with the SW2 ON. C. Drum rotation control When printing is interrupted under a high humidity environment, and under the environments of low humidity and a normal humidity, the surface sensitivity is different between the drum surface that is in contact with the developing unit and the cleaning unit and the drum surface that is in touch with nothing. When printing is made in a condition like this, uneven printing is made in the sub scan direction of the paper. To prevent this, the drum is rotated at a fixed cycle for a prescribed period of time to obtain a uniform surface sensitivity. See "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing • Once every 3 minutes while in idling • Once every hour while in the low power mode • When the prescribed conditions are met with the SW2 ON

2 -20



CHARGING SECTION

5. CHARGING SECTION 5.1

Composition


[1]

[4] Symbol

[3]

[2]

Item

1050to2023c


[1]

Charging method

Scorotoron (DC minus corona discharge)

[2]

Drum neutralizing method

Erase lamp (red LED)

[3]

Grid control method

Gold-plated stainless mesh plate

[4]

Wire cleaning method

Cleaning member + motor

Discharge wire: Tungsten φ0.06 mm (gold plated skin pass) x 2

5.2

Drive

[3]

[2] [1]

Charger cleaning member

[2]

Charging wire

[3]

[1]

1050to2024c

Charger cleaning motor (M23)

2 -21


CHARGING SECTION

5.3

Operation

5.3.1

Charging control


A. Charging wire The high voltage unit /1 (HV1) uses 24V DC to create a negative charge current to the charging wire to charge the drum. Charging output range: -350 µA to - 1050 µA x 2


B. Charging grid To make the discharge of the charging wire uniform, a minus (-) high voltage is sent from the high voltage unit /1 (HV1) to the charging grid. Charging grid voltage output range: -400V to -1000V 5.3.2

Wire cleaning control

A. Purpose The wire is cleaned periodically to prevent the deterioration of the discharging characteristics caused by soil adhered to the charging wire. B. Timing The charging wire is cleaned under the following conditions: • With the power switch (SW2) ON, when the number of prints counted from the execution of the previous cleaning is in excess of the specified number and when the fusing temperature is below 50°C. • While in the print, executed after completion of each job of the prescribed print counts. • After completion of the automatic replacement of the cleaning blade. NOTE • The number of prints at which the cleaning operation is conducted is set by the software DIPSW in the service mode.

2 -22



CHARGING SECTION

C. Cleaning operation The home position of the cleaning member is provided on the rear side of the machine. It operates as shown below.

[2]

[1]


[3] [4]

[5] [6] 1050to2025c

[1]

Charger cleaning limit sensor (PS27)

[4]

Cleaning (reverse)

[2]

Charger cleaning home sensor (PS26)

[5]

Home search (forward)

[3]

Cleaning (forward)

[6]

Home search (reverse)

5.3.3

Erase lamp control

A. Purpose To neutralize the residual potential on the drum surface and to make the potential on the drum surface uniform, the erase lamp (EL) is turned on before charging. B. Timing for the erase lamp to be turned on

Drum motor CONT signal Erase lamp (EL)

[1] [1]

1050to2026c

Drum motor ON

2 -23


TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION


6. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION 6.1

Composition


[5]

[3]

[4]

[2] Symbol [1]

[6]

Item Separation method

[1]

1050to2027c

Specification/mechanism AC/DC corona discharge Discharge wire: Oxide film tungsten φ0.06 mm x 2

[2]

Separation wire cleaning method


[3]

Transfer assist method

Transfer assist sheet + motor

[4]

Transfer guide plate dirt prevention

High voltage impression

[5]

Transfer method

method DC positive (+) corona discharge Discharge wire: Oxide film tungsten φ0.06 mm x 1 [6]

2 -24

Transfer wire cleaning method




6.2


Drive

A. Transfer/separation cleaning drive

[2]

[1] 1050to2028c

[1]

Transfer/separation cleaning motor (M20)

[2]

Transfer wire/separation wire

[3]

Transfer cleaning member/separation cleaning member

B. Transfer assist sheet drive

[2]

[1] [1]

Transfer assist motor (M19)

[2]

1050to2029c

Transfer assist sheet assembly

2 -25


[3]



6.3

Operation

6.3.1

Transfer guide control


A. Purpose To prevent the transfer guide plate from getting soiled, a minus (-) DC voltage is sent from the high voltage unit / 2 (HV2). Voltage: -500V


B. Timing The voltage sent to the transfer guide plate is made in sync with the ON/OFF of the drum motor (M2). 6.3.2

Transfer/separation control

A. Transfer The high voltage unit /2 (HV2) uses 24V DC to generate a plus (+) DC current to the transfer wire to discharge electricity. Transfer DC output range: 60 µA to 800 µA B. Separation For separation, an AC current and a minus DC current are used. The high voltage unit /2 (HV2) sends these currents to the separation wire to discharge electricity. Separation AC output range: 500 µA to 1400 µA Separation DC output range: 0 µA to - 300 µA 6.3.3

Transfer exposure lamp control

A. Purpose The transfer exposure lamp (TSL) is turned on to enhance the transferability and prevent the reverse charge to the drum. B. Timing The transfer exposure lamp (TSL) turns ON a specified period of time after the paper leading edge sensor (PS41) turns ON, and it turns OFF a specified period of time after the registration sensor (PS40) turns OFF. C. Lighting control The TSL switches the light intensity according to the process speed and the paper weight. However, when paper weight more than 162 g/m2 is selected, the TSL does not turn on.

2 -26




Transfer assist control

A. Purpose To enhance the transferability on the entire rear side of paper, the transfer assist sheet presses up the entire rear side of paper to get it in contact securely with the drum while in the transfer on the rear side. However, the size of paper to be operated must be larger than 297 mm (A3/A4) in the main scan direction (default for metric area), and larger than 279 mm (11 inches) (default for inch area). B. Timing made when paper is provided to prevent the transfer assist sheet from getting contact with the drum. The ON/ OFF timing of the pressing operation varies according to each of the line speeds. (1) ON timing The transfer assist sheet turns ON at a specified distance after the leading edge of paper passes through the transfer guide. This ON timing is based on the point at which the paper leading edge sensor (PS41) turns ON. (2) OFF timing The transfer assist sheet turns OFF short of a specified distance before the trailing edge of paper passes through the transfer guide. This OFF timing is based on the point at which the paper leading edge sensor (PS41) (PS41) turns OFF. (3) Others • When paper is found mis-centered more than 5 mm by the centering sensor (PS54), no pressure operation is made (to prevent the drum from being damaged). • The pressing operation is made only when the copy is being made on the second side of the paper. However, the weight of paper is in excess of 91 g/m2, the pressing operation is not made even while in the copy on the second side of the paper. • The paper width to which the transfer assist sheet is applicable is limited. When printing paper the width of which is shorter than a set width, the pressing operation is not made because of the drum getting damaged. • The pressing operation of the transfer assist sheet can be disabled by the software DIPSW. (DIPSW 6-2) • For paper sizes other than default, see "4.5 PCS corresponding parts," in Field Service, Chapter II.

2 -27


The paper pressing operation of the transfer assist sheet is controlled so that the pressing operation is only


TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION 6.3.5


Wire cleaning control

A. Purpose To prevent the deterioration of the discharge characteristics caused by toner adhering to the transfer wire and the separation wire, the wire is cleaned periodically. B. Timing • The cleaning is made when the number of prints counted from the execution of the previous cleaning is in excess of the specified number with the power switch (SW2) ON, and when the fusing temperature is below II Composition/Operation

50°C. • While in the print, executed after completion of each job of the prescribed print counts. NOTE • The number of prints at which the cleaning operation is conducted is set by the software DIPSW in the service mode. C. Cleaning operation The home position of the cleaning member is provided on the front of the machine. It operates as shown below.

[1]

[2] [3] [4]

[5] [6] 1050to2324c

[1]

Transfer/separation limit sensor (PS39)

[4]

Cleaning (returning)

[2]

Transfer/separation home sensor (PS38)

[5]

Home search (going)

[3]

Cleaning (going)

[6]

Home search (returning)

2 -28



6.4

PCS correspondence

6.4.1

Transfer assist sheet by paper sizes


A. Purpose For the transfer assist sheet, the sizes of paper that can be used is limited. It does not function when a paper size is not appropriate. However, it is possible to use paper other than the standard size by replacing the transfer/separation charger unit in accordance with the user specifications.

Other than the standard size of the transfer assist sheet, the following sizes are available. However, when changing to any other size than the standard, it is required to add a new relay wiring harness and a size detection connector. It is possible to use different transfer assist sheets. On that occasion, in addition to the relay wiring harness mentioned above, it is necessary to purchase a transfer assist sheet that is built in to the transfer/separation charger unit. Unit

Type

Wire color of the

Remarks

size detection connector Transfer/separation

Used exclusively for A3, A4

charger unit

Used exclusively for 11 in.

Brown Red

Used exclusively for 8K, 16K

Orange

Used exclusively for B4, B5

Yellow

Used exclusively for 8.5 in.

Pink

Used exclusively for A4R, A5

Blue

Used exclusively for 8, 8.125, 8.25 in. B5R Transfer assist sheet

Used exclusively for A3, A4

assembly

Used exclusively for 11 in.

Default size for metric area Default size for inch area

Purple Gray —

Default size for metric area Default size for inch area

Used exclusively for 8K, 16K Used exclusively for B4, B5 Used exclusively for 8.5 in. Used exclusively for A4R, A5 Used exclusively for 8, 8.125, 8.25 in. Used exclusively for B5R

NOTE • When different sizes are used, the size detection connector is required for the transfer/separation charger unit. • The unit must be changed by the user himself, and it is necessary to give appropriate guidance and explanation to the intended user.

2 -29


B. Usage


DEVELOPING UNIT


7. DEVELOPING UNIT Composition


7.1

[3]

[4] Symbol [1]

Item Developer agitation/conveyance

[1]

[2]

1050to2400c

Specification/mechanism Agitator screw (2) + agitator plate (1)

method [2]

Developer agitation/conveyance

Agitator plate (with 6 blades)

method [3]

Developing roller spiking restriction

Developer regulation blade

method [4]

Developing method

2 components developing method (Developer: toner + carrier) Developing roller (2 components reverse magnetic brush) Developing bias impressed: - 300V to - 800V

2 -30



7.2

DEVELOPING UNIT

Drive [5]

[1]


[6]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Gear for the agitator screw

[4]

Gear for the developing roller

[2]

Belt

[5]

Developing motor (M3)

[3]

Gear for the agitator plate

[6]

Coupling for the developing drive

1050to2401c

2 -31


DEVELOPING UNIT


7.3

Operation

7.3.1

Flow of developer

Developer in the developing unit is supplied to the developing roller [3] by the agitator plates [2] and its level is kept at a fixed height by the developer regulation blade [5]. Developer that remains on the developing roller is returned to the agitator screws [1]. There are 2 agitator screws equipped. The agitator plate furthest from the developing roller is used to stabilize the charging characteristics of toner supplied to the developing unit.


[4]

[5]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[1]

Agitator screw

[4]

Drum

[2]

Agitator plate

[5]

Developer regulation blade

[3]

Developing roller

2 -32

1050to2402c



DEVELOPING UNIT

Developing bias

A. Purpose During developing, a developing bias voltage is sent to the developing sleeve so that toner is ready to adhere to


the drum.

[2]

[1] 1050to2319c

[1]

Developing bias pin

[2]

Developing bias shaft

B. Timing To prevent unnecessary carriers from adhering to the drum, developing bias turns ON a specified period of time before charging is ON, and it turns OFF a specified period of time after charging is OFF.

2 -33


DEVELOPING UNIT 7.3.3


Developing suction

A. Purpose The developing suction fan (FM5) [1] is provided to suction toner being scattered around the developing unit and the drum and recover it to the suction filter [4] in the developing suction assembly [2]. B. Flow of air


[3] [4]

[2]

[1] 1050to2403c

[1]

Developing suction fan (FM5)

[3]

Duct

[2]

Developing suction assembly

[4]

Suction filter

C. Developing suction fan control While in the warm up and the print, the developing suction fan (FM5) turns ON when the drum motor (M2) turns ON, and it turns OFF a specified period of time after the M2 turns OFF.

2 -34



DEVELOPING UNIT


A. Toner density control The toner density control detects the patch density in images written and developed under fixed conditions and adjusts either the speed of rotation of the developing roller or the toner supply time depending on the findings obtained by comparing it to the reference value. For particulars, see "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing

B. Maximum density correction control The maximum density correction control is a control in which the patch, in images written under a fixed condition is developed while changing the speed of rotation of the developing roller. The resulting developed patch densities are compared to a reference density and when the developed patches are the same density as the reference patch, the developer roll speed is memorized. For particular, see “18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL”. (1) Execution timing • When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with the SW2 ON. • When the prescribed conditions (number of prints, and developing theta) are met. C. Gamma correction control The gamma correction control detects the patch density in images written and developed under a fixed condition, and adjusts the amount of laser beam PWM while writing depending on the findings obtained by comparing the patches with the reference value. For particular, see "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing • When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with SW2 ON. • When the prescribed conditions (number of prints, and developing theta) are met.

2 -35


• Once every specified number of prints after the power switch (SW2) is turned ON.


TONER SUPPLY SECTION


8. TONER SUPPLY SECTION


8.1

Composition

[5]

[6]

[2] [3]

[1]

[4]

1050to2035c

Symbol [1]

Item Toner replenishment method

Specification/mechanism Toner bottle Toner capacity: 1600 g Bottle size: φ155 mm x 427 mm

[2]

Toner intermediate supply method

Intermediate hopper Toner remaining sensor

[3]

Toner conveyance method

Twin air conveyance (toner pump motor + air pump motor)

[4]

Toner/air separation method

Separation by means of toner own weight + air bleed

[5]

Toner/air mixing method

Mixing in the cup section

[6]

Toner supply method

Large capacity hopper

Toner remaining sensor (used to detect an error) Toner capacity: 1700 g Toner remaining sensor x 2

2 -36



8.2


Drive

A. Toner bottle/large capacity hopper drive


[6]

[1]

[5]

[4]

[2]

[3] 1050to2325e

[1]

Toner bottle motor (M16)

[4]

Toner hopper motor (M7)

[2]

Gear for the large capacity hopper agitator shaft

[5]

Gear for the toner bottle rotation shaft

[3]

Mixing section agitator shaft gear

[6]

Toner bottle

2 -37




B. Intermediate hopper/air separation drive


[5] [1]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[2]

1050to2326c

[1]

Air separation motor (M10)

[4]

Gear for the rotary valve

[2]

Gear for the intermediate hopper section

[5]

Gear for the air separation section agitator

agitator shaft [3]

2 -38

Intermediate hopper motor (M11)

shaft



8.3

Operation

8.3.1

Toner conveyance control


A. Purpose The toner supply section of the intermediate and low speed machines is equipped near the developing unit. For the high speed machine that deals with a large number of prints, a toner supply section of a large capacity is required and it is not possible to secure a sufficient space near the developing unit. So, it is inevitable to place the toner supply section in a location away from the developing unit. As a result, because of the distance up to is required. As a toner conveyance device for the long distance, this machine employs the air conveyance method using the toner pump and the air pump. B. Toner conveyance path

1. 2.

Toner put in from the bottle [1] is conveyed to the large capacity hopper [2] by the agitator operation. When the toner supply operation starts, toner is guided to the mixing section [3], where it is mixed with air from the air pump [5].

3. 4. 5.

Toner mixed with air is conveyed to the air separation section [6] by the pressure from the toner pump [4]. Toner conveyed to the air separation section drops off by its own weight to be separated from the air. Toner separated from the air at the air separation section is conveyed to the intermediate hopper [7] by means of the agitator operation.

6.

When the toner supply operation starts, toner in the intermediate hopper is conveyed to the developing unit [8] by means of the agitator operation.

7. Finally, air passing through the air separation section is sent to the mixing section by the air pump. In this manner, a toner conveyance path is formed that circulates between the large capacity hopper and the developing unit.

[5]

[6]

[4] [1]

[2]

[7] [3] [8]

1050to2038c

[1]

Toner bottle

[5]

Air pump

[2]


[6]

Air separation section

[3]

Mixing section

[7]

Intermediate hopper

[4]

Toner pump

[8]

Developing unit

2 -39


the toner supply section having to be extended, an toner conveyance mechanism to deal with the long distance




C. Pump control (1) Configuration In both the toner pump and the air pump, the diaphragm [2] is reciprocated by the toner pump motor (M28) or the air pump motor (M29) to circulate air in the pump room [3]. In this manner, air in the pump room is pressurized to be output.


[7]

[1]

[6]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[4]

1050to2039c

[1]

Motor

[5]

Input air

[2]

Diaphragm

[6]

Pump encoder sensor

[3]

Pump room

[7]

Encoder

[4]

Output air

(2) Control Each pump motor is equipped with the pump encoder sensor to monitor the speed of the motor. • When the pump motor is turned ON, if the speed of the motor fails to get to 85% of the prescribed speed within a specified period of time, this is deemed to be an error. • While in operation, if a low speed rotation below a prescribed value is detected a specified number of times in succession, this is deemed to be an error.

2 -40




Toner supply control

A. Purpose When it is determined that toner supply is required as a result of the toner density control, toner is supplied. The intermediate hopper receives recycled toner from the cleaning section and a new toner from the air separation section. The intermediate hopper mixes these and supplies them to the developing unit. B. Timing Toner is supplied when the trailing edge of paper in printing is detected. The toner supply time varies depending

8.3.3

Toner remaining detection

A. Toner remaining detection The intermediate hopper section is equipped with the toner remaining sensor /1 (PS31) [1] and the large capacity hopper [4] equipped with the toner remaining sensors /2 (PS32) [2], /3 (PS33) [3] and /4 (PS34) [5]. Depending on the ON/OFF condition of the PS31, the PS32 and the PS33, the toner level is displayed on the operation panel. (1) Sensor position

[6]

[5]

[2] [4]

[1]

[3]

1050to2040c

[1]

Toner remaining sensor /1 (PS31)

[4]


[2]


[5]


[3]


[6]

Mixing section

2 -41


on the result of the toner density control and the paper size. This is normally controlled between 0 to 0.55 sec.




(2) Toner remaining display Display on the operation


board

PS31

ON

ON

ON

OFF

PS32

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

PS33

ON

ON

OFF

OFF 1050to2041c

*1

However, the determination is finally made a specified period of time after the toner supply door is closed.

(3) Error detection When SC23-14 or SC-23-17 of the error codes that are related to the toner supply occurs, the machine gets into an error latch condition. Be sure to repair the defective part before setting the software DIPSW3-1 to 0. Setting the DIPSW3-1 to 0 without repairing the defective part may cause toner to overflow in the inside and the outside of the machine. B. Detection timing (1) Timing The detection timing is as described below: • When the power switch (SW2) is turned ON. • When the front doors /Ft and /Rt, and the toner supply door are opened and closed. • At all times when the printing. (2) Toner bottle When the toner bottle is rotated, toner moves to the exit of the bottle [1] along the spiral groove carved on the surface of the bottle. When the bottle exit turns to the bottom, toner flows into the large capacity hopper [2].

[1]

C

B

C

B

A

[3]

A

[1]

Exit

[2]

Into the large capacity hopper

2 -42

[3]

[2]

Rotated to 90°

1050to2042c



CLEANING/RECYCLE SECTION

9. CLEANING/RECYCLE SECTION 9.1

Composition


[1]

[4] Symbol

[3]

Item

[2]

1050to2043c


[1]

Drum cleaning method

Counter method + cleaning blade (2 pcs., replaced auto-

[2]

Toner collection method with a brush

Toner guide brush

[3]

Toner collection method

Screw

[4]

Toner recycle method

Screw

matically) + weight plate

2 -43



9.2


Drive

A. Cleaning/recycle drive


[1]

[4]

[3]

[2]

1050to2044c

[1]

Gear for the toner guide brush

[3]

Gear for the toner recycle screw

[2]

Drum motor (M2)

[4]

Gear for the toner conveyance screw

B. Cleaning blade drive

[4]

[1]

[2] [3]

1050to2045c

[1]

Wire

[3]

Blade release arm

[2]

Pulley for the cleaning blade

[4]

Blade motor (M22)

2 -44



9.3

Operation

9.3.1

Cleaning operation


A. Assist mechanism Toner scraped off by the cleaning blade [2] is collected by the toner guide brush [4] and guided to the toner conveyance screw [5]. At this time, toner remaining on the toner guide shaft [7] is scraped off by the toner collection scraper [6].


[1]

[2] [7]

[6] [5]

[4]

[3]

[1]

Cleaning blade /1

[5]

[2]

Cleaning blade /2

[6]

Toner collection scraper

[3]

Drum

[7]

Toner guide shaft

[4]

Toner guide brush

1050to2046c

Toner conveyance screw

2 -45




B. Automatic replacement of the blade The cleaning section is equipped with 2 cleaning blades. The 2nd cleaning blade pushes up the blade release arm [3] as the blade motor (M22) [1] rotates. At this time, the wire wound around the cleaning blade shaft is taken up to rotate the cleaning blade shaft and change the cleaning blades /1 and /2. Automatically changing these 2 cleaning blades lengthens the maintenance cycle.

[1]

[3]

[2]


[4]

1050to2047c

[1]

Blade motor (M22)

[3]

Blade release arm

[2]

Blade sensor /1 (PS24)

[4]

Blade sensor /2 (PS25)

C. Blade pressure release operation To enhance the increased durability of the drum and the cleaning blade, the cleaning blade conducts the pressure release operation to the drum by the blade motor (M22). The M22 operates in accord with the ON/OFF of the drum motor (M2). The pressure release and the replacement position of the cleaning blade are controlled by the blade sensor /1 (PS24) and the blade sensor /2 (PS25). D. Blade set mode As an operation conducted after replacing the cleaning blade for the maintenance purpose, there is the blade set mode in the service mode. Executing the blade set mode prevents the curling-up of the cleaning blade by cleaning the drum with the cleaning blade after letting toner adhere to the drum. NOTE • Be sure to avoid the use of this mode other than when replacing the cleaning blade. Otherwise, the cleaning blade count of the fixed parts count is reset and the automatic changing of the blades is not made at the correct timing.

2 -46




Toner collection mechanism

A. Purpose The toner collection mechanism is provided to reuse toner scraped off by the cleaning blade. B. Timing The toner guide brush used to collect toner is driven by the drum motor (M2), and the toner collection operation is made in accordance with the ON/OFF operation of the M2. Toner conveyance operation

A. Toner conveyance mechanism Collected toner collected is conveyed to the recycle section by the toner conveyance screw of the cleaning section. The recycle section conveys this toner to the intermediate hopper by the toner recycle screw. B. Timing The toner conveyance screw and the toner recycle screw are driven by the drum motor (M2), and this operation is conducted in accordance with the ON/OFF operation of the M2. 9.3.4


A. Black band creation control In order to provide lubrication of the cleaning blade while in the low printing ratio, and to prevent the deterioration of toner while in the increasing driving distance, the laser is turned on at prescribed intervals to create black band patterns on the drum. For particular, see "18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL." (1) Execution timing • 3 times every 5 prints

2 -47


9.3.3


PAPER FEED SECTION


10. PAPER FEED SECTION 10.1 Composition [6]


[5]

[4]

[3]

[1]

[2] Symbol

Item

1050to2300c


[1]

Paper separation method /1

Air assist fan

[2]

Paper size detection method

Main scan direction detection: Volume resistance Sub scan direction detection: Photo sensor

[3]

2 -48


Torque limiter + separation roller + electromagnetic clutch

[4]

Paper empty detection method

Photo sensor

[5]

Paper pick-up method

Self-weighting roller + solenoid

[6]

Paper lift method

Wire driven horizontal up/down



PAPER FEED SECTION

10.2 Drive Tray lift drive

[6] [6]

[7] [1]

[2]

[5]

[7]

[3]

[4]

1050to2301c

[1]

Lift release coupling gear

[5]

Paper lift plate

[2]

Paper lift motor /1 (M25), /2 (M26)

[6]

Lift wires /Fr1, /Rr1

[3]

Torque restriction gear (oil damper)

[7]

Lift wires /Fr2, /Rr2

[4]

One-way gear

2 -49


10.2.1


PAPER FEED SECTION 10.2.2


Paper feed drive

[1] [2] [10] [9] II Composition/Operation

M4

[3] [8]

[4] [5] [6]

[7]

1050to2302c

[1]

Paper feed clutch /1 (CL4), /2 (CL6)

[2]

Coupling

[7]

Separation roller

[3]

Separation clutch /1 (CL5), /2 (CL7)

[8]

Pick-up roller

[4]

Tray rear section

[9]

Belt

[5]

Tray central section

[10]

Paper feed roller

2 -50

[6]

Torque limiter



PAPER FEED SECTION

Pick-up drive


[2]

[1]

1050to2303c

[1]

Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD3), /2 (SD4)

[2]

Pick-up roller

2 -51


PAPER FEED SECTION


10.3 Operation 10.3.1

Up/down control

A. Up operation The paper lift motors /1 (M25) and /2 (M26), cause the lift wires to be taken up by the pulley to raise the paper lift plate. B. Down operation II Composition/Operation

When pulling out the tray, the coupling gear [3] that transmits the drive force from the motor shaft [2] of the paper lift motors /1 (M25) and /2 (M26) to the pulley is disengaged by the release lever [1]. The paper lift plate goes down slowly by its own weight through the torque restriction gear [4] that is activated only while in the down operation.

[3]

[2]

[4]

[1]

[1]

[1]

Release lever

[3]

Coupling gear

[2]

Motor shaft of the paper lift motors /1 (M25),

[4]

Torque restriction gear

1050to2304c

/2 (M26)

C. Operation timing When the tray is set, the paper lift motors /1 (M25) and /2 (M26) turn ON to raise the paper lift plate. When the upper limit sensors /1 (PS6) and /2 (PS12) turn ON, M25 and M26 stop. When PS6/PS12 turn OFF from ON during the print operation, M25/M26 turn ON again. When the paper lift plate is raised until the PS6/PS12 turn ON, M25/M26 turn OFF again.

2 -52



PAPER FEED SECTION

Size detection control

There are 2 types of the paper size detection: detection in the main scan direction and detection in the sub scan direction. For size detection in the sub scan direction, the detection is made by a pair of the paper size sensors. Tray /1 is detected by /Fr1 (PS4) [4] and /Rr1 (PS5) [3], and tray /2 detected by /Fr2 (PS10) [4] and /Rr2 (PS11) [3]. When the paper rear guide [6] is moved, the detection cams /Up [1] and /Lw [2] of a different form are pressed by the knob [5]. According to the position of the paper rear guide, the paper size sensors /Fr1 [4], Fr/2 [4] and


Rr/1 [3], /Rr2 [3] turn ON/OFF.

[6]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[1] [2] 1050to2305c

[1]

Detection cam /Up

[4]

Paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS4), /Fr2 (PS10)

[2]

Detection cam /Lw

[5]

Knob

[3]

Paper size sensors /Rr1 (PS5), /Rr2 (PS11)

[6]

Paper rear guide

2 -53


PAPER FEED SECTION


Paper size

Paper size sensor


/Fr1 (PS4), /Fr2 (PS10)

/Rr1 (PS5), /Rr2 (PS11)

A5, B5, A4, 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5 x 11*

OFF

OFF

B5R, A4R, 8.5 x 11R*

OFF

ON

12 x 18, F4*

ON

ON

B4, A3, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17

ON

OFF

The size in the main scan direction is detected by the paper size VR/1 (VR2) and /2 (VR4) that are interlocked with the paper guide, and the main body is informed of it a specified period of time after the tray is set. For the resistance value, a default is set by "Tray Adjustment" in the service mode. *

For the paper sizes shown below, it is necessary to set the paper size on the operation panel. Make a selection from among A5 and 5.5 x 8.5. Make a selection from among A4R and 8.5 x 11R. Make a selection as F4 from among 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13 and 8.5 x 13.

2 -54



PAPER FEED SECTION

Pick-up mechanism

Paper is picked up when the pick-up solenoids /1 (SD3) and /2 (SD4) turn OFF. When the SD3/SD4 turn OFF, the pick-up roller goes down and pressurizes paper by its own weight. When the paper feed clutches /1 (CL4) and /2 (CL6) turn ON, the pick-up roller rotates to convey the paper to the paper feed roller.

[5]

Paper feed sensors /1 (PS7), /2 (PS13) Paper feed motor (M4) Paper feed clutches /1 (CL4), /2 (CL6) Pick-up solenoids /1 (SD3), /2 (SD4)

[1]

[2]

[4]

1050to2306c

[1]

Start button ON

[4]

Pick-up of the 2nd sheet of paper

[2]

Pick-up of the 1st sheet of paper

[5]

Conveyance of the 2nd sheet of paper

[3]

Conveyance of the 1st sheet of paper

2 -55


[3]




Separation mechanism

For the transmission of the drive force to the separation roller [4], the drive force of the paper feed motor (M4) is transmitted by the ON/OFF operation of the separation clutches /1 (CL5) and /2 (CL7) through the torque limiter [3]. The separation roller [4] is driven in the direction opposite to the paper conveyance. However, when no paper is conveyed, and when only one sheet of paper is conveyed, the frictional force generating between the paper feed roller [1] and the separation roller [4] or the paper and the separation roller is greater than the frictional force of the torque limiter [3]. Accordingly, the separation roller rotates in the direction II Composition/Operation

of the paper conveyance to convey paper to the vertical conveyance section. When 2 or more sheets of paper are conveyed, the frictional force between these sheets of paper is smaller than the frictional force of the torque limiter and the separation roller rotates in the reverse direction to prevent the lower most paper from being conveyed.

[7]

[1]

[6]

[2]

[5]

[3]

[4]

1050to2307c

[1]

Paper feed roller

[5]

2nd sheet of paper

[2]

Separation clutches /1 (CL5), /2 (CL7)

[6]

1st sheet of paper

[3]

Torque limiter

[7]

Pick-up roller

[4]

Separation roller

A. Separation clutch control When paper is slippery (or, when the power for conveyance is insufficient), paper conveyed from the pick-up roller may be unable to pass through the separation sections of the paper feed roller and the separation roller. To alleviate a condition like this, turn OFF the separation clutches /1 (CL5) and /2 (CL7) until paper gets to the separation section to cut off the drive force to the separation roller, and make it function as a driven roller to the paper feed roller. After paper gets to the separation section, turn ON the CL5 and CL7 to conduct the normal operation. However, this control should be conducted as follows: Type of paper:Coated paper B:

Conducted unconditionally.

Type of paper:Those other than the coated paper B: Conducted automatically judging from the condition of conveyance at the separation section.

2 -56



PAPER FEED SECTION

Air assist mechanism

The trays /1 and /2 are provided with the paper feed assist fan that assists the paper separation by blowing air [4] on paper [3] from the paper guides, 1 provided at front and rear. The tray /1 is provided with the paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM20) [2] and /Rr1 (FM21) [1] and tray /2 with paper feed assist fans /Fr2 (FM22) [2] and /Rr2 (FM23) [1]. Each paper feed assist fan is effective mainly for thick paper and highly adhesive paper (coated paper). However, in the case of plain paper, it may not be fed smoothly.

[4]


[3]

[1] [2]

1050to2309c

[1]

Paper feed assist fans /Rr1 (FM21), /Rr2 (FM23)

[3]

Paper

[2]

Paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM20), /Fr2 (FM22)

[4]

Blow-out of air

A. Operation timing The operation of the paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM20), /Rr1 (FM21), /Fr2 (FM22) and /Rr2 (FM23) can be selected from among the following three modes: Always ON, Always OFF and Auto. In the Auto mode, the paper assist fan is normally OFF. However, when the conveyance time from the start of the paper feed to the paper feed sensors /1 (PS7) and /2 (PS13) is in excess of the specified time period, or when a no-feed jam condition occurs, the paper feed assist fan of the corresponding tray turns ON from then on. However, when a paper type other than the coated paper B is set and the separation roller functions as a driven roller to the paper feed roller by the control of the separation clutch, the paper feed assist fan remains OFF to prevent the multi feed of paper. The operations in the Auto mode can be reset by pulling out the tray (except for pulling out of the tray while in a jam), or turning OFF the power switch.

2 -57




Paper empty detection control

The paper empty detection in the tray is made by the paper empty sensors /1 (PS8) and /2 (PS14). 10.3.7

Remaining paper detection control

The remaining paper detection is made by the remaining paper VR/1 (VR1) and /2 (VR3) [1] that are interlocked through the pulley [2] and the gear with the paper lift plate [3]. The level of the paper remaining is detected in five steps according to the resistance value and sent to the main body after being AD converted. II Composition/Operation

At this time, the following are displayed on the operation panel: 1st step (displayed in red): 10% or less 1st step (displayed in white): 25% or less 2nd step (displayed in white): 25 to 50% 3rd step (displayed in white): 50 to 75% 4th step (displayed in white): 75 to 100%

[4]

[1] [3]

[2]

[1]

[1]

Remaining paper VR/1 (VR1), /2 (VR3)

[3]

Paper lift plate

[2]

Lift pulley /Rr

[4]

Lift wire

2 -58

[2]

1050to2310c



PAPER FEED SECTION

Tray lock control

Each tray is locked by the tray lock lever. When the handle release sensors /1 (PS9) and /2 (PS15) of either of the tray /1 and /2 are OFF, the tray lock solenoids /1 (SD1) and /2 (SD2) of the corresponding tray turn on and the tray lock lever is pulled up to release the lock, thus allowing you to pull out the tray. And when PS9 is OFF SD1 is turned ON, PS15 turning OFF will not turn on SD2. This is to prohibit two trays from being pulled out at the same time. When a jam occurs that affects the tray and the exit conveyance section, the tray remains locked until the

10.3.9

Dehumidification heater control

The tray /1 and the tray /2 are provided with the dehumidification heater /1 (HTR1) and /2 (HTR2), 1 each respectively, below each tray. They are turned on when the dehumidification heater switch (SW3) of the main body is turned ON.

2 -59


jammed paper is removed. Doing this prevents the paper from being torn.

1050ma02e.fm Page 60 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:23 PM

PAPER FEED SECTION


10.4 PCS corresponding parts 10.4.1

Corresponding to additional prints

As parts corresponding to additional prints, the following are available. • Cleaning brush • Paper feed assist plate A. Cleaning brush II Composition/Operation

(1) Purpose When performing overlay printing (see chapter III "6.5 Overlay printing adjustment" in the Field Service) on coated paper on which offset printing has been made, the conveyance force of the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller is remarkably reduced by powder that is used to prevent the blocking (back transfer) while in the offset printing, thus causing a no feed jam. The cleaning brush is a part used to remove this powder to realize the improved feedability of paper. Since it is used while in the overlay printing, it can be installed only in the tray 4 of PF-701 that is used while in the overlay printing. The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller can be cleaned with the brush. Do not use the cleaning brush for the paper with many paper powders. The cleaning brush may be clogged by the paper powder and the conveyance power may be reduced. (2) Composition The package of a set contains the following: • [1] Brush main body:

1 pc.

• [2] Positioning screw:

2 pcs.

• [3] Screw:

2 pcs. (M3 x 6)

Only one brush is packaged with this machine. When required additionally, brushes can be purchased as service parts.

[1]

[2]

[3] 1050to2311c

2 -60

1



PAPER FEED SECTION

B. Paper feed assist plate (1) Purpose The paper feed assist plate increases the pressure on the pick-up roller and it is used to adjust the pick-up pressure on paper. Adjustments can be made according to the types of paper to allow the increased paper feedability. It is possible to improve a no feed condition that is apt to occur when a highly adhesive paper like coated paper is fed. A paper feed assist plate weighs about 10g. One pick-up roller can be attached with 4 plates normally (See "6.5 Overlay printing adjustment" in the Field Service). Increasing or decreasing the number of plates allows the adjustment of the pick-up roller according to the type of paper. (2) Composition The package of a set contains the following: • [1] Paper feed assist plate:

4 pcs.

• [2] Screw:

2 pcs. (M3 x 8)

Only 4 paper feed assist plates are packaged together with the main body. When required additionally, can be purchased as service parts.

[1]

[2] 1050to2312c

2 -61


chapter V "5. PAPER SETTING" in the Field Service) and 8 plates while in the overlay printing (See chapter III


VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION


11. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE SECTION 11.1 Composition


[1]

[2]

[6]

1050to2314c

Symbol

2 -62

Item


[1]

Paper dust removing method

Paper dust guide brush forced drive

[2]

Registration correction method

Creation of a roller stopper loop




11.2 Drive [17]

[1]

[16]

[2]

[15]


[3] [4] [5]

[14]

[6] [7]

[8]

[9]

[13]

[10] [11]

[12]

1050to2315c

[1]

Toner guide brush

[10]

Pre-registration clutch /2 (CL3)

[2]

Scraper shaft

[11]

Pre-registration roller /2

[3]

Conveyance roller /1

[12]

Coupling (transmission of driving force to tray /2)

[4]


[13]

Belt

[5]


[14]

Paper feed motor (M4)

[6]

Vertical conveyance clutch (CL2)

[15]

Coupling (transmission of driving force to tray /1)

[7]


[16]

Vertical conveyance motor (M8)

[8]

Belt

[17]

Conveyance exit roller

[9]


2 -63





Pre-registration control

When the paper feed starts, paper is sent out to the pre-registration roller by the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller. When the paper strikes the pre-registration roller that is stopped, a loop is formed to adjust paper skew. When the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1) and /2 (CL3) turn on, the driving force of the paper feed motor (M4) is transmitted to the pre-registration rollers /1 and /2 to convey paper.


11.3.2

Conveyance control

Paper fed from the tray /1 is conveyed to the conveyance roller /1 which is also driven by the vertical conveyance motor (M8) by the pre-registration roller /1. Paper fed from the tray /2 is conveyed to the conveyance rollers /3 and /2, which are in turn driven by the pre-registration roller /2 and the paper feed motor (M4) through the vertical conveyance clutch (CL2), and then conveyed finally to the conveyance roller /1. Since the line speeds of the pre-registration rollers /1 and /2 and the conveyance rollers /3 and /2 that are driven by the M4 are fixed at a high speed, the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1) and /2 (CL3), and the CL2, while in the transfer/conveyance in a low speed, are turned off to cut off the transmission of the driving force. At this time, the conveyance roller /1 driven by the M8 rotates at a low speed. However, it starts to rotate in a high speed when the loop sensor (PS16) detects the trailing edge of paper. 11.3.3

Exit conveyance control

For the exit conveyance, the vertical conveyance motor (M8) drives the conveyance exit roller and conveyance roller /1. 11.3.4

Paper dust removing mechanism

At the exit of the vertical conveyance section, paper dust is removed by means of the paper dust guide brush. When paper dust adhering to the conveyance exit roller is removed by the paper dust guide brush (raising brush), it then adheres to the scraper shaft (metal roller) to be removed by the scraper (sheet) that touches the scraper shaft.

2 -64



REGISTRATION SECTION

12. REGISTRATION SECTION 12.1 Composition [4]


[1]

[3] Symbol

[2] Item

[1]

1050to2049c


[1]

Multi feed detection method

Multi feed sensor

[2]

Paper skew adjustment method

Loop roller + motor

[3]

Registration method

Creation of a roller stopper loop

[4]

Mis-centering detection method

Contact image sensor (200 dpi equivalent)

2 -65




12.2 Drive A. Registration roller drive

[2]

[1]


[3]

1050to2050c

[1]

Registration roller /Up

[2]

Registration roller /Lw

[3]

Registration motor (M17)

B. Loop roller drive

[2]

[1]

1050to2051c

[1]

2 -66

Loop motor (M18)

[2]

Loop roller





Multi feed detection control

To detect the multi feed of paper while in the paper conveyance, the multi feed sensor is provided at the exit of the loop roller. The multi feed sensor is an acoustic sensor made up of a pair of a sender and a receiver. In this sensor, the sound wave sent from the multi feed detection board /1 (ADUDB1) is received by the multi feed detection board /2 (ADUDB2). When a single sheet of paper passes through this interval, it is possible to receive a sound wave, but when plural sheets of paper pass through, it is not possible to receive sound waves. In this However, the following paper may not be detected accurately and the multi feed detection function is turned OFF. • Coated paper A and B weighing 50 to 61 g/m2 • Paper weighing 210 to 300 g/m2 12.3.2

Loop control

When paper conveyed to the loop roller [1] strikes the registration rollers /Up [4] and /Lw [2], a loop [6] is formed until the loop roller turns OFF. In this way, a paper skew is adjusted. When paper is heavier than 162 g/m2, it has a stronger repulsive force and there may occur a transfer jitter due to the increased partial line speed caused by the force by which the loop tends to go back to its original form. Therefore, it is controlled so that the loop amount becomes smaller than that of the paper of 161 g/m2. A. Registration path

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[2] [1]

Loop roller

[7]

[1] [5]

1050to2052c

Registration sensor (PS40)

[2]

Registration roller /Lw

[6]

Loop

[3]

Paper leading edge sensor (PS41)

[7]

ADU deceleration sensor (PS42)

[4]

Registration roller /Up

2 -67


way, a detection is made to check to see if paper is multi fed.




B. Registration operation

[1]

[2]

[3]

Loop motor (M18) Registration motor (M17)


ADU deceleration sensor (PS42) Registration sensor (PS40) 1050to2053c

[1]

Start button ON

[2]

Loop creation

12.3.3

[3]

Registration starts

Paper mis-centering adjustment control

To detect the mis-centering of paper after registration, the centering sensor (PS54) is provided at the exit of the registration roller. The PS54 is a contact image sensor of about 200 dpi and the mis-centering information detected by the PS54 is processed at the image processing section and adjusted prior to writing so that the image data corresponds to the position. The mis-centering amount can be adjusted up to ± 5 mm. When the mis-centering amount is in excess of 5 mm, paper is output with no adjustment made. 12.3.4

Paper leading edge timing adjustment control

To detect the paper leading edge timing after registration, the paper leading edge sensor (PS41) is provided at the exit of the registration roller. Based on the paper leading edge position detected by the PS41, adjustments are made prior to writing so that the image data corresponds to the position.

2 -68



HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE

13. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE 13.1 Composition


[2]

[1]

1050to2054c

Symbol

Item


[1]

Paper conveyance method

Belt conveyance

[2]

Conveyance assist method

Duct + fan suction

13.2 Drive [1]

[2] 1050to2055c

[1]

Belt

[2]

Conveyance motor (M5)

2 -69





Conveyance control

A. Conveyance suction The duct [2] provided at the center of the conveyance section sucks paper passing through the conveyance section to convey it. One suction opening [1] is normally provided at the center of the conveyance section. When trouble occurs with the conveyance due to an insufficient paper suction force, it is possible to increase the suction force by adding suction openings, 1 each at front and rear, with the duct cover [3] removed. II Composition/Operation

This adjustment is made when transfer jitter occurs. For particulars of the adjustment procedure, see chapter III "6.4 Transfer jitter adjustment" in Field service.

[2]

[3]

[1]

1050to2056c

[1]

Permanent suction opening

[2]

Duct

2 -70

[3]

Duct cover




B. Duct path The duct [1] in the conveyance section [3] is connected to a duct that serves also as the transfer/separation charger unit at the back of the device. This duct uses the transfer/separation suction fan (FM4) [2] to suction toner scattering around the transfer/separation charger unit and the conveyance section and discharges the exhaust outside of the main body.


[3]

[2] [1]

Duct

[2]

Transfer/separation suction fan (FM4)

[3]

1050to2320c

Conveyance section

C. Fan control The transfer/separation suction fan (FM4) turns ON while in the copy.

2 -71


ADU


14. ADU 14.1 Composition [1]


1

2

3 [1]

Symbol [1]

[1]

Item

[1]

1050to2058


ADU conveyance method

Conveyance rollers + motor

14.2 Drive [7]

[6]

[8]

[5]

[9]

[10]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[1]

ADU exit roller

[6]

ADU conveyance motor /1 (M15)

[2]

ADU conveyance roller /4

[7]

ADU reverse roller

[3]


[8]

ADU reverse motor (M12)

[4]


[9]

ADU conveyance motor /2 (M16)

[5]


[10]

Loop motor (M18)

2 -72

1050to2059



ADU

14.3 Operation 14.3.1 A.

Conveyance control

Non-stack ADU paper feed mechanism

Paper conveyed from the reverse/exit section is conveyed to the ADU by the reverse/exit roller [4] and the ADU reverse roller [5]. When the ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46) [2] detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF, the ADU reverse roller rotates in the reverse direction to send paper back in the direction in which it was conside, according to the form of the metal frame of the conveyance path. In this manner, each sheet of paper is turned over and reversed and conveyed without being stacked in the ADU. While in this paper conveyance, the ADU reverse sensor /2 (PS45) [6] detects the trailing edge of paper to decide the reverse timing of the ADU reverse roller.

[4]

[5]

[2]

[6]

[7]

[1] [3]

1050to2060

[1]


[5]

ADU reverse roller

[2]

ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS46)

[6]

ADU reverse sensor /2 (PS45)

[3]

ADU reversed paper

[7]

ADU paper supplied

[4]

Reverse/exit roller

2 -73


veyed. At this time, the paper is conveyed to the ADU conveyance roller /1 [1] side, not to the reverse/exit roller


FUSING SECTION


15. FUSING SECTION 15.1 Composition


[1]

[2] [3]

[7]

[4]

[5] [6] 1050to2316c

Symbol

Item


[1]

Fusing roller /Up cleaning method

Cleaning web (non-woven cloth + silicon oil)

[2]

Fusing method

Pressurized heat roller method

[3]

Fusing roller /Up heating method

Halogen lamp x 2 (main/sub)

[4]

Fusing roller /Lw heating method

External heating by means of the halogen lamp (x 1) of the fusing heating roller

2 -74

[5]

Fusing heating roller cleaning method

Scraper

[6]

Neutralizing method

Non-contact neutralizing brush

[7]

Separation method

Fusing claws



FUSING SECTION

15.2 Drive 15.2.1

Web drive

[1] [2]


[8]

[3] [4]

[7]

[5]

[6]

1050to2317c

[1]

Web motor (M24)

[5]

Fusing roller /Up

[2]

Web unwinding shaft

[6]

Paper conveyance direction

[3]

Pressure roller

[7]

Web wind-up direction

[4]

Cleaning web

[8]

Web wind-up shaft

15.2.2

Fusing drive

[1] [2]

[5] [4]

[3]

[1]

Fusing motor (M1)

[4]

Fusing roller /Lw

[2]

Flywheel

[5]

Fusing roller /Up

[3]

Fusing heating roller

1050to2318c

2 -75


FUSING SECTION



Fusing roller drive control

A. Speed changeover control According to the relationship between the type of paper and the paper weight, the process speed is controlled at a high speed (490 mm/s), medium speed (425 mm/s) and low speed (290 mm/s). B. Preparative rotation control II Composition/Operation

(1) Control when the power is turned ON When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with the power switch (SW2) turned ON and the detection temperature of the thermistor /1 (TH1) of the fusing roller /Up gets to a specified temperature, the fusing motor (M1) starts a preparative rotation and stops after a specified period of time or when the TH1 detect a specified temperature. The software DIPSW allows you to make a selection between the execution and the non-execution of this preparative rotation and to change the preparative rotation time. (2) Print control When printing on coated paper (62 g/m2 to 91 g/m2) or fine paper (50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2), and the start button is turned ON, the temperature of the thermistor /1 (TH1) is detected. When this temperature is in excess of a set temperature, M1 is rotated to cool down the temperature of the fusing roller. When the detected temperature is cooled down nearly to the set temperature, printing is started. A decision to conduct the preparative rotation control or not can be made in the utility mode. C. Speed stabilization To stabilize the speed, the gear shaft between the M1 and the fusing roller /Up is equipped with a flywheel. The inertia force of the flywheel stabilizes the speed of the fusing roller to minimize the transfer jitter on thick paper. D. Periodic rotation To prevent transfer jitter caused by the deformation of the fusing roller /Lw, a periodic rotation is made at a fixed intervals while in standby. (1) Execution timing • Once every 6 hours after the specified conditions are met 15.3.2

Web drive control

The rotation time of the web motor (M24) is controlled so that the web advance distance per print becomes uniform.

2 -76



FUSING SECTION

Fusing temperature control

The heating of the fusing roller /Up is made by the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) and the heating of the fusing roller /Lw made by the fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) through the fusing heating roller. The surface temperature of the fusing roller /Up is detected at fixed intervals by thermistor /1 (TH1) [1] provided at the center, and controlled by turning ON/OFF the L2 and the L3 through the AC drive board (ACDB) so that it becomes a prescribed temperature. In the same manner, the surface temperature of the fusing heating roller is detected at fixed intervals by thermistor /3 (TH3) [2] provided at the center and the temperature of the fusing heating roller is controlled by turning

[2]


ON/OFF L4.

[1]

1050to2323c

[1]

Thermistor /1 (TH1)

[2]

Thermistor /3 (TH3)

A. Warm-up The fusing heater lamps /1 (L2), /2 (L3) and /3 (L4) turn ON while in the warm-up, and they turn OFF at a prescribed temperature. B. While in the print For the fusing roller /Up, the temperature setting varies according to the type of paper and the paper weight. When the temperature comes to a prescribed temperature, the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) are turned ON/OFF for control. For the fusing heating roller, the fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) is turned ON/OFF so that the surface temperature remains at a fixed value. C. While in standby The fusing roller /Up is heated by fusing heater lamp /1 (L2) when the temperature is 1°C lower than a prescribed temperature (this varies depending on the time elapsed after completion of the warm-up). L2 turns OFF when the temperature is 2°C higher than a prescribed temperature. The fusing heating roller is heated by the fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) when the temperature is 1°C lower than a set temperature, and lamp /3 (L4) turns OFF when the temperature is 1°C higher than a set value. The heater lamp /2 (L3) is for flicker, and does not turn ON.

2 -77


FUSING SECTION


D. Power save The fusing roller /Up is heated by fusing heater lamp /1 (L2) when the temperature is 1°C lower than a prescribed temperature (fixed) and turns OFF L2 when it is 2°C higher than a prescribed value for control. The fusing heating roller is heated by fusing heater lamp /3 (L4) when the temperature is 1°C lower than a prescribed temperature (fixed) and turns OFF lamp /3 (L4) when it is 1°C higher than a prescribed temperature for control. The heater lamp /2 (L3) is for flicker and does not turn ON. Thick paper conveyance control

To prevent transfer jitter or a paper jam that is apt to occur when a double sided thick paper is used, the entrance guide plate can be moved by the thick paper assist solenoid (SD8). When paper length is less than 280 mm and the weight is more than 92 g/m2, or paper length more than 280 mm and more than 210 g/m2 is selected, the entrance guide plate is brought down. 15.3.5

Protection against an error

When the thermistor / 1 (TH1) detects a prescribed temperature (210°C) 5 times at specified intervals, or the thermistor /2 (TH2) detects a prescribed temperature (240°C), a message will display on the operation panel, fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 ((L3) turns OFF and copy operations stops. Thermostat /1 (TS1) also monitors an abnormal temperature rise. TS1 cuts off the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) at a temperature of 180 ± 7 °C. When the thermistor /3 (TH3) detects a prescribed temperature (220°C) 5 times at specified intervals, or the thermistor /4 (TH4) detects a prescribed temperature (240°C), a message will display on the operation panel, fusing heater lamps /3 (L4) turns OFF and copy operations stop. Thermostat /2 (TS2) also monitors an abnormal temperature rise. TS2 cuts off the fusing heater lamps /3 (L4) at a temperature of 181 ± 7 °C. When TH1/TH2 does not come to a prescribed temperature (50°C) a specified period of time after the main power switch (SW1) turns ON, L2/L3/L4 turn OFF and copy operations stop. When a fusing temperature abnormality like this occurs, the system gets into an SC latch condition. So, after identifying the cause of the error and repairing it, it is necessary to make the release and recovery operations with the software DIPSW 3-1.

PRCB

RL driver section

TH4 TH3

RL1

ACDB

RL1

Control section

TH2

CBR

TS1 L2

TH1


15.3.4

AC driver section

L3 TS2 L4 1050to2404c

2 -78



REVERSE/EXIT SECTION

16. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION 16.1 Composition [2]

1050to2062c

Symbol

Item


[1]

Paper exit path switchover method

Reverse gate + solenoid

[2]

Reversed paper exit method

Roller switchback

16.2 Drive [6]

[7]

[5]

[4]

[8]

[3]

[9]

[10]

[2]

[1]

[1]

Reverse exit motor (M13)

[6]

Main body paper exit roller

[2]

ADU acceleration roller

[7]

Paper exit roller /2

[3]


[8]

Fusing exit roller

[4]

ADU acceleration motor (M14)

[9]

Gear for the fusing roller /Up

[5]

Paper exit motor /1 (M9)

[10]

Reverse/exit roller

1050to2063c

2 -79


[1]





Conveyance control

A. Reverse gate The reverse gate is turned ON/OFF by the reverse/exit solenoid (SD7) and switches the conveyance path for paper exited from the fusing section over to either the straight paper exit or the reverse paper exit. B. Conveyance path II Composition/Operation

(1) Straight paper exit While in the straight paper exit, the reverse gate is closed when the reverse/exit solenoid (SD7) turns ON. So, paper exited from the fusing exit roller [1] is conveyed to the main body paper exit roller [3] passing over the reverse gate [2].

[4]

[3] [1]

Fusing exit roller

[2]

Reverse gate

2 -80

[2]

[1] [3]

1050to2064





(2) Reverse paper exit When in the reverse paper exit and the ADU paper feed, the reverse gate [6] is opened when the reverse/exit solenoid (SD7) is OFF, and paper is conveyed to the ADU acceleration roller [8]. The paper that passed through the ADU acceleration roller is conveyed to the reverse/exit roller [10] according to the shape of the metal frame. The reverse/exit roller, when the reverse sensor /1 (PS48) [9] detects the trailing edge of paper turns OFF, and then rotates in reverse to get the paper back in the original direction. While in the ADU paper feed, paper is conveyed to the ADU paper feed section passing through the reverse/exit roller. Paper sent back by the reverse/exit roller is conveyed to the paper exit roller /1 [3], not to the ADU acceleration [5] through the paper exit roller /2 [4]. While paper is being conveyed to this paper exit roller, the reverse sensor / 2 (PS47) [11] detects the trailing edge of paper to determine a reverse timing for the reverse paper exit roller.

[6]

[5]

[4]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[3]

[10]

[11]

[1]

[2]

1050to2065

[1]

Paper entering the reverse section

[7]

Fusing exit roller

[2]

Paper exiting the reverse section

[8]

ADU acceleration roller

[3]


[9]

Reverse sensor /1 (PS48)

[4]


[10]

Reverse paper exit roller

[5]


[11]

Reverse sensor /2 (PS47)

[6]

Reverse gate

2 -81


roller along the form of the metal frame. In this way, paper is turned over to be conveyed to the paper exit roller


INTERFACE SECTION


17. INTERFACE SECTION 17.1 Composition [1] [5]


[2]

[3]

[6]

[4]

[8]

[7]

1050to2327c

IC side Symbol

Item


[1]

Serial port (RS-232C)

For Hyper Terminal communication, D-SUB9 pin connector

[2]

Compact flash card

For Firmware of the IC

[3]

Parallel port (IEEE 1284 compliance)

For parallel output of the printer 36 pins Centronics connector

[4]

RJ45 Ethernet connector

For printer, scanner

Engine side Symbol [5]

Item RJ45 Ethernet connector

Specification/mechanism For Web Utilities, PS JobEditor, NetBackupTool and Mail remote notification system

[6]

Serial port (RS-232C)

For CS RemoteCare

[7]

Parallel port (IEEE 1284 compliance)

For ISW of the copier/printer program 36 pins Centronics connector

[8]

2 -82

USB port (USB TypeB)

For ISW of the copier/printer program, Ver. 1.1



IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL

18. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL 18.1 Outline In order to realize the top quality print images at all times, this machine conducts various types of control for image stabilization. The operation of the image stabilization control varies according to the power switch (SW2)

18.2 Operation flow 18.2.1

Image stabilization control flow when the power switch (SW2) is ON

The following shows the flow of the operation of the image stabilization control when the power switch (SW2) turns ON.

Power ON

G. Environmental decision control

A. Drum rotation

B. MPC/APC

C. Drum potential correction control (charging current, grid voltage, and developing bias adjustment)

D. Maximum density control (600 dpi)

F. Gamma correction control (600 dpi)

A. Drum rotation control (1) Purpose • To prevent drum charge dissipation such as an image running at a high humidity. • When left unused at a low or normal humidity, to prevent an uneven density due to the difference in sensitivity between the cleaning unit area and the developing unit area on the drum. (2) Method • When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with the power switch (SW2) ON, rotate the drum for 2 minutes 30 seconds, 30 seconds after completion of the charger cleaning operation during warm up. Then conduct the potential correction control, the maximum density control and the gamma correction control. • When the fusing temperature is above 50°C with the SW2 ON, and machine has been left unused for a long period of time, conduct the following operations based on the environmental decision values previously obtained. When at a high humidity, 1 minute after the SW2 turns ON, check the machine if it is in the fusing warm-up condition. When it is not in the Ready condition, rotate the drum for 2 minutes. When the fusing warm-up condition is completed within 1 minute after the SW2 turns ON, the machine is considered to be in the Ready condition at that time and no rotation of the drum is made. • When it is considered that the humidity is low or normal, rotate the drum only to 70°at a fixed cycle according to the temperature and the period of time for which the machine has been left unused. The drum is rotated at 3 minutes intervals when it has been left idling, and at 1 hour intervals when it is in the low power mode.

2 -83


being turned ON or the print being in operation.




B. MPC (Max. Power Control)/APC (Auto Power Control) (1) Purpose • To store the maximum power value emitted by the laser in the laser drive board (LDB) and maintain this light intensity in the APC operations. *

The LDB automatically monitors the laser drive current for each line and a control operation is made so that the light intensity becomes the MPC value at all times.

(2) Execution timing II Composition/Operation

• Executed when the power switch (SW2) is turned ON. After this, the MPC value is controlled by the dot diameter adjustment control. C. Drum potential correction control (charging current, grid voltage, and developing bias adjustment) (1) Purpose To maintain the drum surface potential at a fixed condition at all times, without being influenced by the environmental conditions and the number of prints, the drum potential sensor (DPS) is provided for detection. (2) Method According to the measurement values of the potential after exposure, the developing bias potential and the potential before exposure the charge current, and grid voltage are controlled to the optimum values by taking into consideration the temperature and humidity, the drum counts and developer counts. The difference between the developing bias potential and the potential before exposure can be changed by the DIPSW 7-2 and 3. (3) Execution timing • When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with the SW2 on. • Each time the job of 10,000 prints is completed after the above timing. • Each time the PM counter counts up to 40,000 prints, and after completion of the job when the developing theta ratio gets to the reference value (the cycle can be changed by the DIPSW 6-5 and 6). D. Maximum density control (1) Purpose To maintain the maximum density of the image at a fixed condition at all times without being influenced by the environmental conditions and the number of prints. (2) Method • Create several toner patches on the drum surface by changing the speed of rotation of the developing roller. Create these patches with the laser exposure time per dot (laser PWM) at the maximum value. • Read this patch by the maximum density sensor and store the speed of rotation of the developing roller when the sensor output gets to the specified value, and create the image at this number of rotations. (3) Execution timing • When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with the SW2 ON. • Each time the PM counter counts up to 40,000 prints, and after completion of the job when the developing theta ratio gets to the reference value (the cycle can be changed by the DIPSW 6-5 and 6).

2 -84




E. Simplified maximum density control (1) Purpose To maintain the maximum density of the image at a fixed condition at all times without being influenced by the environmental conditions and the number of prints. (2) Method Create a toner patch on the drum surface, read the patch density with the maximum density sensor and change

(3) Execution timing When more than 30 minutes have elapsed since the preceding job (the execution of the print, the maximum density adjustment control or the simplified maximum density adjustment control) has been made with the SW2 ON and the fusing temperature is above 50°C with more than 1 minute warming-up completed. F.

Gamma correction control

(1) Purpose To maintain the gradation of the image at a fixed condition at all times without being influenced by the environmental conditions and the number of prints. (2) Method • Create several toner patches on the drum surface by changing the laser PWM. At this time, create a patch with the speed of rotation of the developing roller at the number decided by the maximum density control. • Read this patch with the gamma sensor and create a gamma curve by arithmetic processing. (3) Execution timing • When the fusing temperature is below 50°C with the SW2 ON. • After completion of the job when the developing theta ratio gets to the reference value. • Each time the PM counter counts up to 40,000 prints, and after completion of the job when the developing theta ratio gets to the reference value (the cycle can be changed by the DIPSW 6-5 and 6). G. Environmental decision control (1) Purpose To detect the ambient temperature and humidity and feed back the findings to the various types of controls to maintain the image at a fixed quality. (2) Method The temperature sensor and the humidity sensor are provided inside the machine. (3) Execution timing With the power switch (SW2) ON, environmental decisions based on the measurement values are made only when it is considered that the machine has been left unused for more than 8 hours after the SW2 was turned OFF last time and the fusing temperature is below 50°C.

2 -85


the speed of rotation of the developing roller according to the difference from the reference value.


IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL 18.2.2


Image stabilization control flow while in the print and during idling

The following shows the flow of the image stabilization controls taken while in the print and during idling.

Start button ON

Start of print


A. Toner density control

B. Black belt control

b

End of print

Drum potential adjustment control

a

Drum potential adjustment control

C. Dot diameter correction control

Maximum density adjustment control

Gamma correction control

Standby a: After completion of the last job for every 40,000 prints b: After completion of a job exceeding 10,000 prints after the power switch (SW2) turns on (with the fusing temperature below 50ºC)

2 -86




A. Toner density control (1) Method • Develop a toner patch on the drum once for every 5 prints after the SW1 turns ON, and read the patch density with the maximum density sensor. • When the patch density is lower than the reference value, the operation varies depending on the developing theta (developing roller line speed/drum line speed). a. When the developing theta is lower than the reference value: Increase the number of rotations of the developing roller according to the patch density. period of time calculated based on the patch density and the paper size, and replenish toner. B. Black belt creation control (1) Purpose To prevent deterioration of toner and stabilize the load on the cleaning blade, coat the entire drum image area with toner before cleaning the cleaning with blade. (2) Method • Fluctuate the black belt creation width between 0.25 mm (much toner in supply) and 20 mm (little toner in supply). • The minimum value of the black belt creation width can be changed by the DIPSW 6-3 and 6-4. (3) Execution timing The belt is created at the frequency of 3 times per 5 prints. C. Dot diameter correction control (1) Purpose To prevent the change in the diameter of a laser 1 dot due to the write system being soiled or the change in developing performance, and to obtain a stable image quality for a long period of time. (2) Method • Create multiple dot pattern patches of a fixed density on the drum by changing the laser power value. At this time, create the patches while changing the MPC value with the laser PWM maximum. • Read this dot pattern patch with the gamma sensor and store as the MPC value the laser power value obtained when the sensor output gets to the prescribed value. Until the next adjustment, use this selfing as the MPC value. (3) Execution timing After completion of a job of every 40,000 prints on the PM counter, and after completion of a job when the developing theta comes to the reference value. (The cycle can be changed by the DIPSW 6-5 and 6-6.)

2 -87


b. When the developing theta is at the reference value: Drive the intermediate hopper motor (M11) only for the


IMAGE PROCESSING


19. IMAGE PROCESSING 19.1 Image processing in the scanner section A. Shading correction


B. AE control

C. Area discrimination

D. Brightness/density conversion

E. Filter/magnification

F. Density gamma (conversion)

G. Half tone processing (error diffusion)

H. Tilt adjustment

I. Compression

J. Storage of image data

2 -88



IMAGE PROCESSING

Shading correction

This is the measure to obtain an even distribution from light of the CCD. The following corrections are made at the prescribed timing. a.

White correction

The output voltage of each pixel of the CCD sensor when the white reference plate is exposed to the exposure lamp is stored as the maximum output of the pixel. b.

Black correction

mum output of the pixel. Conduct calculation to find out what step in this range falls on the image data read from the original based on the difference between the black and white data for each pixel stored in the steps a. and b. above, and output the results of the calculation in the 10 bits accuracy.

Voltage at which the read is made

[1]

White

+3 0V Width in which the read is made

Black

After shading correction

[2]

White

255 0 Width in which the read is made

Black 1050to2328c

[1]

AD conversion input

[2]

Shading correction output

2 -89


The output voltage of each pixel of the CCD sensor when the exposure lamp is turned off is stored as the mini-


IMAGE PROCESSING 19.1.2


AE control

Through the AE control, a density suitable for the original density is automatically selected and the copy is made properly. A. Sampling area


(1) While in the platen mode

[1] [1]

1050to2014c

30 mm

(2) While in the DF print

[2] [1] [1]

4 mm

1050to2015c

[2]

1 mm

B. Execution timing • While in the platen print : At the pre-scan before the actual scan when the print or the read starts. • While in the DF print

2 -90

: At the same time as when the original is read.



IMAGE PROCESSING

Area discrimination

To make a copy of the original under the correct condition (to make a correct filter processing), check the read section to see if it is a character or a dot picture, and use the results at the image processing unit at the later stage. 19.1.4

Brightness/density conversion

The signal obtained after the shading correction is a signal corresponding to the light reflected from the original, and this is generally called a brightness signal. In this brightness/density conversion section, the brightness sigII Composition/Operation

nal is converted in density as shown in the graph below.

Density

255

0

Brightness

1024

1050to2331c

2 -91




Filter/magnification

A. Filter processing An appropriate filter processing is made according to the type of an original and the magnification selected. (1) Character

: Make the shading of an original conspicuous.

(2) Dot section

: Suppress moire.

(3) Picture

: Increase the reproducibility of gradation.


B. Magnification processing For this machine, the sub scan direction magnification is made by the scan speed of the exposure unit (platen mode) or by the conveyance speed of the DF (DF mode), and the main scan direction magnification is made by processing images electrically. (1) Main scan magnification processing while in enlargement As shown in the drawing below, if the data of each pixel obtained when the original is read by the CCD are D1 to D5, the positions of the data read when enlarged are E1 to E5. However, when the write is made only with the data thus read, the following problems occur. a.

There occurs a clearance between data, and this results in a distored image.

b.

The data position does not fall in exactly with the write position.

As shown with dotted lines in the drawing below, when there is no read data that corresponds exactly to the write position, a density is decided for the write as shown below and appropriate processing is made.

[1]

D1

[2]

E1

[3]

W1

D2

D3

E2

W2

W3

D4

D5

E3

W4

E4

W5

W6

E5

W7

W8 1050to2332c

[1]


[2]

Data position while in enlargement

2 -92

[3]

Write position



IMAGE PROCESSING

(2) Main scan magnification processing while in reduction As shown in drawing below, if the data of each pixel obtained when the original is read by the CCD are D1 to D5, the positions of the data read when reduced are R1 to R5. They are overlapping each other and do not correspond to the write position. Therefore, a density is decided for the write as shown below and an appropriate processing is made.

D1

[2]

R1

[3]

W1

D2

R2

W2

D3

R3

D4

R4

W3

D5 II Composition/Operation

[1]

R5

W4

W5 1050to2333c

[1]


[2]

Data position while in enlargement

[3]

Write position

(3) Density adjustment With the density shown in the axis of coordinate and the position shown in the axis of abscissas, when E2-E1 in the drawing of "(1) Vertical magnification while in enlargement" is shown in 16 steps in the direction of the axis of abscissas, the following drawing is obtained. When the position to the written data W2 is "l," the density S can be obtained in the following expression. S = E1 + {(E2 - E1) / 16} x l

255

E2 W2 Density

S

E1

0 0

Position

15

1050to2334c

2 -93




Scanner gamma correction

To the data obtained after the filter/magnification processing, select a density curve corresponding to the density button selected on the operation panel. An appropriate density curve is provided for each of the character/picture/character and the picture/thin character modes. 19.1.7

Halftone processing (error diffusion)

To make effective use of the installed memory and obtain an excellent copy image, error diffusion processing is


employed, which is one of the pseudo-intermediate processing methods. 19.1.8

Tilt adjustment

DF original skew auto adjustment Detect an uneven original skew amount for each DF original by the original skew sensors /Fr (PS312) and /Rr (PS311) and adjust the skew amount detected by the sensors by rotating the image data while in the image processing. 19.1.9

Compression

To store more image data, data is stored temporarily in the image memory after the images has been compressed. Two types of memories are provided. (Main memory: 256 MB, Sub memory: 64 MB) A part of the hard disk is used as an extended memory of the above. In this manner, more than 10,000 pages can be stored in the average word processor documents. 19.1.10 Storage of image data The image/setting of the originals read by the scanner or the images sent from the IC can be stored as a file in the hard disk in the main body.

2 -94



IMAGE PROCESSING

19.2 Image processing in the write section A. Rotation/elongation

B. SGU


C. 2dotPWM

D. PWM

E. Frequency conversion

A. Rotation/elongation Rotate the image in the direction of 90 degrees and 180 degrees as necessary. When outputting images from the memory, expand the compressed data to restore them to their original state. B. SGU The SGU is a function to generate various types of test patterns. C. 2dotPWM The laser writing is made normally in 1bitED (2-value error diffusion), but in the picture mode, 2bitED (4-value error diffusion) is employed to increase the gradation. (A change can be made between 1bit and 2bit by the DIPSW 11-5.) Since 2bitED reproduces the gradation in 4 values, small diameter laser dots are employed. However, since the drum surface potential in the small dot section is unstable, a dot is reproduced by the mean value of 2 adjoining dots to realize a smooth image. D. PWM The period of time the laser is turned ON is changed by changing the pulse width. E. Frequency conversion Write in the memory once the data after the PWM conversion and read it in accord with the write clock signal of the printer.

2 -95


OTHERS


20. OTHERS 20.1 Other fan controls 20.1.1

Composition


[18]

[19]

[20]

[22]

[21]

[23]

[24] [1] [2]

[17]

[3] [4] [16]

[15]

[5] [6] [7]

[14]

[8] [13]

[12] [11]

[9] [10]

1050to2069c

[1]

Cooling fan /3 (FM3)

[13]

Registration cooling fan (FM14)

[2]

Polygon cooling fan (FM18)

[14]

Sensor cooling fan (FM16)

[3]

Suction fan /1 (FM6)

[15]

ADU cooling fan /3 (FM13)

[4]

IC cooling fan (FM24)

[16]

Transfer/separation suction fan (FM4)

[5]


[17]

Paper exit cooling fan /1 (FM9)

[6]

Developing suction fan (FM5)

[18]


[7]

Power supply cooling fan /1 (FM25)

[19]


[8]


[20]

Scanner cooling fan (FM19)

[9]


[21]

Pump cooling fan (FM11)

[10]


[22]


[11]


[23]


[12]


[24]

IPB cooling fan (FM12)

2 -96



OTHERS

Operation

A. Cooling fans /1 (FM1), /2 (FM2) and /3 (FM3) (1) Purpose To exhaust around the drum and the fusing unit. (2) ON timing • Turns ON (rotates at a low speed) after completion of the first warm-up with the power switch (SW2) turned ON. • Rotates at a low speed while in idling, and rotates at a high speed when the drum temperature is in excess of a prescribed temperature. • Rotates at a high speed at all times while in the print and rotates at a low speed specified period of time after completion of the print. • Rotates at a low speed at all times while in the low power mode. (3) OFF timing After completion of the warm-up, does not turn OFF until the power switch (SW2) is turned OFF. B. Transfer/separation suction fan (FM4) (1) Purpose To exhaust the transfer/separation charger unit and the conveyance section. (2) ON timing • Turns ON in concert with the drive of the drum while in warming up. • Rotates at a fixed speed at all times while in the print. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF at all times while in idling and in the low power mode. C. Developing suction fan (FM5) (1) Purpose To collects toner scattered around the developing unit. (2) ON timing • Turns ON in concert with the drive of the drum while in warming up. • Rotates at a fixed speed at all times while in the print. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF at all times while in idling and in the low power mode.

2 -97


• Turns ON (rotates at a low speed) in concert with the drum motor (M2) being turned ON while in warming up.


OTHERS


D. Suction fan /1 (FM6) (1) Purpose Cool down around the write section with suction. (2) ON timing • Rotates at a low speed while in warming up after the power switch (SW2) turns ON. • Rotates at a low speed while in idling. • Rotates at high speed at all times while in the print and rotates at a low speed specified period of time after II Composition/Operation

completion of the print. • Rotates at a low speed at all times while in the low power mode. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 being turned OFF. E. Suction fans /2 (FM7) and /3 (FM8) (1) Purpose To cool down around the developing unit and the drum unit with suction. (2) ON timing • Turns ON in concert with the drive of the drum while in warming up. • Rotates at a fixed speed at all times while in the print. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF while in idling and in the low power mode. F.


(1) Purpose To cool down around the paper exit section with suction. (2) ON timing Rotates at a high speed at all times while in the print. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF at all times while in warming up, idling and in the low power mode. G. Paper exit cooling fans /2 (FM10) and /3 (FM28) (1) Purpose To cooling down paper that is being exited with suction. (2) ON timing Rotates at a fixed speed at all times while in the print. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF at all times while in warming up, idling and in the low power mode.

2 -98



OTHERS

H. Pump cooling fan (FM11) (1) Purpose To cool down around the toner pump and the air pump with suction. (2) ON timing Rotates at a high speed at all times while in the print. (3) OFF timing

I.


Turns OFF at all times while in warming up, idling and in the low power mode. IPB cooling fan (FM12)

(1) Purpose To exhaust heat in the image processing board. (2) ON timing Rotate at a fixed speed at all times after the power switch (SW2) turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF. J.


(1) Purpose To cool down around the ADU drive board /2 (ADUDB2). (2) ON timing Rotates at a fixed speed at all times after SW2 turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF. K. ADU cooling fan /2 (FM15) (1) Purpose To cool down the inside of the ADU. (2) ON timing Rotates at a fixed speed at all times after SW2 turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF. L. ADU cooling fan /3 (FM15) (1) Purpose To cool down around the reverse/exit section. (2) ON timing Rotates at a fixed speed at all times after the power switch (SW2) turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF.

2 -99


OTHERS


M. Sensor cooling fan (FM16) (1) Purpose To cool down around the ADU drive board /1 (ADUDB1). (2) ON timing Rotates at a fixed speed at all times after SW2 turns ON. (3) OFF timing II Composition/Operation

Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF. N. Registration cooling fan (FM17) (1) Purpose To cool down around the registration unit. (2) ON timing Rotates at a fixed speed at all times after SW2 turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF. O. Polygon cooling fan (FM18) (1) Purpose To cool down around the polygon motor (M21) and the write section. (2) ON timing Turn ON at all times after the power switch (SW2) turns ON. (3) OFF timing • Does not turn OFF until the power switch (SW2) is turned OFF. • Turns OFF in concert with the polygon motor while in the low power mode. P.

Scanner cooling fan (FM19)

(1) Purpose To cool down around the exposure lamp (L1) and the scanner. (2) ON timing Turns ON a specified period of time after the exposure lamp (L1) turns ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with L1 turning OFF. Q. IC cooling fan (FM24) (1) Purpose To cool down the inside of the IC board. (2) ON timing Turns ON (rotates at a fixed speed) in concert with the power switch (SW2) turning ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF.

2 -100



OTHERS

R. Power supply cooling fans /1 (FM25) and /2 (FM26) (1) Purpose To cool down the DC power supply 1 (DCPS1). (2) ON timing Turns ON (rotates at a fixed speed) in concert with the power switch (SW2) turning ON. (3) OFF timing II Composition/Operation

Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF. S. Power supply cooling fans /3 (FM27) (1) Purpose To cool down the DC power supply 2 (DCPS2). (2) ON timing Turns ON (rotates at a fixed speed) in concert with the power switch (SW2) turning ON. (3) OFF timing Turns OFF in concert with SW2 turning OFF.

2 -101


OTHERS


20.2 HDD control Composition


20.2.1

[1]

[2]

1050to2070c

Symbol [1]

Item Hard disk /1 (HDD1)

Specification/mechanism Hard disk for the main body Capacity: 40 GB Storage of formatted stamp, watermark and registered overlay image data Storage of image data Temporary storage of image data (image memory)

[2]

20.2.2

Hard disk /2 (HDD2)

Hard disk for the IC controller

Backup

Using the NetBackupTool allows the data in the hard disk /1 (HDD1) to be backed up to the PC.

2 -102



OTHERS

20.3 Counter control Composition

OACB

PRCB

OB3

ACDB

LCDB

CNT1

CNT2

PS3 1050to2071c

20.3.2

Operation Name

Total counter (CNT1)

Function/method • Displays the cumulative number of copies in all copy modes. • Mechanical counter driven by the electronic signal. • Counts up for each paper exit signal.

Electronic counter

• Displays the cumulative number of copies/prints on the operation panel. • PM count/cycle, data collection *1, and copy count by parts that are required to be replaced. • Counts up for each paper exit signal.

Key counter (CNT2) (Optional)

• Counter that disables the copy operation when the specified number of copies is made. • Mechanical counter driven by the electronic signal.

*1

The following data are collected. Total count by paper sizes Copy count by paper sizes Print count by paper sizes Large size count ADF passage count Pixel ratio block data Pixel ratio job data Time series jam data Jam occurrence count Count by copy modes Time series SC data SC occurrence count Block jam occurrence count Block SC occurrence count

2 -103


20.3.1


OTHERS


A. Status indicator light Installing a status indicator light allows the machine status to be monitored at a place away from the machine


according to the condition of the light.

1050to2335c

Connector Pin No. 1

Signal name PAT1

2

PAT2

3

PAT3

Description

Output timing

Type of signal

Light turn-on

L signal output when the print is

Open corrector

signal

available L signal output while the scanner or the print in operation L signal output while in an abnormal stop due to a jam, error

160

code, no paper or no toner 4

PAT4

L signal output while a toner supply warning is being displayed

5

24V

24V DC power

At all times

24V, 500mA

—

—

source 6

P.GND

Power ground

NOTE • A signal is output from the PAT3 when an error code occurs. However, the light does not turn on since the power source of the 24V status indicator light is cut off.

2 -104



OTHERS

20.4 Parts that operate when the power switch is turned ON 20.4.1

Parts that operate when the main power switch is turned ON

A. Composition

RL2

SW1

CBR

HTR3

RL3 L

NF1

NF2

DCPS1

DCPS2

5VDC

SW2 RL1 Fusing Section

OACB 5VDC

OB3

OB1 OB2 1050to2072c

are intended only for overseas. B. Operation When turning ON the main power switch (SW1), the AC power source is supplied to the DC power source /1 (DCPS1). In this manner, DCPS1 generates 5V DC and 12V DC and supplies them to the overall control board (OACB) and image processing board (IPB). OACB supplies this DC power source to the operation board /1 (OB1) through the operation board /3 (OB3) and put the power switch (SW2) in the standby for input. The AC line is provided with a circuit breaker (CBR) which cuts off the AC line by itself when an excessive current flows due to a short circuit while in SW1 ON.

2 -105


T1

HTR2

SW3

HTR1

T2

HTR2

HTR1

PF-701




OTHERS

Blank page

2 -106

SERVICE MANUAL

Theory of Operation

DF-603

2004.10 Ver. 1.0


CONTENTS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS See the main body service manual on page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1

OUTLINE

1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.1

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3

Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.4

Originals other than those that paper feed and throughput can be guaranteed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.5

Originals not allowed to be fed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.6

Combination of mixed originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.7

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.8

Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.9


2. UNIT COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 3. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

II


1. PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

1.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 1.3.1

Size detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

1.3.2

Pick-up mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

1.3.3

Separation mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

1.3.4

Multi feed detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

1.3.5

Original empty detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

1.3.6

Registration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2. CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 2.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 2.3.1

Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2.3.2

Mixed original mode control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2.3.3

Z-fold original mode control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2.3.4

Skew adjustment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2.3.5

Centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2.3.6

Cooling fan control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

3. REVERSAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 3.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

3.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

3.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 3.3.1

Reverse mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

3.3.2

Registration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

4. PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 4.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

i


I

I Outline

CONTENTS

CONTENTS 4.2 4.3

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19


I Outline

4.3.1

ii

Paper exit mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19



I Outline

I OUTLINE 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 1.1

Type

Name:

Double sided original auto feeder

Type:

Sheet-through type original auto feeder

1.2

Functions

Original size:

Inch:

11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R, A3, B4, A4, B5, B5R, A5, A5R

Metric: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8 x 13 Maximum original size: 297 x 431.8 Minimum original size: 128 x 139.7 Original stacking capacity:

100 sheets, max. (80 g/m2)

Original read speed

Single sided copy mode : 105 sheets/min. (A4 size) : 103 sheets/min. (8.5 x 11 size) Double sided copy mode : 65 sheets/min. (A4/8.5 x 11 size)

Original feed layout:

Set with the front side up, at center as standard

Original image read position:

Dedicated slit glass section

Resolution:

600 dpi

1.3

Type of paper

High-quality paper of 50 g/m2 to 130 g/m2 In the case of the single sided copy mode, however, high-quality paper of 131 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 is also available in the single feed mode. Amount of curling:

Up to 10 mm with 5 originals overlapped one another

Original

Amount of curling

1.4

df603to1001c

Originals other than those that paper feed and throughput can be guaranteed

With the following originals, no severe problems are found such as frequent jams and major damage to the originals, although it is not possible to obtain a numeric value indicating reliability that can be specified in product guarantee terms: Recycled paper, straw paper, heat sensitive paper, originals fed in the mixing of perforated original mode, high-quality paper of 35 g/m2 to 50 g/m2, irregular-sized originals (such as CF originals), coated paper, originals with a rough surface (such as letterhead), folded originals (Z-folded or folded in two)

1 -1


I Outline

1.5


Originals not allowed to be fed

The following originals are not allowed to be used: OHP film, blueprint master, label paper, offset master, bonded original, high-quality paper of 35 g/m2 to 201 g/m2

1.6

Combination of mixed originals

Combinations of the same and different size originals is available. The following table shows the available combination of mixed originals. Metric:Europe Reference original (original with a maximum width) A3

A4

B4

B5

A4R

A5

B5R

Other

A3

U

{

—

—

—

—

—

—

originals

A4

{

U

—

—

—

—

—

—

B4

~

~

U

{

—

—

—

—

B5

~

~

{

U

—

—

—

—

A4R

~

~

~

~

U

{

—

—

A5

~

~

~

~

{

U

—

—

B5R

X

X

~

~

~

~

U

—

A5R

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

U

Inch Reference original (original with a maximum width) 11 x 17

8.5 x 11

11 x 17

U

{

—

—

—

—

originals 8.5 x 11

{

U

—

—

—

—

8.5 x 14

~

~

U

{

{

—

8.5 x 11R

~

~

{

U

{

—

8.5 x 5.5

~

~

{

{

U

—

8.5 x 5.5R

X

X

X

X

X

U

Other

1 -2

A5R

8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11R 8.5 x 5.5 8.5 x 5.5R



Taiwanese

A4

8K

16K

A4R

A5

16KR

Other

A3

U

{

—

—

—

—

—

A5R —

originals

A4

{

U

—

—

—

—

—

—

8K

~

~

U

{

—

—

—

—

16K

~

~

{

U

—

—

—

—

A4R

~

~

~

~

U

{

—

—

A5

~

~

~

~

{

U

—

—

16KR

X

X

~

~

~

~

U

—

A5R

X

X

X

X

X

X

~

U

U: Single size {: Same size ~: Different size X: Mixing not allowed —: Cannot be set

1.7

Maintenance

Maintenance:

Same as the main body.



1.8

Machine data

Power source:

24V/5.1V DC (supplied from the main body)

Maximum power consumption:

210W or less

Dimensions:

W 650 mm x D 570 mm x H 170 mm

Weight:

Approx. 22 kg

1.9


Temperature:

10°C to 30°C

Humidity:

10% RH to 80% RH (with no condensation)

1 -3

I Outline

Reference original (original with a maximum width) A3

UNIT COMPOSITION


I Outline

2. UNIT COMPOSITION [7]

[8]

[1] [2] [3]

[4]

[6]

1 -4

[5]

df603to1002c

[1]

Original feed tray

[5]

[2]

Original exit tray (for large size)

[6]

Reverse section Original exit section (for large size)

[3]

Original exit section (for small size)

[7]

Conveyance section

[4]

Original exit tray (for small size)

[8]

Original feed section


PAPER PATH

3. PAPER PATH I Outline

A. Single sided copy mode (small size)

[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]

df603to1003c

[1]

Original feed tray

[3]

Exit gate

[2]


[4]

Image read position (slit glass section)

B. Double sided copy mode (small size) (1) Front scan

[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]

df603to1004c

[1]

Original feed tray

[3]

Exit gate

[2]


[4]


1 -5

PAPER PATH


(2) Rear scan

I Outline

[1]

[2] 1

3

2 [4]

[3]

df603to1005c

[1]

Original feed tray

[3]

Exit gate

[2]


[4]


(3) Paper exit

[1]

[2]

[3]

1 -6

[1]

Original feed tray

[2]


df603to1006c

[3]

Exit gate


PAPER PATH

C. Single sided copy mode (large size)

I Outline

[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]

df603to1007c

[1]

Original feed tray

[3]

Exit roller

[2]


[4]


D. Double sided copy mode (large size) (1) Front scan

[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]

df603to1008c

[1]

Original feed tray

[3]

Exit gate

[2]


[4]


1 -7

PAPER PATH


(2) Rear scan

I Outline

[1]

[2]

1

3

2 [4]

[3]

df603to1009c

[1]

Original feed tray

[3]

Exit gate

[2]


[4]


(3) Paper exit

[1]

[2]

[4]

1 -8

[3]

df603to1010c

[1]

Original feed tray

[3]

Exit gate

[2]


[4]

Exit roller


PAPER FEED SECTION

II COMPOSITION/OPERATION 1. PAPER FEED SECTION 1.1

Composition [2] II Composition/Operation

[1]

[5]

[4]

Symbol

[3] Item

df603to2001c


[1]

Original size detection in the main scan direction

Guide plate + VR

[2]

Original size detection in the sub scan direction

Photo sensor

[3]

Original feed tray up/down method

Up/down plate + motor

[4]

Multi feed detection

Ultrasonic sensor

[5]

Registration method

Roller + motor

2 -1

PAPER FEED SECTION

1.2


Drive

A. Tray up/down drive


[1]

[2]

df603to2002c

[1]

Up/down plate

[2]

Tray up/down motor (M303)

B. Paper feed drive

[5] [1]

[2] [4]

[3]

2 -2

df603to2003c

[1]

Registration roller

[4]

Pick-up roller

[2]

Original feed motor (M302)

[5]

Paper feed roller

[3]

SDF switching solenoid (SD301)


1.3

Operation

1.3.1


PAPER FEED SECTION

A. Plain original mode (1) Size detection in the main scan direction The front and rear dimensions of the original are detected according to the position of the guide plate connected to the original size VR (VR301).

The right and left dimensions of the original are detected according to the ON/OFF combination of the original size sensor /Rt (PS302) and the original size sensor /Lt (PS303). B. Mixed original mode (1) Size detection in the main scan direction The front and rear dimensions of the maximum mixed original are detected according to the position of the VR301 guide plate. (2) Size detection in the sub scan direction The conveyance roller [3] rotates in the forward direction to convey the original to the paper exit tray (for large size) [2]. The conveyance roller stops rotation a specified period of time after the original registration sensor /Rt (PS318) [1] detects the trailing edge of the original. At this time, depending on the ON time period of the PS318, the conveyance direction and the size of the original are detected.

[1]

[2]

[3]

df603to2004c

2 -3


(2) Size detection in the sub scan direction

PAPER FEED SECTION


A specified period of time after the original registration sensor /Rt (PS318) [1] turns off, the conveyance roller [3] rotates in the reverse direction to get the leading edge of the original conveyed to the paper exit section back to the scan standby position [5]. The trailing edge of the original returned is conveyed to the paper exit tray (for large size) [2] according to the form of the conveyance guide plate. The reverse rotation of the conveyance roller stops a specified period of time after the original conveyance sensor (PS308) [4] detects the leading edge of the original.


[1]

[2] [5]

[4] [3]

df603to2005c

After that, the same read (scan) operation as that in the normal mode is made. The original size detection operation for the second and succeeding originals varies according to a copy mode employed: the single sided copy mode or the double sided copy mode. • Single sided copy mode: After the scan operation of the preceding original starts. • Double sided copy mode: After the scan operation of the back side of the preceding original starts. 1.3.2

Pick-up mechanism

The tray up/down motor (M303) sends up the up/down plate [2] to move the original to the pick-up roller position [1]. When the tray upper limit sensor (PS315) [4] turns ON, the M303 turns OFF to be put in the standby condition with the up/down plate left raised. The original comes into contact with the pick-up roller [3] to conduct the pick-up (paper feed) operation.

[3]

[4]

[1]

[2]

2 -4

df603to2006c


PAPER FEED SECTION


A. Separation control Of the originals that have been fed by the pick-up roller, only one sheet of original is conveyed to the registration roller side by the original feed roller and the separation roller. Even when plural sheets of originals are fed, the separation roller makes a reverse rotation to convey a single sheet of original. B. SDF (single document feeder) control In the single document feeder mode, to improve the paper feedability of thick paper and other originals the roller to conduct the paper feed operation. 1.3.4


The multi feed detection is made by using the multi feed sensor /1 (MFS1) and the multi feed sensor /2 (MFS2) which employ a method to check originals if they are multi fed based on the amount of the transmission of ultrasonic waves. The accuracy in the multi feed detection has been improved by using the multi feed sensor of the ultrasonic sensor, which supports the speed-up in the paper feed. The multi feed sensor is made up of a pair of a sender and a receiver. The following are originals the multi feed of which can be detected. • Originals the main scan direction of which is in excess of 210 mm. Originals the main scan direction of which is less than 210 mm cannot be recognized due to the position of the sensor. • Originals the weighing of which is between 50 g/m2 and 128 g/m2. Originals the weighing of which is beyond the range mentioned above may not be recognized even when multi fed. 1.3.5

Original empty detection control

The detection of the presence of original in the original tray section while in the scan stop is made by the original empty sensor (PS305). And also, the original empty detection while in the scan is made by the original count sensor (PS310) to stop the paper feed from the trays /1 to /5 after PS310 detects the trailing edge of the last original.

2 -5


paper feed of which is not guaranteed, the SDF switching solenoid (SD301) cuts off the drive of the separation



Registration control

When the start button is turned ON [1], the tray up/down motor (M303) brings up the up/down plate until the tray upper limit sensor (PS315) ON on [2]. A specified period of time after the PS315 turns ON, the original feed motor (M302) is driven in a reverse rotation to convey the original to the registration roller. When the original registration sensor /Rt (PS318) turns ON, the up/down plate comes down by a fixed distance and a loop is formed until the original registration sensor /Lt (PS306) turns ON to adjust an original skew.


[1]

Tray upper limit sensor (PS315) Tray lower limit sensor (PS316) Tray up/down motor (M303)

Up Down

Original count sensor (PS310) Original empty sensor (PS305) Original registration sensor /Rt (PS306) Original registration sensor /Lt (PS318) Original feed motor (M302)

F

800 mm/s 465 mm/s

R 550 mm/s

[2]

2 -6

[3] [4]

[5]

[6] [7]

df603to2007c

[1]

Start button ON

[5]

[2]

Feed of the 1st sheet of paper

[6]

Feed of the 2nd sheet of paper Loop formation of the 2nd sheet of paper

[3]

Loop formation of the 1st sheet of paper

[7]

Pre-feed of the 2nd sheet of paper

[4]

Pre-feed of the 1st sheet of paper


CONVEYANCE SECTION

2. CONVEYANCE SECTION Composition


2.1

[3]

[2] Symbol [1]

[1]

Item Conveyance path switching method

df603to2008c

Specification/mechanism Flapper + solenoid

[2]

Original skew detection method

Photo sensor

[3]

Original centering detection method

LED sensor

2 -7

CONVEYANCE SECTION

2.2


Drive

A. Flapper up/down drive


[2]

[1]

df603to2009c

[1]

Flapper

[2]

Gate solenoid (SD303)

B. Conveyance drive

[1]

[2]

df603to2010c

[1]

2 -8

Conveyance roller

[2]

Original conveyance motor (M301)


2.3

Operation

2.3.1

Conveyance control

CONVEYANCE SECTION

The originals that have been fed up to the registration roller [1] by the separation mechanism are pre-fed by the registration roller [1] to be conveyed to the conveyance roller [2] at a high speed. A specified period of time after the original conveyance sensor (PS308) [4] turns ON, the conveyance roller [2] is switched into the scan speed to convey the original onto the slit glass (original scan position) [3].

[4]

[3]

[2]


[1]

df603to2011c

The originals are read when they passes through the slit glass [5].

2 -9

CONVEYANCE SECTION 2.3.2


Mixed original mode control

The mixed original sizes copy mode is applicable to both the same size originals and the different size originals. Since the size detection in the direction of the original feed is made according to the ON time of the original registration sensor /Rt (PS318), the size detection operation is made prior to the scan operation for each original. 2.3.3

Z-fold original mode control

In the Z-fold mode, the same detection operation as that in the mixed original sizes copy mode is made on the 1st sheet of original to determine the original size. For the 2nd and succeeding originals, the normal original conII Composition/Operation

veyance is made. 2.3.4

Skew adjustment control

The original skew sensor /Rr (PS311) and the original skew sensor /Fr (PS312) are provided to make adjustments when the original is conveyed with its leading edge skewed. PS311 and PS312 are provided on the front side and the rear side of the conveyance path before scan to detect the amount of skew based on the time difference when the leading edge of the original turns ON these sensors. The amount of skew detected is adjusted by means of image processing. The relationship of the distance between the two sensors makes it effective only on original larger than A4R in width and the correction of the tilt angle up to 1.5°C is made. 2.3.5

Centering adjustment

The leading edge of the original pre-fed is detected by the centering sensor /Rr (PS321) and the centering LED sensor /Rr (PS322). According to the timing of this detection, the side edge of the original is detected by the centering sensor /Fr (PS320) and the centering LED sensor /Fr (PS319) to determine the effective read area in the main scan direction. The width of the original size that can be detected is restricted only to A4 or 11 inch. However, PS320 is required to be positioned to the width of the original you want to detect. The maximum range that can be corrected is within ± 3 mm. When in excess of this range, only 3 mm is corrected. The centering adjustment control is invalid for original sizes other than A4 and 11 inch and in the mixed original mode. The sensor can detect any color in the original. 2.3.6

Cooling fan control

To prevent the original conveyance motor (M301) from getting too hot while in operation, the motor is cooled by the cooling fan /Lt (FM301). The cooling fan turns ON when the original feed is started, and it turns OFF when the original exit is completed. To prevent the original exit motor /1 (M304), the original exit motor /2 (M305), the RADF control board (RADFCB) and the tray up/down motor (M303) from getting too hot while in operation, these motors and board are cooled by the cooling fan /Rt (FM302).

2 -10


REVERSAL SECTION

3. REVERSAL SECTION 3.1

Composition

df603to2016c

Symbol

Item


[1]

Stabilization of scan speed

Pressure roller release method

—

Reverse method

Paper exit gate + solenoid

3.2

Drive

A. Reverse drive

[1]

[2]

[3] [1]

Reverse roller

[2]

Original exit motor /1 (M304)

df603to2017c

[3]

Reverse conveyance roller

2 -11


[1]

REVERSAL SECTION


B. Pressure roller release drive


[1]

df603to2018c

[1]

Pressure roller release solenoid (SD302)

3.3

Operation

3.3.1

Reverse mechanism

A. Small size original When the gate solenoid (SD303) starts up, the flapper [3] closes and originals the front of which has been scanned are conveyed [2] to the reverse section by the reverse roller [1]. A specified period of time after the original reverse sensor (PS309) [7] turns OFF by detecting the trailing edge of the original, SD303 opens the paper exit gate [6] and the reverse paper feed [5] is made while rotating in the reverse direction at a low speed and then at a high speed to guide the original to the conveyance roller [4].

[5]

[4]

[6]

[7]

[3]

[1]

[2]

df603to2027c

[1]

Reverse roller

[4]

Conveyance roller

[2]

Conveyance to the reversal section

[5]

Reverse paper feed

[3]

Flapper

[6]

Paper exit gate

[7]

Original reverse sensor (PS309)

2 -12


REVERSAL SECTION

B. Large size original When the gate solenoid (SD303) energizes, the flapper [5] is closed and the original the surface of which has been scanned is conveyed to the reversal section by the reverse roller [8]. The original conveyed to the reversal section [4], because it cannot be contained in the reversal section, is conveyed to the paper exit reversal section [2] by the reverse conveyance roller [9], the paper exit reverse roller [1]. At this time, the exit gate [10] is closed by the exit gate solenoid (SD304). The originals that have been conveyed to the reversal section and the paper exit reversal section are fed in reverse [6] in the same manner as small size originals. At this time, since the originals do not yet pass through reverse roller makes the reverse rotation, the pressure roller release solenoid (SD302) activates to release the pressure roller [3] for the reverse roller. The originals are released from the pressure roller and guided to the conveyance roller [7].

[8]

[7]

[9]

[10]

[1]

[6]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Paper exit reverse roller

[6]

Reverse feed

[2]

Conveyance to the paper exit reversal section

[7]

Conveyance roller

[3]

Pressure roller

[8]

Reverse roller

[4]


[9]


[5]

Flapper

[10]

Exit gate

df603to2028c

2 -13


the reverse roller [8], the reverse conveyance roller [9] even if they have reach the conveyance roller [7], after the

REVERSAL SECTION 3.3.2



A. Small size original A specified period of time after the start of the conveyance [1] of the 1st original, the front of the 1st original is read [2]. The 1st original conveyed to the reverse section stops temporarily after being accelerated by the original exit motor /2 (M305) and the original exit motor /1 (M304). M305 and M304 start a reverse rotation [3] to let the original hit against the conveyance roller for registration. For the original that has been registered, a specified period of time after the original conveyance sensor (PS308)


turn ON [4], the back of the 1st original is read [5].

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

Original conveyance sensor (PS308) Original convey620 mm/s ance motor F (M301) 465 mm/s V-VALID Original exit 620 mm/s motor /1 (M304) F 465 mm/s 465 mm/s R 550 mm/s 620 mm/s Reverse jam sensor (PS304) Pressure release roller solenoid (SD302) Original exit 620 mm/s motor /2 (M305) F 465 mm/s R

465 mm/s 620 mm/s

Original reverse sensor (PS309) Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313) Exit gate solenoid (SD304) df603to2020c

[1]

Front face of the 1st sheet of original

[2]

Reading of the front face of the 1st sheet of

[5]

Reading of the rear face of the 1st sheet of original

original

[6]

Front face of the 2nd sheet of original

[3]

Reversal of the 1st sheet of original

[7]

Reading of the front face of the 2nd sheet of

[4]

Rear face of the 1st sheet of original

2 -14

original


REVERSAL SECTION

B. Large size original A specified period of time after the start of the conveyance [1] of the 1st original, the front of the 1st original is read [2]. The 1st original conveyed to the reverse section stops temporarily after being accelerated by the original exit motor /2 (M305) and the original exit motor /1 (M304). M305 and M304 start a reverse rotation [3] to let the original hit against the conveyance roller for registration. For the back of the original that has been registered, a specified period of time after the original reverse sensor (PS309) turns ON, the pressure release roller solenoid (SD302) is turned ON [4] to release the pressure roller, and then release the conveyance force of the reverse section. A specified period of time after the original con-

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

Original conveyance sensor (PS308) Original convey620 mm/s ance motor F (M301) 465 mm/s V-VALID Original exit 620 mm/s motor /1 (M304) F 465 mm/s 465 mm/s R 550 mm/s 620 mm/s Reverse jam sensor (PS304) Pressure release roller solenoid (SD302) Original exit 620 mm/s motor /2 (M305) F 465 mm/s R

465 mm/s 620 mm/s

Original reverse sensor (PS309) Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313) Exit gate solenoid (SD304) df603to2021c

[1]

Front face of the 1st sheet of original

[5]

Rear face of the 1st sheet of original

[2]

Reading of the front face of the 1st sheet of

[6]

Reading of the rear face of the 1st sheet of

original [3]

Reversal of the 1st sheet of original

[4]

Pressure roller release

original [7]

Front face of the 2nd sheet of original

2 -15


veyance sensor (PS308) turns ON [5], the back of the 1st original is read [6].

PAPER EXIT SECTION


4. PAPER EXIT SECTION 4.1

Composition

A. Paper exit section (large size)


[1]

df603to2022c

Symbol [1]

Item


Conveyance path switching method

Paper exit gate + solenoid

B. Paper exit section (small size)

[1] Symbol [1]

2 -16

Item Conveyance path switching method

df603to2023c

Specification/mechanism Paper exit gate + solenoid


4.2

PAPER EXIT SECTION

Drive

A. Exit gate drive


[2]

[1] [1]

Exit gate

[2]

df603to2024c

Exit gate solenoid (SD304)

B. Paper exit drive (for large size)

[1]

[2]

df603to2025c

[1]


[2]


2 -17

PAPER EXIT SECTION


C. Paper exit drive (for small size)

[3]


[1]

[2] [1]


[2]


2 -18

df603to2026c

[3]



4.3

Operation

4.3.1

Paper exit mechanism

PAPER EXIT SECTION

A. Paper exit operation of small size original (1) Single sided original The originals that have been scanned are conveyed to the reversal section [3] because of the gate solenoid (SD303) being closed by the flapper [4]. The originals conveyed to the reversal section are conveyed to the exit gate [7] by the reverse roller [5], the reverse conveyance roller [6]. After that, they are conveyed to the paper exit II Composition/Operation

roller /2 [1] through the exit gate [7] that has been opened by the exit gate solenoid (SD304). The paper exit roller /2 [1] exits the originals to the original exit tray (for small size) [2] with their copied side down.

[5]

[4]

[6]

[3]

[1]

[7]

[2]

[1]


[4]

Flapper

[2]

Exits the originals to the original exit tray

[5]

Reverse roller

(for small size)

[6]



[7]

Exit gate

[3]

df603to2029c

2 -19

PAPER EXIT SECTION


(2) Double sided original The originals the rear face of which has been scanned are conveyed to the exit gate [5] in the same manner as with the single sided originals. At this time, the gate [5] is closed by the exit gate solenoid (SD304), and the originals are conveyed to the paper exit reversal section [2] through the paper exit reverse roller [3]. When the original reverse/exit sensor (PS313) [4] of the paper exit reversal section detects the originals, the paper exit reverse roller [3] stops. When SD304 opens the exit gate [5], the paper exit reverse roller [3] starts to make a high speed reverse rotation to send back the conveyed originals. At this time, the exit gate [5] is open and the originals are


exited to the original exit tray (for small size) [1] with their front face down.

[5]

[6]

[1]

[3]

[4] [1]

[2]


[4]

(for small size)

[5]

Exit gate

[2]

Conveyance to the paper exit reversal section

[6]


[3]


2 -20

df603to2030c

Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313)


PAPER EXIT SECTION

B. Paper exit operation of large size original (1) Single sided original The originals that have been scanned are conveyed to the paper exit roller /1 [2] by the conveyance roller [4] because of the flapper [3] and the paper exit gate [5] being opened by the gate solenoid (SD303). And then, the paper exit roller /1 [2] makes a low speed normal rotation to exit the originals to the original exit tray (for large size) [1] with their copied face down.


[5]

[4] [1] [2]

[3]

[2]

df603to2031c


[3]

Flapper

(for large size)

[4]

Conveyance roller


(2) Double sided original The originals the rear face of which has been scanned are conveyed to the reversal section [2] because of the flapper [4] being closed by the gate solenoid (SD303). When the original reverse sensor (PS309) [3] detects the trailing edge of the originals conveyed, SD303 opens the flapper [4] and the paper exit gate. The originals are exited to the original exit tray (for large size) [1] by the paper exit roller /1 [6] through the flapper that is open.

[5]

[6]

[1]

[4]

[3] [1] [2]

[2]

df603to2032c


[3]

Original reverse sensor (PS309)

(for large size)

[4]

Flapper


[5]

Paper exit gate

[6]


2 -21



PAPER EXIT SECTION

Blank page

2 -22

pf701ma.book Page 1 Wednesday, March 2, 2005 1:30 PM

SERVICE MANUAL

Theory of Operation

PF-701

2005.03 Ver. 2.0


pf701ma.book Page i Wednesday, March 2, 2005 1:30 PM


CONTENTS


OUTLINE


Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3

Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.4

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.5

Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.6



II


1. PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

1.3

1.2.1

Tray lift drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

1.2.2

Paper feed drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

1.2.3

Pick-up drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 1.3.1

Up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

1.3.2

Size detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

1.3.3

Pick-up mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

1.3.4

Separation mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

1.3.5

Air assist mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

1.3.6

Paper empty detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

1.3.7

Remaining paper detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

1.3.8

Tray lock control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2. CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 2.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

2.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 2.3.1

Pre-registration control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

2.3.2

Conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

3. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 3.1

Dehumidification heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

4. PCS CORRESPONDING PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 4.1

Parts for overlay printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

i


I

I Outline

CONTENTS

pf701ma.book Page ii Wednesday, March 2, 2005 1:30 PM



I Outline

CONTENTS

Blank page

ii




I Outline


Type

Name:

Large capacity paper feed unit

Type:

Front loading type 3-tray paper feeder

1.2

Functions

Number of trays:

3 trays (All trays universal)

Maximum tray capacity:

6,000 sheets (80 g/m2 standard paper) = 2,000 sheets x 3 trays

1.3

Type of paper

Paper size:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)

Applicable paper:

PPC paper, high quality paper, coated paper, label paper, trace paper

Paper weight:

1.4

Tray /3, /5:

50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2

Tray /4:

50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

Maintenance

Maintenance:




1.5

Machine data

Power source:

24V/5V DC, 14.5V AC (supplied both from the main body)

Maximum power consumption: 100W or less Dimensions:

807 mm (W) x 1020 mm (H) x 675 mm (D)

Weight:

142 kg

1.6


Temperature:

10°C to 30°C

Humidity:


1

1 -1


UNIT COMPOSITION


I Outline


[1]

[6]

[2]

[5]

[3]

[4]

pf701to1001c

1 -2

[1]

Tray section

[5]

Exit conveyance

[2]

Tray /3

[6]

Vertical conveyance

[3]

Tray /4

[7]

Conveyance section

[4]

Tray /5



PAPER PATH

I Outline

3. PAPER PATH [1]

[2] [4]

[3]

pf701to1002c

[1]

Paper path of the tray /3

[3]


[2]


[4]

Paper path to the main body (trays /3, /4 and /5)

1 -3



I Outline

PAPER PATH

Blank page

1 -4



PAPER FEED SECTION

II COMPOSITION/OPERATION 1. PAPER FEED SECTION Composition


1.1

[6]

[5]

[4] Symbol

[7]

[3]

[2]

Item

[1]


[2]


[1]

pf701to2001c

Specification/mechanism Dead weight pressure roller + solenoid Forced reverse rotation by means of separation roller + electromagnetic clutch (for tray /4 only)

[3]

Paper size detection method

Main scan direction: Volume resistance Sub scan direction: Photo sensor

[4]



[5]


Air assist fan

[6]

Paper empty detection method

Photo sensor

[7]

Paper lift method

Wire drive method horizontal up/down

2 -1


PAPER FEED SECTION

1.2

Drive

1.2.1

Tray lift drive



[2]

[1]

[6]

[1]

[2]

[5]

[3]

[4]

pf701to2002c

2 -2

[1]

Lift wires /Fr2 and /Rr2

[4]

Paper lift motors /1 (M42), /2 (M43) and /3 (M44)

[2]

Lift wires /Fr1 and /Rr1

[5]

Lift release coupling gear

[3]

Paper lift plate

[6]

Torque limiting gear (oil damper)


bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.2.0 Paper feed drive

[12]

[1] [2]

[11]

[3]

M40


1.2.2

PAPER FEED SECTION

[4]

[5] [10]

[9]

[8]

[6] [7]

pf701to2003c

[1]

Tray rear section

[7]

Tray /4 only

[2]

Tray center section

[8]

Torque limiter

[3]

Paper feed roller

[9]

Forced separation clutch (CL11)

[4]

Belt

[10]

Separation clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10) and /3 (CL13)

[5]

Pick-up roller

[11]

Coupling

[6]

Separation roller

[12]

Paper feed clutches /1 (CL6), /2 (CL9) and /3 (CL12)

2 -3


PAPER FEED SECTION


1.2.3


Pick-up drive

[1]

[2]

pf701to2004c

[1]

2 -4

Pick-up solenoids /1 (SD14), /2 (SD15) and /3 (SD16)

[2]

Pick-up roller



1.3

Operation

1.3.1

Up/down control

PAPER FEED SECTION

A. Up operation The paper lift motors /1 (M42), /2 (M43) and /3 (M44) wind up the lift wires through the pulleys to lift up the paper lift plate. B. Down operation ley [1] is detached by the release lever [4]. The paper lift plate goes down slowly by its own weight through the torque restriction gear [5] that is activated only while in the down operation.

[5]

[1]

[2]

[4]

[4]

[1]

Pulley

[4]

Release lever

[2]

Coupling gear

[5]

Torque limiting gear

[3]

Motor shaft

[3]

pf701to2005c

C. Operation timing When the tray is set, the paper lift motors /1 (M42), /2 (M43) and /3 (M44) turn on to bring up the paper lift plate. When the upper limit sensor /1 (PS71), /2 (PS77) and /3 (PS83) turn on, the motors M42, M43 and M44 stop. When the sensors PS71, PS77 and PS83 turn off from on while in printing, the motors M42, M43 and M44 turn on again to bring up the paper lift plate until the sensors PS71, PS77 and PS83 turn on, and the motors M42, M43 and M44 turn off.

2 -5


When pulling out the tray, the coupling gear [2] that transmits the drive force from the motor shaft [3] to the pul-





The paper size detection is made in the following two directions: a detection in the main scan direction and the sub scan direction. The size detection in the sub scan direction is made by the following each pair of the sensors: the paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS75) [4] and /Rr1 (PS76) [5] for tray /3, /Fr2 (PS81) [4] and /Rr 2 (PS82) [5] for tray /4, and /Fr3 (PS87) [4] and /Rr3 (PS88) [5] for tray /5. When the paper rear guide [6] is moved, the detection cams /Up [1] and /Lw [2] that are different in their form are pressed by the knob [5]. According to the position of the paper rear


guide, the paper size sensors /Fr1 [4], /Fr2 [4] and /Fr3 [4] and Rr1 [3], /Rr2 [3] and /Rr3 [3] turn on and off.

[6]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

2 -6

[1]

[1]

Detection cam /Up

[4]

[2]

Detection cam /Lw

[3]

Paper size sensors /Rr1 (PS76), /Rr2 (PS82)

[5]

Knob

and /Rr3 (PS88)

[6]

Paper rear guide

pf701to2006c

Paper size sensors /Fr1 (PS75), /Fr2 (PS81) and /Fr3 (PS87)



PAPER FEED SECTION

Paper size sensor /Fr1 (PS75),

/Rr1 (PS76),

/Fr2 (PS81),

/Rr2 (PS82),

/Fr3 (PS87)

/Rr3 (PS88)

A5, B5, A4, 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5 x 11*

OFF

OFF

B5R, A4R, 8.5 x 11R*

OFF

ON

12 x 18, F4*

ON

ON

B4, A3, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17

ON

OFF

*

For the paper sizes shown below, it is necessary to set the paper size on the operation panel. Make a selection from among A5 and 5.5 x 8.5. Make a selection from among A4R and 8.5 x 11R. Make a selection as F4 from among 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13 and 8.5 x 13.

The size in the main scan direction is detected by the paper size VR/1 (VR11), /2 (VR13) and /3 (VR15) that are interlocked with the paper guide. The main body is informed of the detection a specified period of time after the tray is set. For the resistance value, a default value is set through the "tray adjustment" in the service mode. 1.3.3

Pick-up mechanism

Paper is picked up when the pick-up solenoids /1 (SD14), /2 (SD15) and /3 (SD16) turn off. When the solenoids SD14, SD15 and SD16 turn off, the pick-up roller goes down to press paper by its own weight. When the paper feed clutches /1 (CL6), /2 (CL9) and /3 (CL12) turn on, the pick-up roller rotates to convey paper to the paper feed roller.

[3]

[5]

Paper feed sensor /1 (PS72), /2 (PS78), /3 (PS84) Paper feed motor (M40) Paper feed clutch /1 (CL6), /2 (CL9), /3 (CL12) Pick-up solenoid /1 (SD14), /2 (SD15), /3 (SD16)

[1]

[2]

[4]

pf701to2007c

[1]

Start button ON

[4]

Pick-up of the 2nd sheet of paper

[2]

Pick-up of the 1st sheet of paper

[5]

Conveyance of the 2nd sheet of paper

[3]

Conveyance of the 1st sheet of paper

2 -7


Paper size





The transmission of the driving force to the separation roller [4] transmits the driving force of the paper feed motor (M40) through the torque limiter [7] by turning on and off the separation clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10) and / 3 (CL 13) [8]. The separation roller [4] is driven in the direction opposite to the paper conveyance. However, when no paper is conveyed and only one sheet of paper is conveyed, the frictional force generating between the paper feed roller [1] and the separation roller [4] or the paper and the separation roller is greater than the frictional force of the torque limiter [3]. Accordingly, the separation roller rotates in the direction of the paper conveyance to convey II Composition/Operation

paper to the vertical conveyance section. When 2 or more sheets of paper are conveyed, the frictional force between these sheets of paper is smaller than the frictional force of the torque limiter and the separation roller rotates in the reverse direction to prevent the lower most paper from being conveyed. Tray /4 is provided with the forced separation clutch (CL11) [5] that forcibly rotates the separation roller [4] in the reverse direction not through the torque limiter [7].

[9] [1] [2]

[8] [7]

[3]

[6]

[4] [5] [4]

[8]

[5]

[6]

2 -8

[7]

pf701to2008c

[1]

Pick-up roller

[6]

Tray /4 only

[2]

1st sheet of paper

[7]

Torque limiter

[3]

2nd sheet of paper

[8]

Separation clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10) and

[4]

Separation roller

[5]

Forced separation clutch (CL11)

/3 (CL13) [9]

Paper feed roller



PAPER FEED SECTION

A. Separation clutch control When paper is slippery (or, when the power of conveyance is not sufficient), paper conveyed from the pick-up roller may be unable to pass through the separation sections of the paper feed roller and the separation roller. To alleviate a condition like this, the separation clutches /1 (CL7), /2 (CL10) and /3 (CL13) are not turned ON until paper gets to the separation section to remove the drive force to the separation roller, and allow it to function as a driven roller to the paper feed roller. After paper gets to the separation section, turn ON the CL7, CL10 and CL13 to conduct the normal separation operation. However, this control should be conducted as shown below. Conducted unconditionally.

• Type of paper: Those other than the coated paper B:Conducted automatically judging from the condition of conveyance at the separation section. B. Forced separation clutch control (tray /4 only) The forced separation clutch (CL11) is equipped only to the tray /4. When paper is conveyed to the separation roller, it rotates the separation roller momentarily in the reverse direction independent of the torque limiter for greater separation of paper. This control is automatically made only in the high temperature condition for coated paper A and B weighing more than 72 g/m2. However, the DIPSW26-4 can be used to select a high temperature as a condition for control.

2 -9


• Type of paper: Coated paper B:




Air assist mechanism

Trays /3 to /5 are provided with paper feed assist fans that blow air [4] onto paper [3] from a pair of paper guides attached both in front and in the rear and assist the separation of paper. Tray /3 is provided with paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM41) [2] and /Rr1 (FM42) [1], tray /4 with paper feed assist fans /Fr2 (FM43) [2] and /Rr2 (FM44) [1], and tray /5 with paper feed assist fans /Fr3 (FM45) [2] and /Rr3 (FM46) [1]. Each of the paper feed assist fans is effective especially for thick paper, and paper with a high degree of adhesion (such as coated paper). However, fan assist using plain paper may result in improper paper feed.


[3]

[4]

[2] [1]

pf701to2010c

[1] [2]

Paper feed assist fans /Rr1 (FM42), /Rr2

[3]

Paper

(FM44), /Rr3 (FM46)

[4]

Blowout of air

Paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM41), /Fr2 (FM43), /Fr3 (FM45)

A. Operation timing The operation of the paper feed assist fans /Fr1 (FM41), /Rr1 (FM42), /Fr2 (FM43), /Rr2 (FM44), /Fr3 (FM45) and /Rr3 (FM46) can be selected through the user setting on the operation panel from among the following three modes: Always ON, always OFF and Auto. While in the Auto mode, the paper feed assist fans is normally turned OFF. However, when the conveyance time from the start of the paper feed to the paper feed sensors /1 (PS72), /2 (PS783) and /3 (PS84) is in excess of a specified period of time, or when a no feed jam condition occurs, the paper feed assist fan of the corresponding tray is turned ON at that point of time. However, when a paper type other than the coated paper B is set and the separation roller functions as a driven roller to the paper feed roller by the control of the separation clutch, the paper feed assist fan remains OFF to prevent the multi feed of paper. The operations in this Auto mode can be reset by pulling out the tray (except for pulling out of the tray while in a jam), or turning OFF the power switch.

2 -10



PAPER FEED SECTION


Paper empty detection in the tray is made by the paper empty sensors /1 (PS73), /2 (PS79) and /3 (PS85). 1.3.7

Remaining paper detection control

Remaining paper detection is made by the remaining paper VR/1 (VR10), /2 (VR12) and /3 (VR14) that are interlocked with the up/down operation of the paper lift plate through the pulley and the gear. The remaining paper quantity is detected in the following 5 stages according to the resistance value, and the main body is informed of the detection. : Less than 10% II Composition/Operation

Stage 1 (displayed in red)

Stage 1 (displayed in white) : Less than 25% Stage 2 (displayed in white) : 25% to 50% Stage 3 (displayed in white) : 50% to 75% Stage 4 (displayed in white) : 75% to 100%

[2]

[1]

pf701to2011c

[1]

Remaining paper VR/1 (VR10), /2 (VR12), /3

[2]

Lift pulley /Rr

(VR14)

1.3.8

Tray lock control

Each of the trays is locked by the tray lock lever. When it is found that either of the handle release sensors /1 (PS74), /2 (PS80) and /3 (PS86) of the trays /3 to /5 turns off, the tray lock solenoids /1 (SD10), /2 (SD11) and /3 (SD12) of the corresponding tray turns on to bring up the tray lock lever and release the lock, thus allowing the tray to be pulled out. When it is found that any other sensor turns off while either of the sensors PS74, PS80 and PS86 turns off, none of the solenoids SD10, SD11 and SD12 other than the one that has already turned on turns on to prevent two or more trays from being pulled out at the same time. When a jam occurs that affects the tray and the exit conveyance section, the tray remains locked until the jammed paper is removed. Doing this prevents the paper from being torn off.

2 -11


CONVEYANCE SECTION


2. CONVEYANCE SECTION 2.1

Composition


[1]

pf701to2012c

Symbol [1]

2 -12

Item Registration method

Specification/mechanism Creation of a roller stopper loop



2.2

CONVEYANCE SECTION

Drive [1]

[18] [17] [16] [15] [14]


[13]

[12] [2]

[11]

[10] [9] [8] [7] [6] [3]

[5]

[4]

pf701to2013c

[1]

Coupling (transmission of driving force to the tray /3)

[10]


[2]


[11]

Exit conveyance roller

[3]


[12]

PF exit conveyance motor (M41)

[4]

Paper feed motor (M40)

[13]


[5]


[14]


[6]


[15]


[7]


[16]

Intermediate clutch /Up (CL2)

[8]

Intermediate clutch /Lw (CL5)

[17]


[9]


[18]


2 -13


CONVEYANCE SECTION

2.3

Operation

2.3.1

Pre-registration control


When paper feed starts, paper is sent out to the pre-registration roller by the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller. When paper strikes the pre-registration roller that is stationary, a loop is formed to adjust the skew of paper. When the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL3) and /3 (CL4) turn on, the driving force of the paper feed motor (M40) is transmitted to the pre-registration rollers 3/, /4 and /5 to convey paper in the direction of the


main body. 2.3.2

Conveyance control

For the vertical conveyance, the driving force of the paper feed motor (M40) is transmitted by turning on and off the intermediate clutches /Up (CL2) and /Lw (CL5), and the pre-registration clutches /1 (CL1), /2 (CL3) and /3 (CL4). The exit conveyance is made by the PF exit conveyance motor (M41). Paper that is fed from tray /3 is conveyed to the conveyance rollers /1 and /2 driven through the pre-registration roller /3, CL2 that is in turn driven by the CL1, and then conveyed to the exit conveyance roller. When the loop sensor /1 (PS92) detects the trailing edge of paper, the CL2 turns off. Paper that is fed from tray /4 is conveyed to the exit conveyance roller by the pre-registration roller that is in turn driven by the CL3. Paper that is fed from tray /5 is conveyed to the conveyance rollers /4 and /3 through the pre-registration roller / 5, CL5 that is in turn driven by the CL4, and then conveyed to the exit conveyance roller. When the loop sensor /3 (PS98) detects the trailing edge of paper, the CL5 turns off. The exit conveyance roller is driven by the PF exit conveyance motor (M41). It starts to rotate at a low speed when the loop sensors /1 (PS92), 2/ (PS94) and /3 (PS98) detect paper, and turns off when the exit sensor (PS99) detects the trailing edge of paper.

2 -14



OTHERS

3. OTHERS 3.1

Dehumidification heater

Trays /3 to /5 are provided with the dehumidification heaters /1 (HTR1), /2 (HTR2) and /3 (HTR3), 1 each respectively, below each tray. They are turned on when the dehumidification heater switch (SW3) of the main body is


turned ON.

[1]

[2]

[3]

pf701to2014c

[1]

Dehumidification heater /1 (HTR1)

[2]


[3]


2 -15


PCS CORRESPONDING PARTS


4. PCS CORRESPONDING PARTS 4.1

Parts for overlay printing

The following are available as PCS corresponding parts for overlay printing. • Cleaning brush • Paper feed assist plate


For particulars, see chapter II "10.4 PCS corresponding parts" in the Theory of Operation for the main body.

2 -16

fd501ma.book Page 1 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:35 PM

SERVICE MANUAL

Theory of Operation

FD-501

2004.10 Ver. 1.0


fd501ma.book Page i Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:35 PM


CONTENTS


OUTLINE


Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3

Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.3.1

Punching function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3.2

Folding functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.3.3

PI functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.4

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.5

Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.6



II


1. CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

1.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 1.3.1

Conveyance path switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

1.3.2

Conveyance line speed control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

1.3.3

Alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2. PUNCH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 2.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

3. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 3.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

3.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

3.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 3.3.1

Registration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

3.3.2

Conveyance path switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

3.3.3

1st folding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

3.3.4

2nd folding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

3.3.5

3rd folding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

4. MAIN TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 4.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

4.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

4.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 4.3.1

Main tray up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

5. SUB TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 5.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

5.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

i


I

I Outline

CONTENTS

fd501ma.book Page ii Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:35 PM

CONTENTS

I Outline

5.3

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

5.3.1

Sub tray full detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

5.3.2

Line speed switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32


6. PI SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 6.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

6.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

6.3

ii

6.2.1

Tray lift drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

6.2.2

Paper feed drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

6.2.3

Pick-up drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 6.3.1

Size detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

6.3.2

Up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

6.3.3

Pick-up mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

6.3.4

Separation mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

6.3.5

Multi feed detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

6.3.6

Paper empty detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41




I Outline


Type

Name:

Punch·multi folding finisher

Type:

Multi folding device with punch and PI functions

1.2

Functions

A. Functions Normal paper exit function: Transfer paper exited from the main body is exited into the main tray/sub tray. Punching function:

Transfer paper that is exited by the main body or fed to the PI is punched for each sheet of paper and exited into the main tray/sub tray.

Folding function:

Transfer paper that is exited from the main body or fed to the PI is handled for folding (either one of the following: Z-fold, Letter fold-out, Letter fold-in, Double parallel fold, Gate fold, and folding) for each sheet of paper, and exited into the sub tray/main tray (The Z-fold exit to the main tray while in the FS connection is limited only to B4, A3, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 x 18 and 8K.)

PI insertion function:

PI tray paper is inserted in the transfer paper exited from the main body.

Manual mode:

PI tray paper is punched, folded and stapled, and then exited into the sub tray/ main tray. (The stapling function is available only when the staple unit is connected to the downstream of the FD.)

B. Maximum tray capacity Main tray (weighing 50 to 244 g/m2): 2,500 sheets:

A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR

1,500 sheets:

A3, B4, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)

1,500 sheets:

11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 12 x 18, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 8K

500 sheets

A5, A5R, B6R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R

Sub tray (weighing 50 to 300 g/m2): 200 sheets:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, wide paper, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR

C. Processing capacity: 105PPM

1.3

Type of paper

1.3.1

Punching function

A. Paper size: 2 holes:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13,

3 holes/4 holes:

A3, B4, A4, B5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8K, 16K

12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 14, 8K, 16K, 5.5 x 8.5

1 -1




B. Applicable paper:

I Outline

Plain paper, index paper C. Paper weight: 50 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 1.3.2

Folding functions

A. Paper size: A3, B4, A4R, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11R, 8K B. Applicable paper: Plain paper C. Paper weight: •

Folding, Letter fold-in, Letter fold-out, Z-fold

50 g/m2 to 130 g/m2

•

Double parallel fold, Gate fold:

50 g/m2 to 91 g/m2

1.3.3

PI functions

A. Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, standard index paper, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm), 8K, 16K, 16KR B. Applicable paper: Plain paper, high-quality paper, trace paper, coated paper C. Paper weight: 50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2 D. Maximum tray capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) x 2 trays

1.4

Maintenance

Maintenance:




1.5

Machine data

Power source (for metric area): 230 VAC, DCS 5V (5V DCS is supplied from the main body.) Power source (for inch area):

200 VAC, DCS 5V (5V DCS is supplied from the main body.)

Maximum power consumption: 180 VA or less Dimensions:

W 400 mm x D 656 mm x H 1231 mm

Weight:

130 kg

(The main tray is not included in the width)

1.6

1 -2


Temperature:

10°C to 30°C

Humidity:




UNIT COMPOSITION

I Outline

2. UNIT COMPOSITION

[1]

[6]

[2]

[5]

[3]

[4]

fd501to1001c

[1]

PI section

[4]

Folding conveyance section

[2]

Conveyance section

[5]

Main tray section

[3]

Punch section

[6]

Sub tray section

1 -3


PAPER PATH


I Outline

3. PAPER PATH A. Straight mode

[1]

[2]

fd501to1002c

[1]

1 -4

Paper through from the PI

[2]

Paper through from the main body paper exit



PAPER PATH

I Outline

B. Sub tray mode

[1]

[2]

fd501to1003c

[1]


[2]


1 -5


PAPER PATH


I Outline

C. Punch mode (L and S sizes)

[1] [6]

[2]

[5]

[4]

[3]

fd501to1004c

[1]


[4]

In the case of a S size

[2]


[5]

Paper exit to the main tray, paper through to

[3]

In the case of a L size

the next option [6]

1 -6

Paper exit to the sub tray



PAPER PATH

I Outline

D. Z-fold mode

[1]

[6]

[2]

[5]

[4]

[3]

fd501to1005c

[1]


[4]

[2]


[5]

[3]

1st folding

2nd folding Paper exit to the main tray, paper through to the next option

[6]


1 -7


PAPER PATH


I Outline

E. Letter fold-out mode

[1]

[6]

[2]

[5]

[4]

[3]

fd501to1006c

[1]


[4]

2nd folding

[2]


[5]

Paper exit to the main tray, paper through to the next option

[3]

1 -8

1st folding

[6]



bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Letter fold-in/double parallel fold mode

I Outline

F.

PAPER PATH

[1]

[6]

[2]

[5]

[4]

[3]

fd501to1007c

[1]


[4]

2nd folding

[2]


[5]


[3]

1st folding

[6]


1 -9


PAPER PATH


I Outline

G. Gate fold mode

[1]

[7]

[2]

[6] [5]

[4]

[3]

fd501to1008c

[1]


[4]

2nd folding

[2]


[5]

3rd folding

[3]

1st folding

[6]


[7]

1 -10




PAPER PATH

I Outline

H. Folding mode

[1]

[5]

[2]

[4]

[3]

fd501to1009c

[1]


[2]


[3]

Folding

[4]


[5]


1 -11



I Outline

PAPER PATH

Blank page

1 -12



CONVEYANCE SECTION

II COMPOSITION/OPERATION 1. CONVEYANCE SECTION Composition


1.1

[1] [5]

[2]

[3]

[4]

fd501to2001c

Symbol

Item


[1]

Entrance conveyance path switching method

Entrance gate + solenoid

[2]

Alignment method

Alignment plate

[3]

Punch conveyance path switching method

S size gate + solenoid

[4]

L size paper conveyance path switching method

L size gate + solenoid

[5]

Paper exit conveyance path switching method

Sub tray gate + solenoid

2 -1


CONVEYANCE SECTION

1.2


Drive

A. Conveyance drive


[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

fd501to2002c

2 -2

[1]

Main tray paper exit motor (M17)

[3]

Entrance conveyance motor (M1)

[2]

Intermediate conveyance motor (M3)

[4]

Punch conveyance motor (M2)



CONVEYANCE SECTION

B. Gate drive


[18]

[1] [17] [16]

[2] [15]

[3] [4]

[14] [5]

[13]

[6] [7]

[12]

[8]

[9] [11]

[10] fd501to2003c

2 -3



CONVEYANCE SECTION


[1]

Entrance gate

[10]

Vertical conveyance roller /4

[2]

Entrance gate solenoid (SD1)

[11]

L size gate solenoid (SD4)

[3]


[12]

L size gate

[4]

Roller solenoid /1 (SD5)

[13]

S size gate solenoid (SD3)

[5]


[14]

S size gate

[6]


[15]

Sub tray gate solenoid (SD9)

[7]


[16]

Sub tray gate

[8]


[17]

Sub tray paper exit roller

[9]


[18]

Paper exit solenoid (SD12)

C. Alignment drive

[1]

[2] [4]

2 -4

[3]

[1]

Alignment motor (M12)

[3]

Alignment plate /Rr

[2]

Belt

[4]

Alignment plate /Fr

fd501to2004c



1.3

Operation

1.3.1

Conveyance path switching

CONVEYANCE SECTION

The conveyance path of the paper that has been conveyed to the entrance guide plate varies according to the presence of a punch or folding, the tray into which paper is exited, and the paper size. The switching of the conveyance path is made by the entrance gate, the sub tray gate, the S size gate, the L size gate and the folding gate. (For the folding gate, see "3. Folding conveyance section.")

Switching is made between the straight conveyance and the punch/folding conveyance by the entrance gate solenoid (SD1). In the case of the straight conveyance, the SD1 remains OFF. When conveying the 1st sheet of paper for punching/folding operation, SD1 is energized a specified period of time after the start button is turned ON. For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper, SD1 is energized in accord with the conveyance direction of the succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the FD entrance sensor (PS1).

[3]

[1] [2]

fd501to2005c

[1]

Entrance gate

[2]

Punch mode or folding mode

[3]

Straight mode

2 -5


A. Entrance gate


CONVEYANCE SECTION


B. Sub tray gate Switching is made between the main tray paper exit and the sub tray paper exit by the sub tray gate solenoid (SD9). In the case of the main tray paper exit, the SD9 remains OFF. When exiting the 1st sheet of paper into the sub tray, switch the SD9 a specified period of time after the start button is turned ON. For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper, SD9 is energized in accord with the paper exit direction of the


succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS13).

[1]

[3]

[2]

fd501to2006c

2 -6

[1]

Sub tray gate

[2]

Main tray paper exit

[3]

Sub tray paper exit



CONVEYANCE SECTION

C. S size gate Switching is made according to the paper size and the presence of folding. The drive of the gate is made by S size gate solenoid (SD3). In the punch mode with no folding and in the case of the S size paper, SD3 remains OFF. When conducting the folding operation or when feeding the 1st sheet of large size paper, switch SD3 a specified period of time after the start button is turned ON. For the 2nd and the succeeding sheets of paper, switch the SD9 in accord with the paper exit direction of the succeeding page after the preceding page passes through the punch conveyance sensor (PS5). II Composition/Operation

S size paper: The length in the sub scan direction is 216 mm or less.

[1] [4]

[2] [3]

fd501to2007c

[1]

S size gate

[3]

Punch conveyance sensor (PS5)

[2]

In the case of the folding (regardless of the

[4]

In the case of the S size paper with a punch

presence of a punch)

only

2 -7


CONVEYANCE SECTION


D. L size gate When folding the paper, the conveyance path is switched back and forth for each paper conveyance to prevent the succeeding paper from coming into contact with the trailing edge of the L size paper that is in folding process. The drive of the gate is made by the L size gate solenoid (SD4).


L size paper: The length in the sub scan direction is 216 mm or more.

[1]

[2]

fd501to2008c

[1]

2 -8

L size gate (SD4-OFF position)

[2]

Punch registration sensor (PS6)



CONVEYANCE SECTION

For the control of the L size gate, SD4 stands by at the OFF position (outer path) for the 1st sheet of paper to pass through. The 1st sheet of paper turns ON SD4 a specified period of time after the punch registration sensor (PS6) turns ON, and makes the switch to the inner path. When the 2nd sheet of paper turns ON PS6, SD4 turns OFF after a specified period of time to make the switch to the outer path.

L size gate solenoid (SD4) Paper passes through the L size gate

Outer path Inner path

Punch registration sensor (PS6) fd501to2039c

1.3.2

Conveyance line speed control

The conveyance line speed of each conveyance section varies according to the type of paper and paper weight. A. Line speed switching The following list shows each of conveyance sections and the range of the conveyance line speed. Conveyance section

Conveyance line speed

Entrance conveyance section

290 to 1000 mm/s

Intermediate conveyance section

800 to 1000 mm/s

Punch conveyance section

490 to 1000 mm/s

Main tray paper exit section

205 to 1000 mm/s

Sub tray paper exit section

500 mm/s

2 -9


The above operations are repeated for each sheet of paper.




Alignment control

On paper conveyed to the punching position, an alignment operation is made by the 2 alignment plates to improve the accuracy of the punch hole positioning and the folding. And its home position is detected by the alignment plate home sensor (PS10). When the start button is turned ON, M12 rotates in the forward direction to move the alignment plates /Fr and /Rr to the standby position of the paper size. When the paper is conveyed to the punch position in a specified number of steps after it passes through the FD entrance sensor (PS1), the roller solenoid /1 (SD5), the roller solenoid /2 (SD6), the roller solenoid /3 (SD7) and the roller solenoid /4 (SD8) release the pressure of each roller and M12 conducts the alignment operation. II Composition/Operation

The roller solenoids that release each of the rollers from pressure are modified according to the size and the direction of paper aligned. A specified period of time after completion of punching the last paper, M12 rotates in the reverse direction to bring the alignment plate back to the home position.

FD entrance sensor (PS1) Punch conveyance motor (M2) Alignment motor (M12)

F R

Roller solenoid (SD5, 6, 7, 8)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[1]

Start button ON

[3]

Alignment operation

[2]

Move to the standby position

[4]

Move to the home position

2 -10

fd501to2040c



PUNCH SECTION

2. PUNCH SECTION 2.1

Composition


[1]

[2]

[3]

fd501to2009c

Symbol

Item


[1]

Paper rear registration method

Punch rear claw

[2]

Punching method

Auto switching mechanism between 2 and 3 holes by nor-

[3]

Punch scraps box

mal/reverse rotation Punch scraps capacity: 10,000 punches

2 -11


PUNCH SECTION

2.2


Drive

A. Rear registration drive


[1]

[3]

[2] fd501to2010c

[1]

Punch registration motor (M13)

[2]

Paper

2 -12

[3]

Punch rear claw



PUNCH SECTION

B. Punch drive

[9]

[10]

[7]

[1]

[6]

[5]

[3]

[4]

[2]

fd501to2011c

[1]

Rotation when punching 3 holes (as seen from the front)

[6]

Eccentric cam

[2]

Rotation when punching 2 holes (as seen from the front)

[7]

Front direction

[3]

Punch motor (M10)

[8]

3-hole punch edge

[4]

2-hole punch edge

[9]

Eccentric cam

[5]

One-way gear (2-hole punch)

[10]

One-way gear (3-hole punch)

2.3

Operation

A. Punch control Punching is made by holding down the trailing edge of paper with the punch rear claw that is driven by the punch registration motor (M13), while driving the eccentric cam by the punch motor (M10). After alignment operations, the roller solenoids /1 to /4 are turned ON to let paper be placed in the unfixed condition. The paper, however, is held by the curvature of the conveyance section. And then, the punch registration motor (M13) rotates a specified number of steps and the punch rear claw holds the trailing edge of paper to move it to the punching position. After a specified period of time, the punch motor (M10) drives for punching. After completion of punching, M13 returns the punch rear claw to the home position. The position of the home position is detected by the punch registration home sensor (PS11). B. Punch hole switching control The punch hole is switched according to the rotational direction of the punch motor (M10). In the case of 2 holes, M10 rotates counterclockwise to drive the 2-hole punch edge. And in the case of 3 holes, M10 rotates clockwise to drive the 3-hole punch edge. The position of the 2-hole punch edge is detected by the 2-hole punch home sensor (PS8) and the position of the 3-hole punch edge is detected by the 3-hole/4-hole punch home sensor (PS9). C. Punch scraps box control The setting of the punch scraps box is detected by the punch scraps box set sensor (PS12), and the full condition of the punch scraps box is detected by the punch scraps full sensor (PS26).

2 -13


[8]


FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION


3. FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION Composition


3.1

[5]

[4]

[3] [1]

[2]

fd501to2012c

Symbol [1]

Item 1st folding method

Specification/mechanism Conveyance/folding by the roller (A switching between conveyance and folding is made by the stepping motor + the cam drive.)

[2]

Registration method

Roller stopper loop type

[3]

Folding conveyance path switching method

Folding gate + solenoid

[4]

2nd folding method

Conveyance/folding by the roller (A switching between conveyance and folding is made by the cam drive.)

[5]

3rd folding method

Conveyance/folding by the roller (A switching between conveyance and folding is made by the cam drive.)

2 -14



3.2


Drive

A. Conveyance drive

[1]


[2] M6

M5 [4]

[3]

M4

fd501to2013c

[1] [2]

Coupling

[3]

Folding gate

The pulley operates as an idler due to the

[4]

Folding gate solenoid (SD15)

bearing

2 -15




B. Folding drive

[1]


M16 [2] [3]

M15 [4]

[5]

M14 [6]

fd501to2014c

[1]

3rd folding roller /1 mounting board

[4]

2nd folding guide

[2]

3rd folding guide

[5]

1st folding roller /1 mounting board

[3]

2nd folding roller /1 mounting board

[6]

1st folding guide

2 -16



3.3

Operation

3.3.1



The paper that has passes through the punch registration sensor (PS6) and arrives at the folding conveyance section is pressed against the registration roller to make adjustments for skew. A specified period of time after the PS6 turns ON, the 1st folding motor (M4) resumes the conveyance of paper. When no folding operation is made, no registration control is made. However, no folding is made on the paper that has entered the folding conveyance section from the folding II Composition/Operation

entrance sensor side. The paper is conveyed vertically as is and exited to the main tray or the sub tray.

[3]

[1] [2]

fd501to2015c

[1]

Punch registration sensor (PS6)

[2]

Registration roller

[3]

Folding entrance sensor (PS52)

2 -17


FOLDING CONVEYANCE SECTION 3.3.2



Switching is made between the 2nd folding conveyance path and the 3rd folding conveyance path by the folding gate solenoid (SD15). In the case of other than the Z-fold, a specified period of time after the 1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51) turns ON, SD15 turns ON to convey the paper to the 2nd folding after the 1st folding. In the case of the Z-fold,


SD15 remains OFF and the paper is conveyed to the 3rd folding after the 1st folding.

[3]

[2] [1]

fd501to2016c

[1]

In the case of other than the Z-fold

[2]

Folding gate

2 -18

[3]

In the case of the Z-fold




Timing chart of the 1st folding roller /1 (Other folding rollers are also controlled in the same manner.)

Punch registration sensor (PS6) Roller solenoid /4 (SD8) [3]

1st folding roller /1

Conveyance Folding

1st folding release motor (M14) 2nd folding motor (M5)

[1] [1]

[2]

Change of the 1st folding roller /1 to the

fd501to2041c

[3]

1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51)

folding position [2]

Change of the 1st folding roller /1 to the conveyance position

2 -19


1st folding motor (M4)




1st folding control

A. Conveyance/folding switching control The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 1st folding roller /1. This switching is made when the eccentric cam is driven by the 1st folding release motor (M14). After the 1st folding conveyance sensor (PS51) turns ON, the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps. While the paper is being conveyed, the 1st folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] rotate in the same direction since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the idle gear [2]. After conveying the paper by the prescribed number of steps, M14 rotates until it gets to a specified number of II Composition/Operation

steps. This rotates the eccentric cam [5] to allow the idle gear arm [3] to separate the idle gear [2] from the 1st folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4]. At the same time, when M14 starts up, the cam provided on the inside of the 1st roller gear /2 [4] rotates to allow the 1st roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] to contact each other closely to get the gears engaged.

[1]

[2] [3] [4]

[5]

fd501to2017c

[1]

1st folding roller gear /1

[4]

1st folding roller gear /2

[2]

Idle gear

[5]

Eccentric cam

[3]

Idle gear arm

2 -20




And in parallel with this, when the 1st folding release motor (M14) starts up, the winding-up of the wire that pulls the folding guide [2] to the right side is loosened to allow the folding guide [2] to push out the paper in the clearance between the 1st folding rollers /1 [1] and /2 [3]. As a result, the paper gets caught in the rollers to be folded.


[1]

[2]

[3]

fd501to2018c

[1]


[2]

Folding guide

[3]


2 -21




2nd folding control

A. Conveyance/folding switching control The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 2nd folding roller /1. This switching is made when the eccentric cam is driven by the 2nd folding release motor (M15). After the 2nd folding conveyance sensor (PS53) turns ON, the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps. While the paper is being conveyed, the 2nd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] rotate in the same direction since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the idle gear [2]. After conveying the paper by the prescribed number of steps, M15 rotates until it gets to a specified number of II Composition/Operation

steps. This rotates the eccentric cam [5] to allow the idle gear arm [3] to separate the idle gear [2] from the 2nd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4]. At the same time, when M14 starts up, the cam provided on the inside of the 2nd roller gear /2 [4] rotates to allow the 1st roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] to contact each other closely to get the gears engaged.

[1]

[2] [3] [4]

[5]

fd501to2019c

[1]

2nd folding roller gear /1

[4]

2nd folding roller gear /2

[2]

Idle gear

[5]

Eccentric cam

[3]

Idle gear arm

2 -22




And in parallel with this, when the 2nd folding release motor (M15) starts up, the winding-up of the wire that pulls the folding guide [2] to the right side is loosened to allow the folding guide [2] to push out the paper in the clearance between the 2nd folding rollers /1 [1] and /2 [3]. As a result, the paper gets caught in the rollers to be

[4]


folded.

[1]

[2]

[3]

fd501to2020c

[1]

2nd folding roller /1

[3]

2nd folding roller /2

[2]

Folding guide

[4]

Direction of paper exit

2 -23




B. Gate fold assist control In the case of the Gate fold, the 2nd folding roller solenoid (SD18) turns ON a specified period of time after the 1st folding motor (M14) starts folding. When SD18 starts up, the 2nd roller is pressed firmly. This is a measure


taken to avoid a multiple fold that is apt to occur at the folding section of paper when the 2nd folding is made.

fd501to2021c

2 -24




3rd folding control

A. Conveyance/folding switching control The switching between conveyance and folding is made by moving the 3rd folding roller /1. This switching is made when the eccentric cam is driven by the 3rd folding release motor (M16). After the 3rd folding conveyance sensor (PS54) turns ON, the paper is conveyed by a specified number of steps. While the paper is being conveyed, the 3rd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] rotate in the same direction since these 2 gears are interlocked each other through the idle gear [2]. After conveying the paper by the prescribed number of steps, M16 rotates until it gets to a specified number of folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4]. At the same time, when M16 starts up, the cam provided on the inside of the 3rd roller gear /2 [4] rotates to allow the 3rd roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] to contact each other closely to get the gears engaged. Since the 3rd folding roller gears /1 [1] and /2 [4] are connected directly, the gears rotate in the opposite direction.

[1] [2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

fd501to2022c

[1]

3rd folding roller gear /1

[4]

3rd folding roller gear /2

[2]

Idle gear

[5]

Eccentric cam

[3]

Idle gear arm

2 -25


steps. This rotates the eccentric cam [5] to allow the idle gear arm [3] to separate the idle gear [2] from the 3rd




And in parallel with this, when the 3rd folding release motor (M16) starts up, the winding-up of the wire that pulls the folding guide [2] to the left side is loosened to allow the folding guide [2] to push out the paper in the clearance between the 3rd folding rollers /1 [1] and /2 [3]. As a result, the paper gets caught in the rollers to be


folded.

[1]

[2]

[3] [4]

fd501to2023

[1]

3rd folding roller /1

[3]

3rd folding roller /2

[2]

Folding guide

[4]

Direction of paper exit

2 -26



MAIN TRAY SECTION

4. MAIN TRAY SECTION Composition


4.1

[1]

[2] [3]

[4]

[5] fd501to2035c

Symbol

Item


[1]

Main tray up/down

Wire drive

[2]

Main tray paper full detection

Photo sensor

[3]

Main tray upper limit detection

Photo sensor

[4]

Tray up/down detection while stacking folded paper

Photo sensor

[5]

Main tray lower limit detection

Photo sensor

2 -27


MAIN TRAY SECTION

Drive


4.2


[1]

[2]

[3]

fd501to2036c

[1]

Main tray

[2]

Up/down wire

2 -28

[3]

Tray up/down motor (M11)



4.3

Operation

4.3.1

Main tray up/down control

MAIN TRAY SECTION

The up/down operation of the main tray is controlled by rotating the tray up/down motor (M11) in the normal or reverse direction. A. Main tray paper detection A specified period of time after the main tray paper exit sensor (PS18) turns ON, M11 starts up to bring down ON. After the paper is exited, PS20 maintains the distance between the upper surface of the paper exited in the main tray (the surface of the main tray when no paper exited) and the paper exit opening at a fixed distance to prevent the paper exited from having an uneven edge. B. Switching the operation of the main tray The main tray is set so that it normally does not operate. When letting the main tray operate, insert the short connector [2] into the CN90 [1].

Caution: • Letting the main tray operate with the next option connected may cause damages to the machine. Be absolutely sure not to connect the short connector.

[2] [1]

fd501to2037c

2 -29


the main tray until the main tray upper limit sensor (PS20) turns OFF, and then bring it up again until PS20 turns


SUB TRAY SECTION


5. SUB TRAY SECTION Composition


5.1

[1]

fd501to2024c

Symbol [1]

2 -30

Item Paper full detection method

Specification/mechanism Photosensor + actuator



Drive


5.2

SUB TRAY SECTION

[1] [3]

M3

[2] fd501to2025c

[1]

Paper exit solenoid (SD12)

[2]


[3]


2 -31


SUB TRAY SECTION


5.3

Operation

5.3.1

Sub tray full detection control

When the paper that has been exited in the sub tray gets to a specified thickness, the sub tray paper full sensor (PS17) [2] turns OFF, and the "sub tray paper full" information is sent to the main body. Upon receipt of this information, the main body displays the message on the operation LCD. When the folded paper on the sub tray is unfolded and the sub tray paper full sensor (PS46) [1] turns ON, the


"sub tray paper full" information is also sent to the main body.

[1]

[2] fd501to2026c

[1]

Sub tray folding paper full sensor (PS46)

5.3.2

[2]

Sub tray paper full sensor (PS17)

Line speed switching

Paper conveyed by the intermediate conveyance motor (M3) is decelerated for each sheet of paper to be exited into the sub tray.

FD entrance sensor (PS1) Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS10) Intermediate conveyance motor (M3)

[2] Deceleration

[1] [1]

Deceleration of the intermediate conveyance

fd501to2042c

[2]

High speed rotation

motor (M3) *

2 -32

The time period up to the deceleration can be changed by the system speed on the main body side.



PI SECTION

6. PI SECTION Composition

[1]


6.1

[2] [3] [4] [5]

[8]

[6]

[7] fd501to2027c

Symbol

Item


[1]


Dead weight pressure roller + solenoid + one-way clutch

[2]

Manual operation

Button + LED light-up indication (available for the tray /Up only)

[3]

Paper separation method


[4]

Paper set detection method

Photo sensor

[5]

Paper size/main scan direction

Paper regulation plate interlocked volume resistance

detection method [6]

Paper size/sub scan direction

Reflective photo sensor (3 pc.)

detection method [7]

Paper lift method

Gear driven rotational up/down

[8]

Multi feed detection method

Ultrasonic sensor

2 -33


PI SECTION


6.2

Drive

6.2.1

Tray lift drive


[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

fd501to2028c

[1]

Paper lift motor /Up (M8)

[3]

PI lift plate /Lw

[2]

Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)

[4]

PI lift plate /Up

2 -34



PI SECTION

Paper feed drive

[10]

[11] [1]


[9]

[8]

[7]

[6] [5]

[4] [3] fd501to2029c

[1]

Separation roller /Up

[7]

Pick-up roller /Lw

[2]

PI registration clutch /Up (CL1)

[8]

PI conveyance motor (M7)

[3]

PI registration clutch /Lw (CL2)

[9]

Rotational direction of separation roller /Up

[4]

Separation roller /Lw

[10]

Pick-up roller /Up

[5]

Rotational direction of separation roller /Lw

[11]

Paper feed roller /Up

[6]

Paper feed roller /Lw

2 -35


PI SECTION 6.2.3

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Pick-up drive

[5]

[1]


[2]

[3] [4] [1]

Spring

[2]

Direction of spring force

[3]

Release arm

2 -36

[4]

PI pick-up solenoids /Up (SD13) and /Lw (SD14)

[5]

fd501to2030c

Pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw



6.3

Operation

6.3.1


PI SECTION

For the size detection of a paper, there are the following two directions for each of the tray /Up and the tray /Lw: that is, the main scan direction and the sub scan direction. The size detection in the sub scan, when the PI paper set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45) [6] turn ON, is made by the following 3 sensors: PI maximum size sensors /Up (PS47) and /Lw (PS48) [1], L size sensors /Up (PS35) and /Lw (PS41) [2] and S size sensors /Up (PS36) and /Lw (PS42) [3]. The size detection in the main scan is made by the paper size VR /Up (VR31) and /Lw (VR32) [4] that are interlocked with the paper regulation plate [5].

[1] [2]

[3] [6] [4]

[5] [1]

fd501to2031c

PI maximum size sensors /Up (PS47) and /

[4]

Paper size VR /Up (VR31) and /Lw (VR32)

Lw (PS48)

[5]

Paper regulation plate

[2]

L size sensors /Up (PS35) and /Lw (PS41)

[6]

PI paper set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw

[3]

S size sensors /Up (PS36) and /Lw (PS42)

(PS45)

2 -37


When the PS44 and PS45 are OFF, the tray is judged "paper empty."


PI SECTION 6.3.2

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Up/down control

For the up/down of the tray, when the paper lift motors /Up (M8) [1] and /Lw (M9) [7] rotate in the normal and reverse directions, the lift arms /Up [11] and /Lw [9] start up to bring up and down the PI lift plates /Up [12] and /Lw [10]. The lower limit position is detected by the PI lift plate home sensors /Up (PS34) [2] and /Lw (PS40) [8]. The upper limit position is detected by the PI upper limit sensors /Up (PS32) [4] and /Lw (PS38) [6] at the position to which the actuators /Up [3] and /Lw [5] are pushed up by the PI lift plate. When the PI paper set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45) are ON with the main body start button ON, M8 and M9 turn ON to bring up the PI lift plate. When PS32 and PS38 turn ON, M8 and M9 stop. II Composition/Operation

While in the copy/print operation, when PS32 and PS38 turn OFF from ON, M8 and M9 turn ON again to bring up the plate until PS32 and PS38 turn ON. When PS44 and PS45 turn OFF with no paper left, M8 and M9 make a reverse rotation to move down the PI lift plate until PS34 and PS40 turn ON.

[12]

[1]

[2] [3]

[4]

[11]

[5]

[10] [6] [9]

[8]

[7]

fd501to2032c

[1]

Paper lift motor /Up (M8)

[7]

Paper lift motor /Lw (M9)

[2]

PI lift plate home sensor /Up (PS34)

[8]

PI lift plate home sensor /Lw (PS40)

[3]

Actuator /Up

[9]

Lift arm /Lw

[4]

PI upper limit sensor /Up (PS32)

[10]

PI lift plate /Lw

[5]

Actuator /Lw

[11]

Lift arm /Up

[6]

PI upper limit sensor /Lw (PS38)

[12]

PI lift plate /Up

2 -38



PI SECTION

Pick-up mechanism

The picking-up of the paper [6] is made when the PI pick-up solenoids /Up (SD13) and /Lw (SD14) [5] turn ON. The release arm that is pressed down by the spring [1] in the direction of [2] presses down the paper feed arm [4] to place the pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw [7] in the release condition. When SD13 and SD14 [5] turn ON, the release arm is released upward and the pick-up rollers /Up and /Lw [7] go down by their own weight. The pickup roller that is rotated by the PI conveyance motor (M7) presses down the paper to pick it up.

[7]


[6]

[2] [3] [4] [5] [1] [2]

Spring

[5]

fd501to2033c

PI pick-up solenoids /Up (SD13) and /Lw (SD14)

Direction of the spring force

[3]

Release arm

[6]

Paper

[4]

Paper feed arm

[7]


2 -39


PI SECTION 6.3.4

bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Separation mechanism

The separation roller [4] is driven in the direction opposite to the paper conveyance [2]. However, when no paper is conveyed or only one sheet of paper is conveyed, the frictional force generating between the paper feed roller [1] and the separation roller [4] or the paper and the separation roller is greater than the frictional force of the torque limiter [3]. Accordingly, the separation roller [4] rotates in the direction of the paper conveyance [2] to convey paper to the vertical conveyance section. When 2 or more sheets of paper are conveyed, the frictional force between these sheets of paper is smaller than the frictional force of the torque limiter [3] and the separation roller [4] rotates in the reverse direction to prevent II Composition/Operation

the lower most paper from being conveyed. When the PI registration clutches /Up (CL1) and /Lw (CL2) turn ON according to the PI paper feed demand signal, the paper feed roller [1], the separation roller [4], and the pick-up roller [7] rotate to convey the paper one at a time.

[7]

[1]

[6]

[2]

[5]

[4]

[3] fd501to2034c

[1]

Paper feed rollers /Up and /Lw

[2]

Conveyance direction of a sheet of paper

[6]

1st sheet of paper

[3]

Torque limiter

[7]


[4]

Separation rollers /Up and /Lw

2 -40

[5]

2nd sheet of paper



PI SECTION


To detect a multi feed while in the PI paper feed, the PI conveyance path is provided with the multi feed sensor. The multi feed sensor is a ultrasonic sensor made up of a pair of a sender and a receiver. This sensor receives ultrasonic waves sent from the multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB1) [1] by the multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB2) [2]. Based on the difference in the amount of ultrasonic waves received when a single sheet of paper [1] and the plural sheets of paper [4] pass through between the sender and the receiver, a check is made to see if paper has been multi fed or not. feed detection function selection button on the FD operation board (FDOB) and when no selection is made. And it turns OFF (does not operate) when the LED on the upper side is turned on.

[3]

[2]

[1]

[4]

[5]

[1]

Multi feed detection board /1 (MFDB1)

[3] One sheet of paper

[2]

Multi feed detection board /2 (MFDB2)

[4] More than one sheet of paper

fd501to2038c

[5] Layer of air

6.3.6


The detection of the presence of paper in the tray section while in the print stop is made by the PI empty sensors /Up (PS33) and /Lw (PS39). And also, the paper empty detection while in the print is made by the PI set sensors /Up (PS44) and /Lw (PS45) to stop the paper feed from the trays /1 to /5 when PS44 and PS45 detect the trailing edge of the last paper.

2 -41


The multi feed detection function turns ON (operates) when the LED on the lower side is turned on by the multi




PI SECTION

Blank page

2 -42

ls502ma.book Page 1 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:36 PM

SERVICE MANUAL

Theory of Operation

LS-501/LS-502

2004.10 Ver. 1.0


ls502ma.book Page i Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:36 PM


CONTENTS


OUTLINE


Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3

Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.4

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.5

Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.6



II


1. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 1.3.1

Door open/close mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

1.3.2

Jam release lever lock mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2.3.1

Path switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.3.2

Conveyance line speed control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.3.3

Paper cooling mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

3. CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 3.1 3.2

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 3.2.1

3.3

Stacker tray/sub tray conveyance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

3.2.2

Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

3.2.3

Stacker tray up down drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

3.2.4

Shift unit/alignment plate drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

3.2.5

Rear stopper/job partition plate drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

3.2.6

Front stopper/paper press arm drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 3.3.1

Stacker tray conveyance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

3.3.2

Coupling conveyance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

3.3.3

Sub tray conveyance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

i


I

I Outline

CONTENTS

ls502ma.book Page ii Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:36 PM



I Outline

CONTENTS

Blank page

ii




I Outline


Type

Name:

Large capacity stacker

Type:

Grip conveyance type horizontal stacker

Conveyance method: Entrance conveyance

Roller conveyance method

Stacker tray conveyance

Grip conveyance method

Sub tray conveyance

Roller conveyance method

Coupling conveyance

Roller conveyance (LS-501 only)

Alignment method:

Movable alignment lever (stacker tray only)

Method of stacking:

Horizontal stacking

Mixing of original sizes not allowed (stacker tray only)

Shifting method:

Conveyance direction shift

Shift amount: 20 mm (stacker tray only)

Paper exit:

Exited by the hand cart (stacker tray only)

1.2

Functions

Mode Stacker tray non-sort mode:

Exited into the stacker tray with no processing made.

Sub tray mode:

Exited into the sub tray with no processing made.

Stacker tray sort mode:

Exited into the stacker tray after being shifted.

Coupling mode:

Exited into the post-processing unit with no processing made (LS501 only).

Maximum number of sheets loadable

1.3

Stacker tray:

5,000 sheets (standard paper)

Sub tray:

200 sheets (standard paper)

Type of paper

Paper size Stacker tray:

When 5,000 sheets loaded

A3, B4, A4, A4R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)

When 2,000 sheets loaded Sub tray:

B5, A5

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, index paper, wide size paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)

Paper weight Stacker tray:

50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2

Sub tray:

50 g/m2 to 300 g/m2

1 -1



I Outline

1.4


Maintenance

Maintenance:




1.5

Machine data

Power source: 24V DC (built-in power source)

LS-502

24V DC (supplied from the main body)

Maximum power consumption:

143W or less

Dimensions:

785 mm (W) x 723 mm (D) x 1,020 mm (H)

Weight:

Approx. 110 kg

1.6

1 -2

LS-501


Temperature:

10°C to 30°C

Humidity:

10% RH to 80% RH



UNIT COMPOSITION


[10]

[1]

I Outline

[8]

[7] [2] [3]

[4] [6]

[5] [1]

Shift unit

[6]

[2]

1st gate

[7]

Coupling conveyance section

[3]

Entrance conveyance section

[8]

Sub tray

[4]

Stacker tray

[9]

Sub tray conveyance section

[5]

Hand cart

[10]

2nd gate

ls502to1001c

Stacker tray conveyance section

1 -3


PAPER PATH


I Outline

3. PAPER PATH [3]

[2]

[1]

ls502to1002c

1 -4

[1]

Stacker tray non-sort/sort mode

[2]

Coupling mode

[3]

Sub tray mode



COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION

II COMPOSITION/OPERATION 1. COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION Composition [3]

[1]


1.1

[2]

ls502to2001c

Symbol

Item


[1]

Entrance guide plate lock method

Solenoid

[2]

Front door lock method

Solenoid

[3]

Coupling guide plate lock method

Solenoid

1.2

Drive [4]

[3]

[1]

[2]

ls502to2002c

[1]

Entrance conveyance lock solenoid (SD5)

[3]

Coupling jam release lever

[2]

Entrance jam release lever

[4]

Coupling conveyance lock solenoid (SD11)

2 -1


COUPLING CONVEYANCE SECTION

1.3

Operation

1.3.1

Door open/close mechanism


While the LS is in operation, the front door is locked by the front door lock solenoid (SD4), thus making it impossible to open and close it. However, while in the coupling conveyance (coupling mode) or while exiting paper into the sub tray (sub tray mode), the front door can be opened and closed. Pressing the paper removing switch on the stacker tray operation board (TOB) brings down the stacker tray. And when the stacker tray arm release sensor (PS15) is turn on, SD4 turns off immediately. II Composition/Operation

The lock is released due to SD4 being turned off and the front door can be opened and closed. 1.3.2

Jam release lever lock mechanism

The entrance guide plate and the coupling guide plate are provided with a jam release lever to release jams. The operation of each of the jam release levers is made by the entrance conveyance lock solenoid (SD5) and the coupling conveyance lock solenoid (SD11). ON/OFF timing of SD5 and SD11 Operation timing ON

When the stacker tray goes up, and while in printing

(Lock) OFF

While in standing by, when the stacker tray goes down after completion of printing,

(Release) and when the front door is open (except in coupling mode and in sub tray mode)

2 -2



ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION

2. ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION 2.1

Composition [3]

[4]

[5]


[4]

[2]

[1] Symbol

ls502to2003c

Item


[1]

Paper curl correction method

Cooling by fan and duct

[2]

1st conveyance path switching method

Solenoid + gate

[3]

2nd conveyance path switching method

Solenoid + gate

[4]

Internal cooling method

Fan

[5]

Motor cooling method

Fan

2 -3



2.2


Drive [1]

[2]

[3]


M2

[4]

[8]

2 -4

[7]

[6]

[5]

[1]

2nd gate solenoid (SD10)

[5]

Entrance roller

[2]

Coupling conveyance roller /2

[6]

1st gate

[3]


[7]


[4]

1st gate solenoid (SD1)

[8]

2nd gate

ls502to2004c



2.3

Operation

2.3.1

Path switching


The path along which paper conveyed to the entrance guide plate is conveyed varies according to the operation mode. The switching of the conveyance path is made by the 1st gate and the 2nd gate. A. 1st gate The switching of the conveyance path is made between the stacker tray paper exit (stacker tray non-sort mode II Composition/Operation

and stacker tray sort mode) and the sub tray paper exit (sub tray mode) and the coupling conveyance (coupling mode).

[1]

[3] [1] [2]

Sub tray mode/coupling mode 1st gate

[2] [3]

ls502to2005c

Stacker tray non-sort mode/stacker tray sort mode

2 -5




B. 2nd gate The conveyance path is switched between the sub tray paper exit (sub tray mode) and the coupling conveyance (coupling mode).

[3]


[2]

[1]

2 -6

[1]

Coupling mode

[2]

Sub tray mode

ls502to2006c

[3]

2nd gate




Conveyance line speed control

The conveyance process speed of the entrance roller and the coupling conveyance rollers 1/ and 2/ that are driven by the conveyance motor (M2) varies according to the conveyance process speed of the main body. These operations are common to all the modes. A. When the main body process speed is 1000 mm/s:

[2]

[3]

[4]

Entrance sensor (PS4) Conveyance motor (M2)

1000 mm/s 490 mm/s ls502to2007c

[1]

Main body paper exit sensor (PS3) ON

[3]

2nd sheet of paper

[2]

1st sheet of paper

[4]

3rd sheet of paper

B. When the main body process speed is 490 mm/s:

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

Entrance sensor (PS4) Conveyance motor (M2)

1000 mm/s 490 mm/s ls502to2008c

[1]


[3]

2nd sheet of paper

[2]

1st sheet of paper

[4]

3rd sheet of paper

2 -7


[1]


ENTRANCE CONVEYANCE SECTION 2.3.3


Paper cooling mechanism

Paper conveyed to the LS is likely to curl up due to fusing heat. Heat storage accumulated in paper stacked during continuous printing may cause tacking (sheets of paper sticking hard each other by toner) when toner that has been fused is re-fused and adheres. So, fresh air is blown on the paper from under the entrance guide plate and above the path guide of the upper surface of the paper stack section, thus cooling down the paper to correct curling and prevent tacking.

[5]


[4]

[3]

2 -8

[2]

[1]

ls502to2028c

[1]

Paper cooling fan motor /Rr (FM5)

[3]

Paper cooling fan motor /Fr (FM1)

[2]

Paper cooling fan motor /Mi (FM3)

[4]

Paper cooling fan motor /1 (FM2)

[5]

Paper cooling fan motor /2 (FM6)



CONVEYANCE SECTION

3. CONVEYANCE SECTION Composition [15]

[16]

[6]

[7]

[1]

[2]

[14] [11]

[5]

[12]

[4]

[3]

[13]

[8]

[9]

[10]

ls502to2009c

2 -9


3.1


CONVEYANCE SECTION

Symbol


Item


[1]

Paper curl correction method

Decurler roller

[2]

Paper return prevention method

Movable paddler

[3]

Paper rear press auxiliary method

Solenoid + job partition plate

[4]

Paper rear alignment in shifting

Solenoid + rear stopper

method II Composition/Operation

[5]

Stacker tray paper empty detection

Photosensor + actuator

method [6]

Paper trailing edge press method

Solenoid + paper press arm

[7]

Stacker tray conveyance method

Motor + Grip belt

[8]

Paper center press method


[9]

Paper alignment method

Motor + guide plate

[10]

Stacker tray conveyance method

Hand cart

Coupling conveyance passage detec-

Photosensor + actuator

[11]

tion method [12]

Sub tray open/close detection method

Photosensor

[13]

Paper front stopper in shifting method

Stationary type stopper

[14]

Paper leading edge press method


Stacker tray upper limit detection

Photosensor + press arm

[15]

method [16]

2 -10

Paper front stopper method

Solenoid + stopper



3.2

Drive

3.2.1

Stacker tray/sub tray conveyance drive

CONVEYANCE SECTION

[6]

[2]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[1]

Sub tray paper exit motor (M3)

[4]

Paddler

[2]


[5]

Sub tray conveyance roller

[3]

Decurler roller

[6]


ls502to2010c

2 -11


[1]




Coupling conveyance/grip belt/paper press arm drive

[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[13] [14]


[15]

[7]

[6] [5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

ls502to2011c

is LS-501 only. [1]

Paper press arm /1

[8]

Coupling conveyance roller /6: LS-501 only

[2]

Stacker tray paper empty detection actuator

[9]


[3]

Grip belt

[10]

Paper press solenoid /2 (SD7)

[4]

Grip conveyance motor (M4)

[11]


[5]

Coupling conveyance motor (M6): LS-501 only

[12]

Paper press arm /2

[6]

Coupling paper exit roller: LS-501 only

[13]


[7]


[14]

Coupling conveyance motor (M6): LS-502 only

[15]


2 -12



CONVEYANCE SECTION

Stacker tray up down drive

[6]

[7]


[1]

[2]

[5]

[3]

[4]

ls502to2012c

[1]

Wire

[5]

Stacker tray up down motor (M1)

[2]

Spring

[6]

Stacker tray

[3]

Wire

[7]

Stacker tray up down arm

[4]

Belt

2 -13




Shift unit/alignment plate drive

LS drawing as seen from above. On the right side is the main body.

[6]


[5]

[1]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Guide rail

[4]

Shift unit

[2]

Alignment plate

[5]

Shift unit motor (M5)

[3]

Alignment motor (M7)

[6]

Guide rail

2 -14

ls502to2013c



CONVEYANCE SECTION

Rear stopper/job partition plate drive


[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Rear stopper

[3]

Rear stopper solenoid (SD3)

[2]

Job partition plate

[4]

Job partition solenoid (SD2)

ls502to2014c

2 -15




Front stopper/paper press arm drive


[2]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[5]

[6]

[4]

[4]

ls502to2015c

[1]

Spring

[4]

Spring

[2]


[5]

Front stopper

[3]

Paper press arm /3

[6]

Front stopper solenoid (SD9)

2 -16



3.3

Operation

3.3.1

Stacker tray conveyance

CONVEYANCE SECTION

While in the stacker tray non-sort mode and the stacker tray sort mode, paper is conveyed into the stacker tray. A. Decurler Paper that has passed through the 1st gate is conveyed to the grip belt by the decurler roller. At this time, the

B. Grip conveyance Paper conveyed by the decurler roller enters and is help by the grip provided on the grip belt. The paper held by the grip is conveyed to the section above the stacker tray by the rotation of the grip belt. Two grips are provided on the grip belt and each one of them conveys paper one after the other. The position where the grip is waiting for paper from the decurler roller is controlled by the grip conveyance home sensor (PS5).

[5]

[6]

[7]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

ls502to2016c

[1]

Paper

[5]

Grip

[2]

Decurler roller

[6]

Grip belt

[3]

Grip

[7]

Grip conveyance home sensor (PS5)

[4]

Stacker tray

2 -17


correction of curled paper is made by the decurler roller.


CONVEYANCE SECTION


C. Front stopper control Paper conveyed by the grip strikes against the front stopper equipped to the shift unit and is released from the grip. At this time, the shift unit has been moved to the position specified in advance for each paper size. Two types of the front stoppers, more specifically, a movable type and a stationary type, are employed. In stacker tray non-sort mode, only the movable type front stopper is employed. A distance of 20 mm is kept between the position where the movable type front stopper stops and the position in which the stationary type front stopper is, which is the shift distance. For the front stopper solenoid (SD9) that drives the movable type front stopper, a latch-type solenoid is II Composition/Operation

employed that is not required to be energized to maintain the ON state. However, a latch-type solenoid requires a different control signal for each ON and OFF action.

[8]

[7]

[6]

[5]

[9]

[4]

[10]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Entrance sensor (PS4)

[6]

Grip

[2]

Paper

[7]

Stacker tray

[3]

Movable type front stopper

[8]

Grip belt

[4]

20 mm

[9]

Shift unit

[5]

Stationary type front stopper

[10]

Grip

2 -18

[1]

ls502to2017c



CONVEYANCE SECTION

(1) Stacker tray non-sort mode

[1]

[3]

[5]

[6]

[7]


Front stopper Latch ON signal solenoid (SD9) Latch OFF signal

[8] [2]

[4]

ls502to2018c

[1]


[5]

2nd sheet of paper

[2]

The shift unit starts to move

[6]

3rd sheet of paper

[3]

1st sheet of paper

[7]

Last sheet of paper

[4]

Movable type front stopper ON

[8]

Movable type front stopper OFF

(2) Stacker tray sort mode

[1]

[3]

[5]

[6]

[8]

[7]

[9]

Entrance sensor (PS4) Shift unit motor (M5) Front stopper Latch ON signal solenoid (SD9) Latch OFF signal

[10] [2]

[4]

ls502to2019c

[1]


[6]

Shift of the 1st sheet of paper

[2]

The shift unit starts to move

[7]

Movable type front stopper OFF

[3]

1st sheet of paper

[8]

Shift of the last sheet of paper

[4]

Movable type front stopper ON

[9]

Movable type front stopper OFF secured

[5]

Last sheet of paper

[10]

Movable type front stopper OFF secured

2 -19


Shift unit motor (M5)


CONVEYANCE SECTION


D. Job partition plate In stacker tray sort mode, the trailing edge of the shift paper is restricted by the job partition plate and the paper is exited onto the stacker tray 20 mm shifted from the non-shift paper. At this time, the upper surface of the nonshift paper does not come to the same level as the lower edge of the job partition plate and the 1st sheet of the shift paper is in possibility of getting into the lower side of the job partition plate. To prevent this, the job partition plate is attached to the upper surface of the non-shift paper that has been exited to restrict the entry of the paper. For the job partition solenoid (SD2) that drives the job partition plate, a latch-type solenoid is employed that is II Composition/Operation

not required to be energized to maintain the ON state. However, a latch-type solenoid requires a different control signal for each ON and OFF action.

[5]

[4]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[1]


[4]

Stacker tray

[2]

Job partition plate

[5]

Shift paper

[3]

Non-shift paper

2 -20

ls502to2023c



CONVEYANCE SECTION

(1) Stacker tray non-sort mode Ex.: Letter 4 sheets

[1]

[2]

[4]

[6]

[3]

[5]

[7]

[8]

Latch ON signal Job partition solenoid (SD2) Latch OFF signal

[9] ls502to2021c

[1]


[6]

3rd sheet of paper

[2]

1st sheet of paper

[7]

Job partition plate close

[3]


[8]

Last sheet of paper

[4]

2nd sheet of paper

[9]


[5]


(2) Stacker tray sort mode Ex.: Letter 2 sheets

[1]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[7]

[6]

[8]

Entrance sensor (PS4) Latch ON signal Job partition solenoid (SD2) Latch OFF signal

[3] [1]


[5]

1st sheet of non-shift paper

[2]

1st sheet of shift paper

[6]


[3]

Job partition plate open (shift amount: 20 mm)

[7]

2nd sheet of non-shift paper

[4]

2nd sheet of shift paper

[8]


ls502to2022c

2 -21




CONVEYANCE SECTION


E. Rear stopper control While in the stacker tray sort mode is in shifting, the rear stopper is left open and this plays as a guide for the trailing edge of paper. To assist the separation of paper released from the grip, the paddle is rotated at a high speed. For the rear stopper solenoid (SD3) that drives the rear stopper, a latch-type solenoid is employed that is not required to be energized to maintain the ON state. However, a latch-type solenoid requires a different control signal for each ON and OFF action.


[5]

[4] [1]

[1]

[3]

[2]

ls502to2020c

Paddler

[4]

Paper position while in the stacker tray sort mode

[2]


[5]

Paper position while in the stacker tray non-sort mode

[3]

Rear stopper

2 -22



CONVEYANCE SECTION

(1) Stacker tray non-sort mode Ex.: Letter 4 sheets

[1]

[2]

[5]

[8]

[3]

[4] [6]

[7] [9]

[11]

Latch ON signal Rear stopper solenoid (SD3) Latch OFF signal

[13]

[1]


[8]

3rd sheet of paper

[2]

1st sheet of paper

[9]

Rear stopper open

[3]

Rear stopper open

[10]

Rear stopper close

[4]

Rear stopper close

[11]

4th sheet of paper

[5]

2nd sheet of paper

[12]

Rear stopper open

[6]

Rear stopper open

[13]

Rear stopper close

[7]

Rear stopper close

[10] [12]

ls502to2029c

(2) Stacker tray sort mode Ex.: Letter 2 sheets

[1]

[2]

[4]

[6]

[9]

[5] [7]

[8] [10]

Entrance sensor (PS4) Latch ON signal Rear stopper solenoid (SD3) Latch OFF signal

[11] [3]

ls502to2024c

[1]


[7]

Rear stopper open

[2]

Shift of the 1st sheet of paper

[8]

Rear stopper close

[3]

Rear stopper open

[9]

Non-shift of the 2nd sheet of paper

[4]

Shift of the 2nd sheet of paper

[10]

Rear stopper open

[5]

Rear stopper close

[11]

Rear stopper close

[6]

Non-shift of the 1st sheet of paper

2 -23




CONVEYANCE SECTION F.


Paper press arm

The paper that has been released from the grip is pressed one at a time onto the stacker tray by the paper pressure arms /1, /2 and /3 to be loaded on the stacker tray. However, the operation of the paper pressure arm /2 is limited only to the paper size larger than B4.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]


Entrance sensor (PS4) Paper press solenoid /1 (SD6) Paper press solenoid /2 (SD7) Paper press solenoid /3 (SD8) ls502to2025c

[1]


[3]

2nd sheet of paper

[2]

1st sheet of paper

[4]

Last sheet of paper

G. Alignment plate control Paper loaded on the stacker tray is aligned by the alignment plate for each sheet of paper.

[1]

[3]

[5]

[7]

[9]

Entrance sensor (PS4) Alignment motor (M7) [12]

[10] [11] [2]

[4]

[6]

[8]

ls502to2026c

[1]


[7]

3rd sheet of paper

[2]

Movement to a position specified for each

[8]

Alignment of the 3rd sheet of paper

paper size

[9]

Last sheet of paper

[3]

1st sheet of paper

[10]

Alignment of the last sheet of paper

[4]

Alignment of the 1st sheet of paper

[11]

Return to the home position

[5]

2nd sheet of paper

[12]

Alignment plate home sensor (PS12)

[6]

Alignment of the 2nd sheet of paper

2 -24



CONVEYANCE SECTION

H. Stacker tray up down control The detection of the upper surface of paper loaded on the stacker tray is made by the paper empty sensor (PS6) through the paper press arm /3. When PS6 is turned off by loading paper that has been exited, the stacker tray up down motor (M1) turns on to lower the stacker tray down to the position at which PS6 turns on. The stacker tray is thus held at a fixed height when paper is being exited. The number of sheets of paper loaded on the stacker tray is detected by the 2000 sheets stacked sensor (PS13) and the 5,000 sheets stacked sensor (PS14) provided on the up down path of the stacker tray and dis-

I.

Hand cart detection mechanism

The set condition of the hand cart is detected by the hand cart set switch (RS1). And the set condition of the stacker tray is detected by checking to see if the light from the stacker tray set LED (LED1) gets to the stacker tray set sensor (PS1). 3.3.2

Coupling conveyance

In coupling mode, paper is conveyed to the device connected to the subsequent stage of the LS through the coupling conveyance section. A. Line speed switching When paper is conveyed from the main body, the conveyance motor (M2) at the entrance conveyance section is rotated at the same speed as the conveyance speed of the main body. When paper is conveyed to the LS, the speed of rotation of M2 is increased up to 1,000 mm/s to convey paper. 3.3.3

Sub tray conveyance

In sub tray mode, paper is exited into the sub tray. A. Line speed switching

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

Entrance sensor (PS4) Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS10) 1000 mm/s Sub tray paper exit motor (M3)

490 mm/s 350 mm/s ls502to2027c

[1]


[3]

2nd sheet of paper

[2]

1st sheet of paper

[4]

Last sheet of paper

B. Paper full control When the number of the sheets of paper discharged on the sub-tray gets to 200, the sub tray full sensor (PS9) turns on to give indication of "paper full" on the operation panel.

2 -25


played on the operation panel.




CONVEYANCE SECTION

Blank page

2 -26

fs503ma.book Page 1 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:37 PM

SERVICE MANUAL

Theory of Operation

FS-503

2004.10 Ver. 1.0


fs503ma.book Page i Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:37 PM


CONTENTS


OUTLINE


Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3

Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.3.1

Staple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.4

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.5

Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.6


2. UNIT COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

II


1. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

1.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 1.3.1

Conveyance path switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2. SUB TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

3. STACKER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 3.1 3.2

3.3

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 3.2.1

Stacker entrance roller/paddle drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

3.2.2

Stack assist plate/rear stopper drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

3.2.3

Intermediate roller/paper exit arm drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

3.2.4

Alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 3.3.1

Stacker conveyance speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

3.3.2

Intermediate roller control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

3.3.3

Stack assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

3.3.4

Rear stopper control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

3.3.5


3.3.6

Stacker paper exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

4. STAPLER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 4.1 4.2

4.3

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 4.2.1

Stapler movement/rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

4.2.2

Stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 4.3.1

Stapler movement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

4.3.2

Staple control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

i


I

I Outline

CONTENTS

fs503ma.book Page ii Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:37 PM

CONTENTS


I Outline

5. MAIN TRAY SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 5.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

5.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29


5.3

ii

5.2.1

Tray up/down drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

5.2.2

Main tray paper exit drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

5.2.3

Paper exit opening drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 5.3.1

Paper exit opening control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

5.3.2

Main tray up/down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34




I Outline


Type

Name:

Flat-stapling finisher

Type:

Staple-cut type multi staple device

Stapling method: Incline clinch (staple cut) method Shifting method: Alignment plate shifting method

1.2

Functions

A. Functions Straight mode:

Exited into the main tray with no processing made.

Shift mode:

Exited into the main tray after being shifted.

Sub tray mode:

Exited into the sub tray with no processing made.

Staple mode:

Exited into the main tray after being flat-stapled.

Subset staple mode:

Bundles of flat-stapled sheets of paper and single sheets of paper being exited at random into the main tray.

B. Staple Maximum number of sheets to be flat-stapled (Plain paper):

100 sheets: 50 to 91 g/m2 (50 sheets for paper the length of which is 400 mm or longer) 50 sheets: 92 to 130 g/m2 40 sheets: 131 to 161 g/m2 25 sheets: 162 to 244 g/m2

Stapling position:

1 staple at the rear (45°), 1 staple at the front, and 2 staples at the center

C. Maximum number of sheets loadable Main tray (Weighing 50 to 244 g/m2): Straight/Shift 3,000 sheets

: A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR

1,500 sheets

: A3, B4, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17,

500 sheets

: A5, A5R, B6R (straight only), 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R

8.5 x 14, 8K Staple: 150 copies (2 to 9 sheets stapled) 50 copies (10 to 20 sheets stapled) 30 copies (21 to 30 sheets stapled) 25 copies (31 to 40 sheets stapled) 20 copies (41 to 50 sheets stapled) 15 copies (51 to 60 sheets stapled) 10 copies (61 to 100 sheets stapled) Sub tray (Weighing 50 to 300 g/m2): 200 sheets

: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR, standard index paper, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)

1 -1


I Outline


1.3

Type of paper

1.3.1

Staple


A. Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, A5, 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm) B. Applicable paper Plain paper, high-quality paper, book paper C. Paper weight Main tray:

1.4

50 g/m2 to 244 g/m2

Maintenance

Maintenance:

Same as the main body


Same as the main body

1.5

Machine data

Power source:

24V/5V DC (supplied from the main body)

Maximum power consumption: 110 VA Dimensions:

When the main tray is pulled out: W 915 mm x D 656 mm x H 1020 mm When the main tray is set in:

W 798 mm x D 656 mm x H 1020 mm

When the main tray is removed: W 544 mm x D 656 mm x H 1020 mm Weight:

1.6

1 -2

80 kg


Temperature:

10°C to 30°C

Humidity:




UNIT COMPOSITION

2. UNIT COMPOSITION I Outline

[5]

[1]

A

[4]

[3]

B

C [2]

fs503to1001c

[1]

Paper conveyance section

A

Sub tray paper path

[2]

Stapler section

B

Main tray paper path (straight/sort/staple)

[3]

Stacker section

C

Main tray paper path (only while in stapling)

[4]

Main tray section

[5]

Sub tray section

1 -3



I Outline

UNIT COMPOSITION

Blank page

1 -4



PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION

II COMPOSITION/OPERATION 1. PAPER CONVEYANCE SECTION Composition


1.1

[1]

[2] Symbol

Item

fs503to2001c


[1]

Conveyance path switching method

Tray gate + solenoid

[2]

Paper multi conveyance method

Bypass gate + solenoid

2 -1



1.2


Drive


[1]

[2]

[3]

2 -2

[1]


[2]

Gate solenoid (SD2)

fs503to2002c

[3]

Bypass solenoid (SD5)



1.3

Operation

1.3.1



A. Tray gate control The tray gate switches the paper conveyance path between the main tray and the sub tray. The tray gate is normally set to the conveyance path to the main tray. When paper is exited to the sub tray, however, the gate is switched to the path to the sub tray through the drive of the solenoid (SD2).

The bypass gate is provided on the paper path to the stacker section. Even while in the staple operation, the bypass gate conveys the next page to reduce a loss of time for a high productivity. The drive of the bypass gate [1] is made by the bypass solenoid (SD5) [2]. The operation of SD5 is limited only to the small-sized paper (A4, B5 and 8.5 x 11) in the staple mode. For the 1st page on and after the 2nd copy, paper is sent to the regular route [3]. SD5 operates only on the 2nd page to send paper to the bypass route [4]. The 1st and 2nd pages are put upon one another to be conveyed to the stacker simultaneously. On and after the 3rd page, SD5 is released and paper is sent on the regular route a sheet of paper at a time.

[1]

[1]

[4]

[3]

[3]

[2]

[2]

fs503to2003c

[1]

Bypass gate

[3]

Regular route

[2]

Bypass solenoid (SD5)

[4]

Bypass route

(1) In the case of the 1st copy The bypass solenoid (SD5) does not operate when the paper of the 1st copy is passing through it.

2 -3


B. Bypass gate control




(2) In the case of the 2nd and subsequent copies A specified period of time after the FNS entrance sensor (PS4) detects the trailing edge of the 1st page of the 2nd copy, the bypass solenoid (SD5) turns ON to draw the 2nd page of the 2nd copy into the bypass route. A specified period of time after the PS4 detected the trailing edge of the 2nd page of the 2nd copy, the bypass solenoid turns OFF. SD5 does not turn on when the 3rd and subsequent pages are being conveyed.


[1]

[2]

[3]

FNS entrance sensor (PS4) Conveyance motor (M1) Bypass solenoid (SD5)

[4] [1]

1st copy

[3]

3rd copy

[2]

2nd copy

[4]

Drawing of the 2nd page of the 2nd copy into the bypass

2 -4

fs503to2030c



SUB TRAY SECTION

2. SUB TRAY SECTION 2.1

Composition


[1]

fs503to2004c

Symbol [1]

2.2

Item


Sub tray paper full detection

Photo sensor

Drive [1]

[2]

fs503to2005c

[1]

Sub tray paper exit motor (M6)

[2]


2 -5


SUB TRAY SECTION

2.3


Operation

A. Sub tray paper full detection control When paper that has been exited into the sub tray gets to the specified thickness, the sub tray paper full sensor (PS30) turns ON to send the "sub tray paper full" information to the main body. Then, the main body displays the massage on the operation panel.

[2]


[1]

fs503to2006c

[1]

Paper exited

[2]

Sub tray paper full sensor (PS30)

B. Line speed switching control Paper conveyed by the conveyance motor (M1) is decelerated for each sheet of paper to be exited into the sub tray, thus preventing paper from having an uneven edge.

FNS entrance sensor (PS4) Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1) Sub tray paper exit motor (M6)

[2] Deceleration

[1] [1] *

2 -6

Deceleration of the sub tray paper exit motor (M6)

fs503to2031c

[2]

High speed rotation

The time up to the deceleration is changed by the line speed on the main body side.



STACKER SECTION

3. STACKER SECTION 3.1

Composition [7]


[1]

[2] [6] [3]

[5]

[4]

fs503to2007c

Symbol [1] [2]

Item


Stack assist method

Paper pressure mechanism by means of the stack assist plate

Staple alignment method /1

Paddle rotation

(sub scan direction) [3]


Swing roller and the belt



Flat-stapling stopper


Staple paper exit method

Paper exit arm belt discharge mechanism

[6]

Staple alignment method /4 (sub

Guide roller and the belt

[7]

Alignment method

scan direction) Independent drive mechanism of the alignment plates

(main scan direction)

2 -7


STACKER SECTION


3.2

Drive

3.2.1

Stacker entrance roller/paddle drive


[1]

[6]

[5]

[2]

[4] [1]

2 -8

Stacker entrance belt

[3]

fs503to2008c

[4]

Stacker entrance motor (M13)

[2]

Swing roller

[5]

Paddle

[3]

Stacker entrance roller

[6]

Paddle motor (M2)



STACKER SECTION

Stack assist plate/rear stopper drive

[1]

[2]


[3] [6]

[4] [5]

fs503to2009c

[1]

Stack assist home sensor (PS32)

[4]

Rear stopper home sensor (PS35)

[2] [3]

Stack assist plate

[5]

Rear stopper motor (M26)

Rear stopper

[6]

Stack assist motor (M24)

2 -9


STACKER SECTION 3.2.3


Intermediate roller/paper exit arm drive

[9]

[1]


[8]

[10]

[1] [10]

[2] [3] [4]

[8]

[5]

[7]

[6]

fs503to2010c

[1]

Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)

[6]

Paper exit arm motor (M23)

[2]

Intermediate roller open close motor (M25)

[7]

Paper exit arm home sensor (PS9)

[3]

Eccentric cam

[8]

Intermediate roller /Lw

[4]

Intermediate roller home sensor (PS33)

[9]

Coupling

[5]

Paper exit arm

[10]

Intermediate roller /Up

2 -10


bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Alignment drive

[6]

[1]


3.2.4

STACKER SECTION

[2] [5]

[3]

[4]

fs503to2011c

[1]

Alignment plate /Rr

[4]

Alignment motor /Fr (M22)

[2]

Alignment motor /Rr (M5)

[5]

Alignment home sensor /Fr (PS31)

[3]

Alignment home sensor /Rr (PS8)

[6]

Alignment plate /Fr

2 -11


STACKER SECTION


3.3

Operation

3.3.1

Stacker conveyance speed control

Paper conveyed by the conveyance motor (M1) is sent to the stacker when the stacker entrance motor (M13) is decelerated a specified period of time after the stacker entrance sensor (PS5) turns ON and before it runs through the stacker entrance roller. 3.3.2

Intermediate roller control


The roller drive of the intermediate roller /Lw is transmitted from the main tray paper exit motor (M7) by the belt and the coupling, and the transmission of the conveyance power to paper is made by the pressure/release of the intermediate roller /Up. A. Non-staple mode control While in the non-staple mode, when the start button is turned ON, the intermediate roller /Up [1] is driven up to the nip standby position by the cam [2] of the intermediate roller open close motor (M25). The home position of the intermediate roller /Up open/close operation is detected by the intermediate roller home sensor (PS33) [3].

[1]

[2] [3]

fs503to2039c

[1]


[2]

Cam of the intermediate roller open close motor (M25)

2 -12

[3]




STACKER SECTION

While in the copy operation, the pressure/release of the intermediate roller /Up [1] onto the intermediate roller / Lw [2] is made by the intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7) [3]. When paper is being conveyed to the stacker, SD7 turns ON to release the nip, and paper that passes through the opening between the intermediate roller /Up [1] and the intermediate roller /Lw [2] is conveyed to the stacker. When paper is being exited, SD7 turns OFF and the intermediate roller /Up [1] is pressed against the intermediate roller /Lw [2] by the pressure of the spring. The paper is nipped before being exited.


[3] [2]

[4]

fs503to2012c

[1]


[3]

Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)

[2]

Intermediate roller /Lw

[4]

Paper

[2] FNS entrance sensor (PS4) Intermediate roller open close motor (M25) Alignment motors /Fr (M22), /Rr (M5) Intermediate roller release solenoid (SD7)

[1]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[5]

[5]

[5] fs503to2032c

[1]

Start button ON

[4]

Alignment operation

[2]

Movement of the intermediate roller /Up to

[5]

Paper nip by the intermediate rollers /Up

the nip standby position [3]

and /Lw

Nip release of the intermediate roller /Up

2 -13


STACKER SECTION


B. Staple mode control While in the staple mode operation, through the initial operation made when the start button is turned ON, the intermediate roller /Up [1] is moved to the evacuation position by the eccentric cam [2] that is driven by the intermediate roller open close motor (M25).


[1]

[2] [3]

fs503to2013c

[1]


[2]

Eccentric cam

2 -14

[3]




STACKER SECTION

Stack assist control

The stack assist plate is a paper pressure plate that is used to increase the speed to put paper in the stacker for an increased productivity. The stack assist plate [1] is driven by the stack assist motor (M24). When being conveyed to the stacker section, each sheet of paper is pressed at the position near the rear end of the paper [2] to be stacked at a speed faster than a free fall. The stack assist plate is driven by 65° from the home position in the staple mode and by 80° in the shift and

[2]


straight mode. The home position is detected by the stack assist home sensor (PS32) [3].

[3] [1]

fs503to2014c

[1]

Stack assist plate

[2]

Paper

[3]

Stack assist home sensor (PS32)

Stacker entrance sensor (PS5) Stacker assist motor (M24)

Forward Reverse

[1] [1]

Start button ON

[2]

Paper pressure by the stack assist plate

[2] [3] [3]

fs503to2033c

Movement of the stack assist plate to the evacuation position

2 -15


STACKER SECTION 3.3.4


Rear stopper control

The rear stopper is a paper rear stopper when paper is exited in the non-staple (straight/sort) mode. This shortens the conveyance distance to the main tray for an improved productivity. The rear stopper is driven and released by the rear stopper motor (M26) in the staple mode. The set state in the non-staple mode (the position at which paper is stopped by the rear stopper) is the home position of the rear stopper and this is detected by the rear stopper home sensor (PS35). 3.3.5

Alignment control


A. Horizontal alignment The horizontal alignment is made by the 2 alignment plates, that is, alignment plate /Fr and alignment plate /Rr. These 2 alignment plates are driven independently by each of the alignment motor /Fr (M22) and the alignment motor /Rr (M5). The home position of the alignment plate /Fr is detected by the alignment home sensor /Fr (PS31) and that of the alignment plate /Rr is detected by the alignment home sensor /Rr (PS8). (1) Straight mode In the straight mode, each sheet of paper sent to the stacker is aligned by the alignment plate /Fr and the alignment plate /Rr before being exited to the straight position.

2 -16



STACKER SECTION

(2) Shift mode In the shift mode, each time a sheet of paper is sent to the stacker, the alignment plate /Fr [1] and the alignment plate /Rr [2] shift to the rear to convey the paper [3] to the shift position before exiting it.

[3]


[2]

[1]

fs503to2015c

[1]

Alignment plate /Fr

[2]

Alignment plate /Rr

[3]

Paper

Stacker entrance sensor (PS5) Alignment motor /Fr (M22) Alignment motor /Rr (M5)

[1] [2] [3] [1]

Start button ON

[2] [3]

[4] [5]

[6]

fs503to2034c

[4]

Alignment operation for each sheet of paper


[5]

Move the paper to the shift position in the rear

Movement to the size position

[6]

Move the paper to the shift position in the front

2 -17


STACKER SECTION


(3) Staple mode In the staple mode, the alignment operation is made by the alignment plates /Fr and /Rr for each sheet of paper that has been sent to the stacker. After the last sheet of paper of the copy is conveyed to the stacker section, the alignment operation for the staple is made for stapling. B. Vertical alignment In the staple mode, for the vertical alignment of paper, the paper is pushed against the flat-stapling stopper by the paddle that is driven by the paddle motor (M2). II Composition/Operation

The vertical alignment is assisted by the swing roller that is interlocked with the paddle by M2.

[2]

Stacker entrance sensor (PS5) Paddle motor (M2) Stapler motors /Fr (M31), /Rr (M30)

[1] [1]

Start button ON

[2]

Stapling of the 1st sheet of paper

3.3.6

[3] [3]

fs503to2035c

Stapling

Stacker paper exit

A. Non-staple control In the non-staple mode, the paper exit is made by the nip of the intermediate rollers /Up and /Lw. B. Staple control In the staple mode, the paper exit is made by the paper exit arm that is driven by the paper exit arm motor (M23). The home position of the paper exit arm is detected by the paper exit arm home sensor (PS9).

[2]

Stapler motors /Fr (M31), /Rr (M30) Paper exit arm motor (M23) Paper exit arm home sensor (PS9)

[1] [1]

Start button ON

[2]

Stapling

[3] [3]

fs503to2036c

Movement to the paper exit arm standby position

[4]

2 -18

[4]

Paper exit operation of paper bundle



STAPLER SECTION

4. STAPLER SECTION 4.1

Composition


[4]

[2]

[3]

[1] fs503to2016c

Symbol

Item


[1]

Stapler 45° rotation method

Mechanism with the joint use of the gear and the cam

[2]

Stapler movement method

Movement mechanism with the belt

[3]

Staple scraps box

With the box presence detection function provided, 150,000 staples can be contained

[4]

Stapler

Stapler integral with in-line clincher (staple cut type, flat clinch) Staple sheet cartridge

2 -19


STAPLER SECTION


4.2

Drive

4.2.1

Stapler movement/rotation

[7]

[8]

[1]


[2]

[6] [4]

[5]

[3] fs503to2017c

[1]

Cam

[5]

Stapler /Fr

[2]

Stapler rotation home sensor (PS14)

[6]

Stapler movement motor (M11)

[3]

Stapler rotation motor (M4)

[7]

Stapler movement home sensor (PS11)

[4]

Stapler /Rr

[8]

Belt

2 -20



STAPLER SECTION

Stapler

[1] [5]


[2]

[4]

[3] fs503to2018c

[1]

Staple cut/bending arm

[4]

Stapling arm

[2]

Stapler motors /Rr (M30), /Fr (M31)

[5]

Pressure plate

[3]

Eccentric cam

2 -21


STAPLER SECTION

4.3

Operation

4.3.1

Stapler movement control


For stapler movements, there are two types, that is, the horizontal movement of the stapler intervals and the rotation of the stapler /Rr. Movement is made according to the staple mode. The horizontal movement of the stapler is made by the stapler movement motor (M11). The stapler /Rr and the stapler /Fr are fixed on the upper side and the lower side of a belt that forms a loop and moved respectively in the opposite direction by the motor M11. II Composition/Operation

The home position of the horizontal movement is detected by the stapler movement home sensor (PS11). The 45° rotational movement of the stapler /Rr for the one-corner stapling at rear is made by the stapler rotation motor (M4). The home position of the rotational movement is detected by the stapler rotation home sensor (PS14). A. 1 staple (1) 1 staple/at front When the start button is turned ON, the stapler movement motor (M11) also turns ON to move the stapler to the position according to the paper size. (2) Size movement in 1 staple/one-corner stapling at rear When the start button is turned ON, the stapler movement motor (M11) turns ON to move the stapler to the position according to the paper size. After a specified period of time, the stapler rotation motor (M4) also turns ON to rotate the stapler /Rr and move it diagonally. When a staple empty condition of the stapler /Rr is detected at the one-corner stapling at rear, M4 is driven to replace the cartridge and the stapler is returned to its vertical position. B. 2 staples When the start button is turned ON, the stapler movement motor (M11) also turns ON to move the stapler to the position according to the paper size.

2 -22



STAPLER SECTION

Staple control

The staple control is made by the stapler motors /Rr (M30) and /Fr (M31) to drive the eccentric cam. The inside [2] of the eccentric cam [1] is provided with the cam groove [4] of the pressure arm [3] and the pin [6] of the staple cut/clincher arm [5]. The outside [7] of the eccentric cam is also provided with the cam groove [9] of the stapling arm [8]. Each time the eccentric cam makes a 1/4 turn, each of the following operations is made: 1. paper pressure, 2. stapling, 3. staple cut/clinch, and 4. return to the home position. A series of the operations complete in a full turn.

[5]

[1]

[4]

[9]

[7]

[2] [6] [8]

[3]

[1]

Eccentric cam

[6]

Pin (for staple cut/clinch)

[2]

Inside

[7]

Outside

[3]

Pressure arm

[8]

Stapling arm

[4]

Cam groove (for pressure arm)

[9]

Cam groove (for stapling arm)

[5]

Staple cut/clinch arm

fs503to2019c

2 -23


The home position is detected by the stapler home sensors /Rr (PS40), /Fr (PS41).


STAPLER SECTION


A. Paper pressure When the eccentric cam rotates 90° from the home position, the cam groove [1] on the inside drives the pin [3] provided on the pressure arm [2] in the arrow-marked direction. The pressure arm [2] drives the pressure plate [4] and presses the clinch side hard against the staple side [5] to press the paper [6]. At the same time, the pin [8] provided in the groove [7] on the outside of the cam drives the stapling arm [9]. The pin [10] at the tip of the stapling arm moves along the groove [12] of the pressure claw [11], and drives the pressure claw [11] with the lever to press the paper [13].


The following figure left shows a cam on the outside and the figure right shows a cam on the inside.

[6]

[6]

[4]

[5]

[11] [12]

[3] [1] [10]

[7]

[2]

[9] [8] fs503to2020c

[1]

Cam groove

[7]

Cam groove (for stapling arm)

[2]

Pressure arm

[8]

Pin

[3]

Pin

[9]

Stapling arm

[4]

Pressure plate

[10]

Pin

[5]

Staple side

[11]

Pressure claw

[6]

Paper

[12]

Groove

2 -24



STAPLER SECTION

B. Stapling control When the eccentric cam rotates from 90° to 180°, the cam groove [1] on the outside drives the pin [3] provided on the stapling arm [2] in the arrow-marked direction. The pin [4] at the tip of the stapling arm pushes up the stapling blade [5] to push out the staple [6], punch out the paper [7] and staple it. At the same time, to make preparation for the next stapling, the staple is bent at 90° by the staple bending blade [8].


[6]

[5] [5] [4]

[1]

[2] [8]

[3] fs503to2021c

[1]

Cam groove

[5]

Stapling blade

[2]

Stapling arm

[6]

Staple

[3]

Pin

[7]

Paper

[4]

Pin at the tip

[8]

Staple bending blade

2 -25


STAPLER SECTION


C. Staple cut/clinch control When the eccentric cam rotates from 180° to 270°, the pin [1] provided on the inside drives the staple cut/clinch arm [2] in the arrow-marked direction. At the start of rotation, the lever operation of the staple cut/clinch arm [2] rotates the coupling metal fitting [3] to pull the pin [4] in the arrow-marked direction and the staple [7] inserted into the round hole [6] of the staple cut blade [5] is cut. Staple scraps that have been cut drop into the duct to be collected in the staple scraps box. With the further rotation of the eccentric cam, the tip of the presser metal fitting [8] that is interlocked with the staple cut/clinch arm [2] pushes down the clinch metal fitting [9] to clinch the staple [7] that has been cut. When II Composition/Operation

the eccentric cam rotates up to 270°, the clinch operation is completed. After completion of clinching, the eccentric cam rotates to the home position to complete a series of operations.

[8]

[8] [9]

[3]

[9] [7]

[7]

[6]

[4]

[5]

[1]

[5] [2] fs503to2022c

[1]

Pin

[2]

Staple cut/clinch arm

[7]

Staple

[3]

Coupling metal fitting

[8]

Presser metal fitting

[4]

Pin

[9]

Clinch metal fitting

[5]

Staple cut blade

2 -26

[6]

Round hole



STAPLER SECTION

D. Cartridge detection The presence of a cartridge or the incorrect setting of a cartridge is detected by the cartridge set sensors /Rr (PS42), /Fr (PS43). When there is no cartridge or the cartridge is set incorrectly, an error message is displayed on the operation section. E. Staple detection When the staples run short, the staple empty sensors /Rr (PS44), /Fr (PS45) detect this condition and display an

F.

Staple tip detection

The tip of the staple is detected by the staple ready sensors /Rr (PS46), /Fr (PS47). While in the stapling operation, the staple ready sensors determine that the staples have been clogged when the PS46 and PS47 do not turn on within a specified period of time after the staple home sensors /Rr (PS 40), /Fr (PS41) turn off, and rotate the stapler motors /Rr (M30), /Fr (M31) in the reverse direction up to the home position. G. Staple scraps box detection The presence of a staple scraps box or the incorrect setting of a box is detected by the stapler scraps box set sensor (PS34). When there is no staple scraps box or it is set incorrectly, an error message is displayed on the operation section.

2 -27


error message on the operation section.


MAIN TRAY SECTION


5. MAIN TRAY SECTION 5.1

Composition


[3] [2]

[1]

fs503to2023c

Symbol

Item


[1]

Main tray up/down method

Wire driven horizontal up/down

[2]

Ejected paper alignment method

Decelerated paper exit + sponge roller alignment

(in the sub-scan direction) [3]

Main tray paper exit opening open/ close method

2 -28

Belt/deformation cam drive



5.2

Drive

5.2.1

Tray up/down drive


[6]

MAIN TRAY SECTION

[1]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[4] fs503to2024c

[1]

Counter reset sensor (PS15)

[5]

Up/down wire

[2]

Tray lower limit sensor (PS3)

[6]

Main tray

[3]

Tray up down motor (M3)

[7]

Up/down pulley /Up

[4]

Up/down pulley /Lw

2 -29


MAIN TRAY SECTION 5.2.2


Main tray paper exit drive


[5]

[1]

[4]

[3]

[2]

fs503to2025c

[1]

Main tray paper exit motor (M7)

[4]

Main tray paper exit roller

[2]

Coupling

[5]

Paper exit opening solenoid (SD9)

[3]

Paper pressure arm

2 -30



MAIN TRAY SECTION

Paper exit opening drive

[6]

[1]


[5] [2] [4]

[3]

fs503to2026c

[1]

Cam

[4]

Main tray paper exit roller

[2]

Paper exit opening motor (M8)

[5]

Paper exit opening unit

[3]

Paper exit opening home sensor (PS12)

[6]

Drive bar

2 -31


MAIN TRAY SECTION


5.3

Operation

5.3.1

Paper exit opening control

When paper is too long and protruding, the paper exit opening is opened and closed for alignment. There are 3 opening positions available according to the mode and the paper length. For paper shorter than the following length, the paper exit opening is opened neither in the non-staple mode nor the staple mode.


Mode

Angle of the opening

Paper length in the sub scan direction

Non-staple

Approx. 27°

More than 239 mm

Staple

Approx. 44°

More than 400 mm

Staple

Approx. 55°

More than 219 mm, less than 400 mm

For the open/close of the paper exit opening, the paper exit motor (M8) rotates and the deformed cam [1] lifts up the entire paper exit opening unit [2] to open the paper exit opening. The open/close of the paper exit opening is detected by the paper exit opening home sensor (PS12) [3].

[7] [6] [6]

[7]

[4]

[5]

[5]

[1]

[4]

[2] [3] fs503to2027c

[1]

Deformed cam

[5]

Position at 27°

[2]

Paper exit opening unit

[6]

Position at 44°

[3]

Paper exit opening home sensor (PS12)

[7]

Position at 55°

[4]

Position at 0°

2 -32



MAIN TRAY SECTION

A. Non-staple control When the paper length is less than 239 mm, paper exit unit is not opened. When the paper length is 239 mm or longer, paper exit unit is opened by 27°. Turn ON the start button while in the M8 open the paper exit unit to about 27°. Close the paper exit unit after the alignment. B. Staple control When the paper length is less than 219 mm, paper exit unit is not opened. II Composition/Operation

When the paper length is 219 mm or longer and less than 400 mm, paper exit unit is opened by 55°. When the paper length is 400 mm or longer, paper exit unit is opened by 44°. Open angle is narrow for 400 mm or longer due to the differences of the number of stapled pages. # of stapled pages:Less than 400 mm 400 mm or longer

100 pages 50 pages

C. Sub-set staple control Sub set staple control avoids exited papers misalignment when sub set staple is used. Paper holding arm is driven by paper exit solenoid (SD9). When stapled sheets of paper are exited, paper holding arm presses previously exited sheets since they are misaligned by staples. When exiting sheets without staple, paper holding arm does not operate. As control timing, SD9 is turned ON by staple operation. In predetermined time after stapled sheets go through stacker empty sensor (PS20), SD9 is turned OFF. The timing of turning OFF SD9 is when 2/3 of stapled sheets are exited.

[3]

[2]

[1]

[1]

Paper

[2]

Paper presser arm

fs503to2028c

[3]

Paper exit opening solenoid (SD9)

2 -33


MAIN TRAY SECTION 5.3.2


Main tray up/down control

The driving force of the tray up down motor (M3) rotates the up/down pulley by the belt and the gear to wind up the up/down wire. The main tray goes up or down according to the direction in which the up/down wire is wound up. When the up/down pulley /Lw rotates clockwise as seen from the front, the main tray goes up and when it rotates counterclockwise, the tray goes down. A. Non-staple up/down control According to the FS operation signal from the main body, the tray up down motor (M3) raises the tray until the II Composition/Operation

tray upper limit sensor (PS2) turns ON. When paper passes through the main tray paper exit sensor (PS10), M3 lets down the tray. M3 raises up the tray again a specified period of time after PS2 turns OFF and stops it when PS2 turns ON. The above steps are repeated for each sheet of paper.

[2]

Main tray paper exit sensor (PS10) Tray upper limit sensor (PS2) Tray up down motor (M3)

UP DOWN

[1] [1]

Start button ON

fs503to2037c

[2]

Paper exited

B. Staple control When the stacker empty sensor (PS20) detects the trailing edge of paper, the main tray is brought down by the tray up/down motor (M3). And M3 reverses the rotation after a specified period of time to bright up the tray. It stops when the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7) turns ON.

[2]

Stacker empty sensor (PS20) [3] Tray up down motor (M3)

UP DOWN

[1] [1]

Start button ON

[2]

Paper bundle exited

2 -34

fs503to2038c

[3]

Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7)



MAIN TRAY SECTION

C. Main tray paper detection The tray upper limit sensor (PS2) and the stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7) maintain the distance between the upper surface of the paper exited in the main tray (or the main tray upper surface when no paper is exited) and the paper exit opening at a specified distance to prevent any uneven paper exit from occurring. While in the continuous print mode, the FS uses a software to count the number of sheets of paper exited and stops printing when the count reaches the maximum number of sheets loadable for each paper size. However, when paper has been exited is removed while in printing, the tray goes up to turn ON the counter reset sensor (PS15). This resets the software counter, thus allowing paper to be exited without limit. ber is not added up by the software counter and the PS3 is used to restrict the number of sheets of paper.

[5]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

fs503to2029c

[1]

Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7)

[4]

Tray lower limit sensor (PS3)

[2]

Tray upper limit sensor (PS2)

[5]

Main tray

[3]

Counter reset sensor (PS15)

2 -35


The tray lower limit sensor (PS3) detects the lowest limit of the tray. In the intermittent copy mode, the total num-




MAIN TRAY SECTION

Blank page

2 -36

sd501ma.book Page 1 Wednesday, March 16, 2005 11:35 AM

SERVICE MANUAL

Theory of Operation

SD-501

2005.03 Ver. 1.0


sd501ma.book Page i Wednesday, March 16, 2005 11:35 AM


CONTENTS


OUTLINE


Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3

Type of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.4

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.5

Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.6



II


1. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

1.3

1.2.1

Entrance conveyance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

1.2.2

Horizontal conveyance drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

1.2.3

Gate drive/subtray pressure/release drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 1.3.1

Conveyance path switching operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

1.3.2

Conveyance line speed switch control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

1.3.3

Subtray exit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

1.3.4

Subtray paper full detection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.3

2.2.1

Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.2.2

Overlap drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 2.3.1

Paper overlap control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

2.3.2


2.3.3

Right angle conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

3. FOLDING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 3.1 3.2

3.3


Folding entrance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

3.2.2

Folding conveyance drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

3.2.3

Folding blade drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

3.2.4

Folding main scan alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

3.2.5

Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

3.2.6

Guide shaft drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 3.3.1

Folding entrance conveyance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

i


I

I Outline

CONTENTS

sd501ma.book Page ii Wednesday, March 16, 2005 11:35 AM

I Outline

CONTENTS


3.3.2

Folding main scan alignment control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

3.3.3

Folding control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

3.3.4

Folding sub scan alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

3.3.5

Guide shaft control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

4. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 4.1


4.2

4.3


Saddle stitching alignment drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

4.2.2

Saddle stitching hold drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

4.2.3

Clincher up down drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

4.2.4

Stapler/clincher movement drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

4.2.5

Stapler/clincher drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

4.2.6

Bundle arm rotation drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

4.2.7

Bundle arm movement drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

4.2.8

Bundle arm assist drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44

4.2.9

Bundle clip drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 4.3.1

Saddle stitching alignment control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

4.3.2

Stapler/clincher movement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

4.3.3

Saddle stitching hold control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

4.3.4

Clincher up down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

4.3.5

Stapler control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55

4.3.6

Bundle arm control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

4.3.7

Bundle arm assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62

4.3.8

Bundle clip control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65

5. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 5.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

5.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

5.3

5.2.1

Bundle press stage up down drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

5.2.2

Bundle press movement drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

5.2.3

Bundle registration drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

5.2.4

Bundle press drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

5.2.5

Bundle exit drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 5.3.1

Bundle press stage up down control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

5.3.2

Bundle press movement control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78

5.3.3

Bundle press control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81

5.3.4

Bundle registration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83

5.3.5

Bundle exit control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85

6. TRIMMER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91 6.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91

6.2

Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92

6.3

ii

6.2.1

Trimmer press drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92

6.2.2

Trimmer blade drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93

6.2.3

Trimmer board drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 6.3.1

Trimmer press control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95

6.3.2

Trimmer blade control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99

6.3.3

Trimmer board control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101




I Outline


Type

Name:

Saddle stitching trimmer finisher

Type:

Saddle stitching unit with fore-edge trimming and multi-folding function

Stapling method:

Inclined clinch method

Trimming method:

Movable blade + trimmer board method

1.2

Functions

A. Functions Subtray exit:

Exits paper to the subtray without any process.

Coupling exit:

Conveys paper to the succeeding device without any process.

Saddle stitching:

Exits paper to the bundle exit tray after being center folding and saddle stitching.

Saddle stitching with trimming: Exits to the bundle exit tray after being center folding, saddle stitching, and trimming processes. Multi center folding:

Exits to the bundle exit tray after being center folding on one or more sheets of paper.

Multi letter folding:

Exits to the tri-folding tray after being letter folding process on one or more sheets of paper.

B. Maximum tray capacity Subtray:

200 sheets

Bundle exit tray: Center folding/trimming: 2 to 10 sheets in a bundle

More than 50 set

11 to 20 sheets in a bundle More than 30 set 21 to 40 sheets in a bundle More than 20 set 41 to 50 sheets in a bundle More than 15 set Multi center folding:

1 to 5 sheets

30 set

1 sheet

More than 40 set

2 to 3 sheets

More than 30 set

4 to 5 sheets

More than 20 set

Tri-folding exit tray: Multi letter folding:

1-1



I Outline

1.3


Type of paper

A. Coupling/subtray mode Paper size:

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, B6R 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, 5.5 x 8.5R 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13 wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)

Paper weight:

50 to 300 g/m2

B. Saddle stitching mode Original size:

A3, B4, A4R, B5R 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11R 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13 wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)

Paper weight:

50 to 244g/m2

Maximum saddle stitching sheets: Normal paper and coated paper: Paper weight

Number of the sheets Plain paper 50 sheets 1

30 sheets

2

82 to 91 g/m

30 sheets *1

15 sheets *1

92 to 130 g/m2

20 sheets

50 to 81

*

2

*

1

*

*

10 sheets

1 1

*

131 to 161 g/m

15 sheets 1

5 sheets 1

10 sheets

—

210 to 244 g/m2

5 sheets

—

One sheet can be switched to a thick paper (200 g/m2)

Can be automatically changed (90 to 165 mm) in accordance with paper size.

[1] [2] 15ant1c006na

[1] = [Paper size] /2 ± 2 mm [2] = [Paper size] /4 ± 2 mm

1-2

*

162 to 209 g/m2 *1 Staple position:

Coated paper

g/m2




Folding height:

I Outline

[1] 15ant1c011na

Folding sheets

2 to 5 sheets 6 to 15

[1] Folding height A3

B4

A4R

B5R

12 x 18

8.5 x 14

8.5 x 11R

(260 mm or

11 x 17

8K

16KR

less)

(401 mm or

(301 mm to

(261 mm to

more)

400 mm)

300 mm)

35 mm or

40 mm or

45 mm or

less

less

less

45 mm or

50 mm or

Not defined

sheets

less

less

16 to 30

50 mm or

55 mm or

sheets

less

less

31 to 50

60 mm or

65 mm or

sheets

less

less

Not defined

(The above information is applied when paper weight is 64 g/m2 and no thick cover is not used.) C. Trimming mode: Paper size:

A3, B4, A4R, B5R, 8K, 16KR 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11R 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13 wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm)

Paper weight:

50 to 244 g/m2

Maximum trimming sheets:

50 sheets (80 g/m2) or 49 sheets (80 g/m2) + 1 sheet (200 g/m2) (The above is the number of the printed paper before folding. The number of fore-edge (after folding) is double.)

1-3


I Outline



D. Multi center folding mode Original size: A3, B4, A4R, B5R, 8K, 16KR 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11R 8 x 13, 8.125 x 13.25, 8.25 x 13, 8.5 x 13 wide paper (up to 324 mm x 460 mm) Paper weight: 50 to 244 g/m2 Maximum folding sheets: 5 sheets (80 g/m2) Folding precision (for 1 sheet):

[1]

15ant1c007na

[1] = [Paper size] /2 ± 1.5 mm

[1]

15ant1c008na

[1] = 1.5 mm or less E. Multi letter folding mode: Original size: A4R, 8.5 x 11R Paper weight: 50 to 91 g/m2 Maximum overlay sheets: 5 sheets (80g/m2) Folding precision (for 1 sheet):

[1]

[2] 15ant1c009na

Original size

[1]

[2]

A4R

97.5 mm ± 2.5 mm

102.0 mm ± 2.5 mm

8.5 x 11R

91.6 mm ± 2.5 mm

96.1 mm ± 2.5 mm

[2]

[1] 15ant1c010na

[1] = 1.5 mm or less [2] = 1.5 mm or less

1-4



Maintenance

Maintenance:




1.5

I Outline

1.4


Machine data

Power source:

100 to 240 VAC

Maximum power consumption:270 W Dimensions:

When the bundle exit tray is stored:W 1,170 mm x D 775 mm x H 1,020 mm When the bundle exit tray is pulled out:W 1,170 mm x D 1,441 mm x H 1,020 mm

Weight:

1.6

263 kg


Temperature:

10°C to 30°C

Humidity:


NOTE • The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.

1-5


UNIT COMPOSITION


I Outline

2. UNIT COMPOSITION

[1]

[2]

[7]

[3]

[6]

[5] [4] 15ant1c001na

1-6

[1]

Folding section

[5]

Trimmer section

[2]

Right angle conveyance section

[6]

Saddle stitching section

[3]

Bundle process section

[7]

Horizontal conveyance section

[4]

Left side view



PAPER PATH

3. PAPER PATH

[3]

[2]

I Outline

A. Coupling exit/subtray exit mode

[1]

15ant1c002na

[1]

Horizontal conveyance

[2]

Subtray exit

[3]

Coupling exit

1-7


PAPER PATH


I Outline

B. Multi letter folding mode

[1]

[4] [5]

[7]

[6]

[8]

[3]

[2]

[10]

[9] 15ant1c003na

1-8

[1]

Stack to the right angle conveyance section

[6]

Paper exit

[2]

Right angle conveyance

[7]

Stack movement of the paper exit

[3]

Conveyance to the folding section

[8]

Front side view

[4]

1st folding

[9]

Top side view

[5]

2nd folding

[10]

Right side view



PAPER PATH

C. Multi center folding/saddle stitching mode

I Outline

(1) From the paper exit from the main body to the center folding

[1]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[3]

[2]

[8]

[7] 15ant1c004na

[1]

Stack to the right angle conveyance section

[5]

Release from the folding roller

[2]


[6]

Front side view

[3]

Conveyance to the folding section

[7]

Top side view

[4]

Center folding (1st folding)

[8]

Right side view

1-9


PAPER PATH


I Outline

(2) From the center folding to the paper exit

[1]

[7] [2]

[3]

[4] [1]

[5]

[8]

15ant1c005na

Conveyance from the folding section to the

[5]

Paper exit

saddle stitching section

[6]

Stack movement of the paper exit

[2]

Movement by the bundle arm

[7]

Front side view

[3]

Movement by the clip

[8]

Left side view

[4]

Conveyance to the trimmer section (only for saddle stitching mode)

1-10

[6]



HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION

II COMPOSITION/OPERATION 1. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION 1.1

Composition [3]


[2]

[1] Symbol

Item

15ant2c001na


[1]

Entrance conveyance path switching method

Solenoid + gate

[2]

Subtray paper full detection method

Actuator + photo sensor

[3]

Subtray exit method

Roller pressure/release by the solenoid

[4]

Subtray conveyance path switching method

Solenoid + gate

2-1




Drive

1.2.1

Entrance conveyance drive


1.2

[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]

15ant2c002na

[1]

Entrance roller

[3]

Front side view

[2]

Entrance conveyance motor (M1)

[4]

Conveyance roller

1.2.2

Horizontal conveyance drive

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[3]

[1]

2-2

15ant2c003na

[1]

Front side view

[4]

Horizontal conveyance motor (M2)

[2]

Exit roller

[5]

Subtray exit roller

[3]

Conveyance roller




Gate drive/subtray pressure/release drive

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]


[1]

15ant2c004na

[1]

Subtray exit roller

[4]

Horizontal conveyance gate

[2]

Roller release solenoid /4 (SD4)

[5]

Entrance gate solenoid (SD1)

[3]

Horizontal conveyance gate solenoid (SD3)

[6]

Entrance gate

2-3




1.3

Operation

1.3.1

Conveyance path switching operation

A. Entrance gate solenoid control The entrance gate switches the path to the horizontal conveyance section and one to the right angle conveyance section. The switch is conducted by the entrance gate solenoid (SD1). The right angle conveyance path is selected when SD1 turns OFF and the horizontal conveyance path is selected when it turns ON. In the coupling exit mode and the subtray exit mode, SD1 turns ON and sets the entrance gate to the horizontal II Composition/Operation

conveyance section when the main body print signal turns ON. SD1 turns OFF after the paper exit. B. Horizontal conveyance gate control The horizontal conveyance gate switches the path to the subtray section and the coupling conveyance path to the succeeding device. The switch is conducted by the horizontal conveyance gate solenoid (SD3). The coupling conveyance path is selected when SD3 turns OFF and the subtray path is selected when it turns ON. 1.3.2

Conveyance line speed switch control

The conveyance is conducted by the entrance conveyance motor (M1) and the horizontal conveyance motor (M2). M1 and M2 turn ON when the main body start signal [1] turns ON. M1 switches its rotational speed in accordance with the main body line speed [3] when the main body exit sensor turns ON [2]. Then it switches its rotational speed to high speed [4] to convey the paper when it receives the paper trailing edge signal (when the paper trailing edge passes through the fusing).

[2] Main body exit sensor Entrance conveyance motor (M1)

High speed Low speed

Horizontal conveyance motor (M2)

[1]

2-4

[3]

[4]

15ant2c005na

[1]

Main body start signal

[3]

M1 switching to a low speed

[2]

Main body exit sensor ON

[4]

Main body paper trailing edge signal




Subtray exit control

When exiting the paper to the subtray, the paper is prevented to be misaligned by releasing the nipping of the subtray exit roller by the roller release solenoid /4 (SD4) to nip the paper only at the trailing edge and slowing down the paper by the subtray exit roller that is rotating in low speed for every paper. The horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2) [1] and the subtray exit sensor (PS11) [2] detect the paper exited to the subtray.

[3]

[2]


[4]

15ant2c006na

[1]

Horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2)

[3]

Roller release solenoid (SD4)

[2]

Subtray exit sensor (PS11)

[4]

Subtray exit roller

The roller release solenoid /4 (SD4) turns ON [2] to release the nipping of the subtray exit roller [3] after a specified period of time since the horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2) detects the leading edge of paper [1]. SD4 turns OFF [5] and the subtray exit roller nips at the trailing edge of paper [6] after a specified period of time since PS2 detects the trailing edge of paper [4]. This control is conducted for every paper exited to the subtray.

[4] Horizontal conveyance sensor /1 (PS2) Subtray exit sensor (PS11) Roller release solenoid /4 (SD4)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[5] [6]

15ant2c007na

[1]

Detection of the leading edge of paper

[4]

Detection of the trailing edge of paper

[2]

SD4 ON

[5]

SD4 OFF

[3]

Release of nip

[6]

Nipping at the trailing edge of paper

1.3.4

Subtray paper full detection control

The subtray paper full detection is conducted by the subtray paper full sensor (PS12) via the actuator. PS12 turns ON under normal circumstances. The subtray paper full condition is detected and the subtray paper full signal is transmitted to the main body when the actuator is pressed by stacked paper and PS12 turns OFF. Then, the main body displays the message on its operation panel.

2-5


RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION


2. RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION 2.1

Composition [4]


[3]

[1]

[2]

15ant2c008na

Symbol

Item


[1]

Alignment method (main scan direction) Alignment claw + torque limiter

[2]

Alignment method (sub scan direction)

Stopper

[3]

Conveyance direction switching

Roller pressure/release by the solenoid

method [4]

2-6

Paper overlap method

Gate + solenoid




2.2

Drive

2.2.1

Right angle conveyance drive/alignment drive

[1]


[2]

[3] [11]

[10]

[9] [6]

[7] [8]

[4] [5]

15ant2c009na

[1]

Alignment claw

[7]

Right angle conveyance roller /4

[2]

Torque limiter

[8]


[3]


[9]


[4]

Front side direction

[10]

Right angle conveyance motor (M6)

[5]

Top side view

[11]


[6]


2-7


RIGHT ANGLE CONVEYANCE SECTION 2.2.2


Overlap drive


[7]

[6]

[1]

[2] [5]

2-8

[4]

[3]

15ant2c010na

[1]

Overlap stopper

[5]

Front side view

[2]

Overlap motor (M13)

[6]

Right angle conveyance gate

[3]

Right side view

[7]

Right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2)

[4]

Overlap home sensor (PS17)



2.3

Operation

2.3.1

Paper overlap control


A. Overlap mechanism When the folding operation is conducted for more than one sheet of paper, they are overlapped in the right angle conveyance section, and then conveyed to the folding section. The overlap mechanism is the mechanism to overlap the paper in adequate paper conveyance order. The operation is conducted by the right angle conveyance gate [1] driven by the right angle conveyance gate solenoid detects the home position of the overlap stopper. The overlap stopper [5] is positioned at the position where the trailing edge of paper [2] is positioned 20 mm below from the right angle conveyance gate [1] in accordance with the paper size when it stands by for the paper.

[1]

[2]

[7]

[3]

[4] [6]

[5]

15ant2c011na

[1]


[5]

Overlap stopper

[2]

Trailing edge of paper

[6]

Front side view

[3]

Overlap motor (M13)

[7]


[4]

Overlap home sensor (PS17)

2-9


(SD2) [7] and the overlap stopper [5] driven by the overlap motor (M13) [3]. The overlap home sensor (PS17) [4]




The first stacked sheet of paper [5] is conveyed while the overlap stopper is located at the standby position [4]. Before conveying the second paper, right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) turns ON to move the right angle conveyance gate [6] to the right [7]. At the time, overlap motor (M13) moves the overlap stopper 30 mm upward [3]. It transfers the stacked paper to the left side of the right angle conveyance gate. The right angle conveyance gate is replaced [9] to clear the conveyance path. The subsequent paper [8] passes the right side of the right angle conveyance gate and the paper is overlapped in adequate order. Then, M13 moves the overlap stopper downward [1].


The same as the second sheet is conducted until all of sheets are stacked.

[7]

[8]

[9]

[6]

[5]

[1] [4] [1]

2-10

[3] [2]

15ant2c012na

Overlap stopper moving 30 mm downward

[6]


[2]

Front side view

[7]

Right angle conveyance gate moved

[3]

Overlap stopper moving 30 mm upward

[8]

2nd paper

[4]

Standby position of the overlap stopper

[9]

Right angle conveyance gate replaced

[5]

1st paper




B. Overlap control (1) Multi letter folding mode control In the multi letter folding mode, up to 5 sheets are stacked in the right angle conveyance section and conveyed to the folding section. The multi letter folding is available only with paper of 50 to 91 g/m2 in weight and is unavailable with others. The overlap motor (M13) turns ON when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and moves the overlap stopper upward to its standby position. Turning ON the right angle conveyance gate solenoid (SD2) [3] after a specified period of time since the entrance paper upward [4], and isolate the paper from the conveyance gate by transferring it to the left side of the right angle conveyance gate. Turning OFF SD2 [5], the conveyance gate opens and waits for the subsequent paper. Conveying the subsequent paper through the right side of the right angle conveyance gate [6] and detecting the trailing edge of paper by the entrance sensor (PS1) [7], M13 moves the overlap stopper downward [8]. When the trailing edge of paper passes under the right angle conveyance gate, SD2 turns ON [9] to switch the right angle conveyance gate and M13 moves up the overlap stopper [10] to send the conveyed sheets of paper to the left side of the right angle conveyance gate. Then, SD2 turns OFF [11] and stands by for the subsequent paper. The overlap stopper moves down to the standby position and stands by for the 1st paper of the subsequent set [12] after a specified period of time since PS1 detects the trailing edge of last paper of the set.

[4]

[7] [10]

Entrance sensor (PS1) Overlap motor (M13)

Up Down


[12] [1] [2]

[3] [5]

[6] [8] [9] [11]

15ant2c074na

[1]


[7]

Trailing edge of the subsequent paper detected

[2]

Overlay stopper moved to its standby position

[8]

Paper moved downward

[3]

Right conveyance gate switched

[9]

Right conveyance gate switched

[4]

Paper isolated

[10]

Paper isolated

[5]

Conveyance path cleared

[11]

Conveyance path cleared

[6]

Subsequent paper conveyed

[12]

Overlay stopper moved to its standby position

2-11


sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of the paper, the right angle conveyance gate is switched, M13 moves the




(2) Center folding/saddle stitching mode control In the center folding and saddle stitching modes, 1, 2, or 3 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section. The number of the stacked sheets is different depending on its paper weight and the conveyance pattern. Normal paper (less than 130 g/m2): up to 3 sheets are stacked and conveyed to the folding section. Thick paper (more than 131 g/m2): due to the limit of the folding performance, up to 2 sheets are stacked and conveyed to the folding section.


• Normal paper For the 1st set, 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first. Similarly, 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section for the subsequent sheets. At the final conveyance, 2 sheets are conveyed (if the total number of the paper is even) or 1 sheet is conveyed (if the number is odd). It does not convey 3 sheets at a time for the odd case because the timing to transmit the information such as the page count, the paper type, and so on is too late when the printing is conducted from a PC. For the 2nd and following set, 3 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first to take adequate time to conduct the folding operation for the preceding set. At the final conveyance, 2 sheets are conveyed (if the total number of the paper is even) or 3 sheets are conveyed (if the number is odd). • Thick paper Up to 2 sheets of paper can be stacked for the thick paper. For every set, 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section at first. Similarly, 2 sheets of paper are stacked and conveyed to the folding section for the subsequent sheets. At the final conveyance, 2 sheets are conveyed (if the total number of the paper is even) or 1 sheet is conveyed (if the number is odd). • Using PI function The same as the thick paper control is conducted because the paper type information cannot be obtained in the print job using PI.

2-12




Alignment control

A. Alignment mechanism The alignment is conducted by driving the alignment claws [2] by the right angle conveyance motor (M6) [5] through the belt [3] and the torque limiter [4]. The alignment claws move to the rear of the shelter direction [7] and are stopped by the mechanical stoppers [1] through the torque limiter when M6 is rotating toward the paper conveyance direction. Rotating M6 in the reverse direction, the alignment claws push the edge of paper to conduct the alignment [6].

[5]

[6]

[7]


[4]

[1]

[2]

[3]

15ant2c013na

[1]

Mechanical stopper

[5]

Right angle conveyance motor (M6)

[2]

Alignment claw

[6]

Aligning direction

[3]

Belt

[7]

Shelter direction

[4]

Torque limiter

2-13




B. Alignment control The right angle conveyance motor (M6) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and the alignment claws move to the standby position [2] in accordance with the paper size. No alignment operation is conducted for the 1st paper. M6 rotates in the reverse direction to align paper with the alignment claws [3] after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of 2nd paper. Then, M6 rotates in the forward direction to replace the alignment claws to the standby position [4]. M6 rotates to convey the paper to the folding section [6] and evacuate the alignment claws to the home position after a specified period of time after the alignment operation [5] for the last paper of the set. After a specified II Composition/Operation

period of time after the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the leading edge of paper, M6 rotates in the reverse direction to move the alignment claws to the standby position [7] for the subsequent copy.

[7] Entrance sensor (PS1) Right angle conveyance motor (M6)

Forward Reverse

Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6)

[1] [2]

[5]

[6]

15ant2c075na

[1]


[5]

Alignment operation

[2]

Alignment claws moved to the standby position

[6]

Paper conveyed to the folding section

[3]

Alignment operation

[7]

Alignment claws moved back to the standby position

[4]

Alignment claws moved back to the standby position

2-14

[3] [4]




Right angle conveyance control

A. Right angle conveyance mechanism In the right angle conveyance, the right angle conveyance motor (M6) and the roller release solenoids /1 (SD5) [5] and /2 (SD6) [10] convey the paper. When conveying the paper to the overlap section, the paper falls vertically [6] to the overlap stopper [7] by its own weight. At the time, the press by the right angle conveyance roller /1 [3] is released by default since the conveyance direction is not the rotational direction of the right angle conveyance roller /1 [3] but the axial direction of the right angle conveyance roller /1. nip the paper and convey the paper to the position rotated 90° from the right side to the front side [8]. The roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) [14] is OFF to release the pressure of the folding entrance roller by default since the upper edge of the paper [1] passes over the folding entrance roller [13]. When conveying the paper from the right angle conveyance section to the folding section [12], the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) [10] turns ON to release the pressure of the right angle conveyance roller /4 [9] and convey the paper to the folding section by nipping the paper with the folding entrance roller [13].

[14]

[1] [2]

[13]

[3]

[12]

[4]

[11] [10]

[5]

[9]

[6]

[8]

[7] 15ant2c014na

[1]

Upper edge of the paper pass

[8]


[2]


[9]


[3]


[10]


[4]


[11]


[5]


[12]

Paper conveyed to the folding section

[6]

Paper conveyed to the overlap section

[13]

Folding entrance roller

[7]

Overlap stopper

[14]


2-15


After stacking and aligning the specified number of papers, the roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) [5] turns ON to




B. Conveyance control The roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) turns ON to press the right angle conveyance roller /1 [2] after a specified period of time since the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of last paper of the set [1]. After the alignment operation [3], the right angle conveyance motor (M6) rotates in the forward direction to convey the paper to the front side [4] by rotating 90°. At this time, the roller release solenoid (SD7) turns OFF a specified period of time after the entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of paper and releases the pressure of the folding entrance roller /1 [5]. A specified period of time after the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the leading edge of paper, SD7 turns ON to pressure the folding entrance roller /1 and nip [6] the upper section II Composition/Operation

of paper that has been conveyed to the front side. And also, a specified period of time after that, when the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) turns ON to release the right angle conveyance roller /4 [7] and convey the paper to the folding section.

[1] [3]

[4]

Entrance sensor (PS1) Right angle conveyance motor (M6)

Forward Reverse

Roller release solenoid /1 (SD5) Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6)

[2]

2-16

[5]

[6]

[7]

15ant2c076na

[1]

Trailing edge of the last paper of the set detected

[5]

Folding entrance roller pressure release

[2]

Right angle conveyance roller /1 pressure

[6]

Folding entrance roller pressure

[3]

Paper alignment

[7]

Right angle conveyance roller /4 pressure release

[4]

Paper conveyance



FOLDING SECTION

3. FOLDING SECTION 3.1

Composition [7]

[8]


[6]

[1] [5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

Symbol

Item

[1]

Alignment method /1 (main scan direction)

Alignment stopper

[2]

1st folding method

Roller + folding blade

[3]

Alignment method (sub scan direction)

Alignment stopper + torque limiter

[4]

Center folding exit /1

Belt with claw

[5]

Center folding exit /2

Guide shaft

[6]

Alignment method /2 (main scan direction)

Belt with alignment claw

[7]

Multi letter folding exit stacking method

Belt conveyance stack

[8]

2nd folding method

Roller + folding blade

15ant2c015na


2-17


FOLDING SECTION


3.2

Drive

3.2.1

Folding entrance drive


[4]

[3]

2-18

[2]

[1]

[1]

Folding entrance motor (M3)

[3]

Folding entrance roller /1

[2]

Right side view

[4]


15ant2c016na


bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Folding conveyance drive

[7]

[8]

[9]

[1]

[2]

[3] [6] [1]

[5]

[4]

One way clutch

[6]

Right side view

[2]

Oscillation connecting gear

[7]

Exit belt

[3]

Folding conveyance motor (M4)

[8]

Folding roller /3

[4]

Folding roller /2

[9]

Tri-folding exit clutch (CL1)

[5]

Folding roller /1

15ant2c017na

2-19


3.2.2

FOLDING SECTION


FOLDING SECTION 3.2.3


Folding blade drive

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[13]

[14]


[8]

[1] [7]

2-20

[6]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

15ant2c018na

[1]

1st folding blade motor (M18)

[8]

2nd folding blade motor (M19)

[2]

Folding roller /2

[9]

2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23)

[3]

1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21)

[10]

2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22)

[4]


[11]

2nd folding blade

[5]

1st folding blade

[12]

Folding roller /3

[6]

Folding roller /1

[13]

Spring (pressing the folding rollers /2 and /3)

[7]

Right side view

[14]

Spring (pressing the folding rollers /1 and /2)



FOLDING SECTION

Folding main scan alignment drive

[1]

[2]

[6]

[7]

[5]

[4]

[3]

15ant2c019na

[1]

Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19)

[5]

Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7)

[2]

Alignment stoppers /Rr

[6]

Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18)

[3]

Right side view

[7]


[4]

Alignment claw /Fr

[8]

Folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14)

2-21


[8]




Folding sub scan alignment/center folding exit drive

[8]

[9]

[1]


[7]

[6] [2] [5] [1]

2-22

Folding alignment stoppers /Rt

[4]

[3] [6]

15ant2c020na


[2]

Home position stoppers /Rt

[7]

Folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56)

[3]

Folding exit home sensor (PS24)

[8]

Folding exit claws

[4]

Torque limiter

[9]

Alignment stoppers /Lt

[5]

Folding sub scan alignment motor (M8)



FOLDING SECTION

Guide shaft drive


[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[1]

Guide shaft home sensor (PS46)

[3]

Front side view

[2]

Guide shaft motor (M25)

[4]

Guide shaft

15ant2c021na

2-23


FOLDING SECTION


3.3

Operation

3.3.1

Folding entrance conveyance control

A. Mechanism The folding entrance motor (M3) and the roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) [5] conduct the folding entrance conveyance operation. The paper [1] conveyed from the right angle conveyance section is conveyed to the folding entrance with the pressure of the folding entrance roller /1 [7] released. Once the right angle conveyance is completed, SD7 [5] II Composition/Operation

turns ON to pressure the nipping of the folding entrance roller /1 and the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) [3] turns OFF to release the right angle conveyance roller /4, M3 convey the paper to the folding section. The folding entrance sensor (PS60) [6] detects the paper at the folding entrance.

[5]

[6]

[7]

[4]

[3]

2-24

[2]

[1]

15ant2c022na

[1]

Paper

[5]


[2]


[6]

Folding entrance sensor (PS60)

[3]


[7]


[4]




FOLDING SECTION

B. Control The roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) turns ON to nip the paper with the folding entrance roller [2] after a specified period of time since the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the leading edge of paper [1], and then the roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) turns ON to release the nip of the right angle conveyance roller /4 [3] after a specified period of time. Then the folding entrance motor (M3) turns ON and conveys the paper to the folding section [4]. At the time, the folding conveyance motor (M4) rotates in the reverse direction [5] to prevent the paper from being caught between the folding rollers /1 and /2. entrance sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of last paper of the subsequent set [6] and it stands by for the paper of the subsequent set being conveyed to the front side of the right angle conveyance section.

[1]

[4]

[6]

Entrance sensor (PS1) Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) Folding entrance motor (M3) Roller release solenoid /2 (SD6) Roller release solenoid /3 (SD7) Folding conveyance motor (M4)

Forward Reverse

[2][3]

[5]

[7]

15ant2c078na

[1]

Last paper of the 1st set

[5]

Caught-protection to the folding section

[2]

Folding entrance roller nipped

[6]

Last paper of the subsequent set

[3]

Nip of the right angle conveyance roller /4 released

[7]

Nip of the folding entrance roller released

[4]

Folding entrance conveyance

2-25


SD7 turns OFF to release the pressure of the folding entrance roller [7] after a specified period of time since the




Folding main scan alignment control

A. Mechanism In the folding main scan alignment, the alignment stoppers /Rr [5] driven by the folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14) stop at the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size, and then the alignment claws /Fr [2] driven by the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) conduct the alignment operation. The home position of the alignment claws /Fr is detected by the folding main scan alignment home sensors /Fr1 (PS18) [8] and /Fr2 (PS49) [7] and the home position of the alignment tab /Rr is detected by the folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) [4]. II Composition/Operation

The alignment claws /Fr [2] convey [6] the paper by pushing its trailing edge once the paper passes the folding entrance roller /3 [3] and until the leading edge of paper contacts with the alignment stopper /Rr [5] because there is no conveyance roller between the folding entrance conveyance roller /3 and the alignment stopper /Rr.

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

2-26

15ant2c023na

[1]


[5]

Alignment stoppers /Rr

[2]

Alignment claws /Fr

[6]

Paper conveyance

[3]


[7]


[4]

Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19)

[8]




FOLDING SECTION

B. Control The folding main scan alignment motor /Rr (M14) drives the alignment stoppers /Rr to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size when the main body start signal [1] turns ON. The folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) rotates in the forward direction to let [3] the alignment claws /Fr push the trailing edge of paper for conveyance after a specified period of time since the folding entrance sensor (PS60) detects the trailing edge of paper, and then M7 stops after a specified period of time [4]. The alignment stoppers /Rr push the leading edge of paper to conduct the alignment. M7 rotates in the reverse direction [5], and after a specified period of time it rotates in the forward direction to conduct the alignment again [6]. blade home sensor /1 (PS20) detects the completion of the folding operation. M7 starts rotating to replace the alignment claws to the home position for subsequent set when PS21 detects the completion of the folding operation since the 1st folding blade conducts the reciprocal operation in which the 1st folding blade home sensor / 1 (PS20) and the 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) counter changes their positions at each folding operation. M7 stops rotating when the folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18) detects the home position of the alignment claws. Transmitting the print termination signal from SD, M14 rotates to move the alignment stoppers to the home position [8]. It stops rotating when the folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19) detects the home position of the alignment stoppers.

[2] Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7)

[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

[8]

Forward Reverse

Folding main Forward scan alignment motor /Rr (M14) Reverse Folding entrance sensor (PS60) Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr1 (PS18) Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Fr2 (PS49) Folding main scan alignment home sensor /Rr (PS19)

1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21)

[1]

15ant2c079na

[1]


[5]

Alignment claws /Fr shelter operation

[2]

Alignment stopper /Rr moved for appropriate paper size

[6]

Alignment operation

[3]

Paper conveyed by the alignment claws /Fr

[7]

Alignment claws /Fr moved to the home position

[4]

Alignment operation

[8]

Alignment stoppers /Rr moved to the home position

2-27


M7 rotates in the reverse direction to replace the alignment claws to the home position [7] when the 1st folding




Folding control


A. Mechanism Folding consists of the 1st folding and 2nd folding. The 1st folding is conducted in the multi letter folding mode, the multi center folding mode, and the saddle stitching mode. The 2nd folding is conducted only in the multi letter folding mode. In the 1st folding operation, the 1st folding blade [7] pushes and inserts the paper between the folding rollers /1 [8] and /2 [3]. The folding rollers /1 and /2 are pressured each other by the spring [2]. The 1st folding blade is driven by the 1st blade motor (M18) [4] via the crank mechanism [5]. In the 2nd folding operation, the 2nd folding blade [13] pushes and inserts the paper between the folding rollers /2 [3] and /3 [14]. The folding rollers /2 and /3 are pressured each other by the spring [15]. The 2nd folding blade is driven by the 2nd blade motor (M19) [10] via the crank mechanism [11]. The folding sensor /2 (PS44) [9], the folding sensor /1 (PS7) [1], and the folding passage sensor (PS8) [12] detect the paper.

[10]

[14]

[12] [13]

[11]

[15] [1]

[2]

[9]

2-28

[8]

[7]

[6]

[4]

[5]

[3]

[1]

Folding sensor /1 (PS7)

[9]


[2]

Spring

[10]

2nd folding blade motor (M19)

[3]

Folding roller /2

[11]

Crank mechanism

[4]

1st folding blade motor (M18)

[12]

Folding passage sensor (PS8)

[5]

Crank mechanism

[13]

2nd folding blade

[6]

Right side view

[14]

Folding roller /3

[7]

1st folding blade

[15]

Spring

[8]

Folding roller /1

15ant2c024na



FOLDING SECTION

B. Tri-folding control (1) Operation After the initial operation, the 1st folding blade [8] is at the standby position /1 [5]. In the actuator [7], the 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) [3] turns ON and the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) [6] turns OFF. When the paper [9] is conveyed to the folding section and the 1st folding blade motor (M18) is rotated [2], the crank [4] rotates 90° to project the 1st folding blade to the paper and push the paper [12] between the folding roller /1 [10] and /2 [11] with its edge. At the time, the actuator also rotates 90° so that PS21 [3] and PS20 [6] turns OFF and ON respectively. tion /2 [1] (PS20 turns OFF) where is 180° opposite from the standby position /1. In the 1st folding operation for the subsequent set, M18 rotates in the reverse direction [14] and the crank [4] also rotates 180° in the reverse direction to conduct the 1st folding operation. The 2nd folding operation is operated as in the 1st folding operation.

[11]

[12]

[10]

[9]

[8] [14]

[7]

[13]

[6]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[1]

Standby position /2

[8]

1st folding blade

[2]

Projecting position

[9]

Paper

[3]


[10]

Folding roller /1

15ant2c025na

[4]

Crank

[11]

Folding roller /2

[5]

Standby position /1

[12]

Paper inserted

[6]


[13]

Rotational direction to the standby position /2

[7]

Actuator

[14]

1st folding for the subsequent set

2-29


M18 keeps rotating in the same direction [13], and then the crank [4] stops when it reaches at the standby posi-


FOLDING SECTION


(2) Control When the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) stops rotating at the completion of the paper alignment operation, the 1st folding blade motor (M18) turns ON and starts rotating in the reverse direction. The 1st folding blade folds and inserts the paper between the folding rollers /1 and /2. When the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) turns ON, the folding conveyance motor (M4) turns ON to conduct the 1st folding [2]. M18 stops when PS20 turns OFF. Then, M4 turns OFF and the 1st folding operation is completed [4] after a specified period of time since the folding passage sensor (PS8) detects the leading edge of paper. After a specified period of time since PS8 turns ON, the 2nd folding blade motor (M19) turns ON and rotates in II Composition/Operation

the reverse direction to start the 2nd folding operation. When the 2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22) turns ON, M4 rotates in high speed to perform the 2nd folding, and then the tri-folded paper is conveyed to the trifolding exit. M19 stops when PS22 turns OFF. In the 1st folding operation for the subsequent set, M18 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the 1st folding [7] and stops rotating when the 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) turns ON [8]. In the 2nd folding operation, M19 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the 2nd folding [9] and stops rotating when the 2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23) turns ON [10].

[1] [2] Folding conveyance motor (M4)

[4]

[5]

[7]

[9]

High speed Low speed

Reverse Folding main Forward scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) Reverse 1st folding blade motor (M18)

Forward Reverse

1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) 2nd folding blade motor (M19)

Forward Reverse

2nd folding blade home sensor /1 (PS22) 2nd folding blade home sensor /2 (PS23) Folding passage sensor (PS8)

[3]

2-30

[6]

[8]

[10] 15ant2c080na

[1]

Paper alignment operation completed

[6]

2nd folding blade motor (M19) stopped

[2]

1st folding

[7]

1st folding by M18 rotating the forward direction

[3]

1st folding blade motor (M18) stopped

[8]

M18 stopped

[4]

1st folding completed

[9]

2nd folding by M19 rotating the forward direction

[5]

2nd folding by folding rollers /2 and /3

[10]

M19 stopped

[6]

2nd folding



FOLDING SECTION

C. Tri-folding exit control (1) Operation In the multi letter folding exit, the driving force of the folding conveyance motor (M4) is transmitted via the tri-folding exit clutch (CL1). CL1 turns ON and the exit belt [4] is driven approximately 7 mm to convey the paper to the front side for every paper exit. The tri-folding paper full sensor (PS10) [3] detects the paper when it is reached at the front, and then the main

[3]

[4]

[1]

[2]

15ant2c081na

[1]

Tri-folding exit sensor (PS9)

[3]

Tri-folding paper full sensor (PS10)

[2]

Right side view

[4]

Exit belt

(2) Control The tri-folding exit clutch (CL1) turns ON and drives the exit belt [1] and stops it [2] after a specified period of time when the tri-folding exit sensor (PS9) detects the leading edge of paper. The folding conveyance motor (M4) stops [3] after a specified period of time since PS9 detects the trailing edge of paper.

Folding conveyance motor (M4) Tri-folding exit clutch (CL1) Tri-folding exit sensor (PS9)

[1] [1]

Exit belt driven

[2]

Exit belt stopped

[3]

[2] [3]

15ant2c082na

Folding conveyance motor (M4) stopped

2-31


body displays the message on its operation panel.


FOLDING SECTION


D. Center folding control When the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) stops at the completion of the paper alignment operation, the 1st folding blade motor (M18) turns ON and rotates in the reverse direction [2] to let the 1st folding blade insert the paper between the folding rollers /1 and /2. When the 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) turns ON, the folding conveyance motor (M4) rotates in the reverse direction to rotate the folding rollers /1 and /2 in the reverse direction to release the paper. When PS20 turns OFF, M18 and M4 stop rotating [3]. In the folding operation for the subsequent set, M18 rotates in the forward direction [4] and it stops when the 1st


folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21) turns ON [5].

[1] Folding conveyance motor (M4)

Forward


Forward

[2]

[4]

Reverse

Reverse

1st folding blade Forward motor (M18) Reverse 1st folding blade home sensor /1 (PS20) 1st folding blade home sensor /2 (PS21)

[3]

15ant2c083na

[1]

1st folding blade is projected with the paper

[4]

M18 rotating the forward direction

[2]

Folding conveyance motor (M18) rotating the

[5]

M18 rotating the reverse direction

reverse direction [3]

2-32

[5]

M18 and M4 stopped



FOLDING SECTION

Folding sub scan alignment control

A. Mechanism The folding sub scan alignment operation is conducted in the multi letter folding mode and is conducted with the folding exit claws [13] and the folding alignment stoppers /Rt [3] driven by the folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) [8]. The folding exit claws move to the right [14] and the folding alignment stoppers /Rt move to the left [2] when M8 rotates in the reverse direction [9]. The folding alignment stoppers /Rt are contacted with the alignment stopper [1] and stopped by the torque limiter [7]. The folding exit claws move to the positions for the paper width of A4R In the multi center folding mode and the saddle stitching mode, M8 rotates in the forward direction to move the folding exit claws to the left [11] after the folding operation. Once the folding exit claws make a round, they conduct the paper exit operation to the saddle stitching section. At the time, the folding alignment stoppers /Rt moving to the right [4] are contacted with the alignment stopper [5] and stopped by the torque limiter [7]. The home position of the folding exit claws in the alignment operation is detected by the folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56) [12]. The initial position and the center folding exit operation are detected by the folding exit home sensor (PS24) [6].

[11]

[12]

[13]

[14]

[1] [2]

[3]

[10]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[9]

[8]

[7]

15ant2c026na

[1]

Alignment stopper

[8]

Folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8)

[2]

Direction at the alignment operation (to the left)

[9]

M8 rotated in the reverse direction

[3]

Folding alignment stoppers /Rt

[10]


[4]

Direction at the center folding exit operation (to the right)

[11]

Direction at the center folding exit operation

[5]

Home position stopper

[12]


[6]

Folding exit home sensor (PS24)

[13]

Folding exit claws

[7]

Torque limiter

[14]

Direction at the alignment operation (to the right)

2-33


or 8.5 x 11R and conduct the folding sub scan alignment operation, and then the folding is conducted.


FOLDING SECTION



B. Folding sub scan alignment control The folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) rotates in the reverse direction to conduct the alignment operation in the sub scan direction [2] after a specified period of time since the right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) detects the trailing edge of paper and the alignment operation in the main scan direction is conducted [1]. When the folding sub scan alignment home sensor (PS56) detects the folding exit claws, M8 conducts the alignment by pressing the side of the paper, and then it stops [3] The M8 conducts the shelter operation and stops [4] after a specified period of time since PS6 detects the trailing edge of paper.

[1] Right angle conveyance sensor /2 (PS6) Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7)

Forward


Forward

Reverse

Reverse


[2]

[3]

[4]

[1]

Alignment operation in the main scan direction

[3]

M8 stopped

[2]

Alignment operation in the sub scan direction

[4]

Shelter operation

15ant2c084na

C. Center folding exit operation The folding sub scan alignment exit motor (M8) does not conduct the alignment operation in the sub scan direction in the multi center folding/saddle stitching mode. It conducts the operation only when it exits the paper to the saddle stitching section. M8 drives the folding exit claws to conduct the paper exit operation [2] to the saddle stitching section after a specified period of time since the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) completes the realignment operation in the main scan direction [1] (after the center folding operation). After a specified period of time since the folding sensor /2 (PS44) detects the trailing edge of paper, M8 rotates in low speed [3] and conduct the home position search operation, and then it stops [4] when the folding exit home sensor (PS24) turns ON.

[1] Folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7)

[2]

[3]

[4]

Forward Reverse High speed


Low speed

Reverse

Folding exit home sensor (PS24) Folding sensor /2 (PS44) 15ant2c085na

2-34

[1]

Realignment operation in the main scan direction

[3]

M8 switched to the low speed

[2]

Paper exit operation started

[4]

Stopped at home position



FOLDING SECTION

Guide shaft control

A. Mechanism The guide shaft [2] holds the fold line [4] from the bottom and makes certain of the stack [3] in the saddle stitching section when the folding exit claws [7] exit the folded paper [1] to the saddle stitching section. The guide shaft is projected [5] in sync with the paper exit only when the first folded paper for each set is exited and put away immediately to the folding section [6]. In the subsequent paper exit, the guide shaft does not operate because the paper [3] stacked in the saddle stitching section works as the guide.

[5]

[6]

[7]

[3]

[1]

[2]


[4]

15ant2c027na

[1]

Folded paper

[5]

Projection direction of the guide shaft

[2]

Guide shaft

[6]

Storage direction of the guide shaft

[3]

Stacked paper

[7]

Folding exit claws

[4]

Fold line

2-35


FOLDING SECTION


B. Guide shaft control The guide shaft motor (M25) turns ON [2] and the guide shaft is projected after a specified period of time since the folding main scan alignment motor /Fr (M7) completes the realignment operation in the main scan direction [1] (after the folding operation). The guide shaft conducting the back and forth operation by the belt rotation stops when the guide shaft home sensor (PS46) turns ON [3].



[2]

[3]

Forward Reverse

Guide shaft motor (M25) Guide shaft home sensor (PS46) 15ant2c086na

[1]

Realignment operation in the main scan direction

[2]

Guide shaft projected

[3]

Guide shaft motor (M25) stopped

C. Folding unit lock control During the print operation, the folding unit lock solenoid (SD8) locks the folding unit to prevent the guide shaft or the folding exit claws from damage due to pulling out the folding unit by mistake. When the paper get jammed, the positions of the guide shaft and the folding exit claws are monitored. SD8 turns OFF and releases the lock only when both the folding exit home sensor (PS24) and the guide shaft home sensor (PS46) detect the home position.

2-36



SADDLE STITCHING SECTION

4. SADDLE STITCHING SECTION Composition [3]

[4]

[5]


4.1

[1]

[2]

15ant2c028na

Symbol [1]

Item


Bundle processing section conveyance Arm rotation + paper clip conveyance method

[2]

Clincher method

Clincher up down movement, solenoid clinch method

[3]

Stapler method

Stapler and clincher driven separately by motor

[4]

Stapler movement method

Belt

[5]

Alignment method

Alignment plate

2-37




4.2

Drive

4.2.1

Saddle stitching alignment drive

[7]

[8]

[1]


[6]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[3]

15ant2c029na

[1]

Saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9)

[5]

Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29)

[2]


[6]

Saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16)

[3]

Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28)

[7]

Saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt

[4]

Front side view

[8]

Saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt

4.2.2

Saddle stitching hold drive

[8]

[7]

[1] [6]

[5]

[4]

[2] [3]

2-38

15ant2c030na

[1]

Saddle stitching hold /Up

[5]

Eccentric cam

[2]

Arm

[6]

Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)

[3]

Left side view

[7]

Saddle stitching hold motor (M21)

[4]

Spring

[8]

Stapler




Clincher up down drive

[8]


[7]

[6]

[1]

[2] [5]

[4]

[3]

[1]

Left side view

[5]

Clincher up down motor (M20)

[2]

Roller

[6]

Spring

[3]

Eccentric cam

[7]

Clinchers /Rt, /Lt

[4]

Clincher up down home sensor (PS26)

[8]

Saddle stitching hold /Lw

15ant2c031na

2-39


SADDLE STITCHING SECTION 4.2.4


Stapler/clincher movement drive


[1]

[8]

[2]

[4]

[7]

[3]

[5] [6]

[1] 15ant2c032na

2-40

[1]

Top side view

[5]


[2]

Stapler /Rt

[6]


[3]

Clincher /Rt

[7]

Clincher /Lt

[4]

Front side view

[8]

Stapler /Lt




Stapler/clincher drive

[1]

[2]

[3]

[7]

[5]

[4]

[6]

15ant2c077na

[1]

Stapling arm

[5]

Staple

[2]

Staple bending arm

[6]

Left side view

[3]

Clincher plate

[7]

Eccentric cam

[4]

Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10)

[8]

Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M39)

2-41


[8]




Bundle arm rotation drive


[1]

[7]

[2]

[3]

[6]

[5]

[4]

2-42

15ant2c033na

[1]

Bundle arm

[5]

Guide shaft

[2]

Slide guide

[6]

Fulcrum shaft

[3]

Left side view

[7]

Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31)

[4]

Bundle arm rotation motor (M22)




Bundle arm movement drive

[1]


[3]

[2]

[4] [6]

[5]

15ant2c034na

[1]

Bundle arm

[4]

Bundle arm motor (M10)

[2]

Guide shaft

[5]

Bundle arm home sensor (PS32)

[3]


[6]

Fulcrum shaft

2-43




Bundle arm assist drive

[1]


[5]

[3]

[2] [4]

2-44

15ant2c035na

[1]

Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39)

[4]

Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38)

[2]

Left side view

[5]

Bundle arm assist motor (M26)

[3]

Bundle arm assist plate


bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Bundle clip drive

[10]

[9]


4.2.9


[1]

[8] [7]

[6]

[5] [2] [3]

[4] [1]

Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33)

[6]

Release roller

[2]

Bundle clip motor (M11)

[7]

Wire

[3]

Left side view

[8]

Spring

[4]

Bundle clip lower limit motor (PS30)

[9]

Release plate /Up

[5]

Release plate /Lw

[10]

Clip

15ant2c036na

2-45




4.3

Operation

4.3.1

Saddle stitching alignment control

A. Mechanism In the saddle stitching alignment, the saddle stitching alignment plates /Lt [2] and /Rt [8] align the center folded paper [5] in the sub scan direction. The saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16) [3] drives the saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt [2] in the sub scan direction via the belt by rotating in the forward and reverse directions. The saddle stitching alignment plate II Composition/Operation

/Lt moves to the position for the appropriate paper size when the main body start signal turns ON, and it does not move during the print operation. It return to the position at the saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt (PS29) [4] after the print operation. The saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9) [7] drives the saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt [8] in the sub scan direction via the belt by rotating in the forward and reverse directions. The alignment operation is conducted by M9 by rotating in the forward and reverse directions every time the center folded paper is conveyed. It return to the position at the saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28) [6] after the print operation.

[7]

[8] [1]

[2]

[6]

[3]

[5] [4] [1]


[5]

Paper

[2]

Saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt

[6]

Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Rt (PS28)

[3]

Saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16)

[7]

Saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9)

[4]

Saddle stitching alignment home sensor /Lt

[8]

Saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt

(PS29)

2-46

15ant2c037na




B. Control The saddle stitching alignment motor /Lt (M16) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and the saddle stitching alignment plate /Lt moves to the position for the appropriate paper size [2]. The saddle stitching alignment motor /Rt (M9) rotates in the forward direction and the saddle stitching alignment plate /Rt conducts the preliminary alignment operation [4] when the folding sensor /2 (PS44) at the exit of the folding section detects the trailing edge of the paper [3]. Then, M9 rotates in the forward direction to conduct the alignment operation [5] when the paper is stacked at the stapler position. After a specified period of time, M9 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the saddle stitching alignment plate to its home position and stands For the last paper of the set [7], M9 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the saddle stitching alignment plate to its home position when the saddle stitching press motor (M21) [8] is completed with holding the paper.

[7] Folding sensor /2 (PS44) Saddle stitching Forward alignment motor Reverse /Rt (M9) Saddle stitching Forward alignment motor Reverse /Lt (M16) Saddle stitching press motor (M21)

[1] [2]

[3] [4]

[5]

[6]

[8]

[9] 15ant2c087na

[1]


[6]

Moved to the home position

[2]

Moved for appropriate paper size

[7]

Last paper of the set

[3]

Detected the trailing edge of paper

[8]

Held the paper with the saddle stitching hold

[4]

Preliminary alignment operation

[9]

Moved to the home position

[5]

Alignment operation

2-47


by for the subsequent set [6].




Stapler/clincher movement control

A. Mechanism The staplers/clinchers move to the stapling position in accordance with the paper size. The stapling position is different for every paper size to make the stapling distance half of the paper size. The staplers /Rt [10] and /Lt [8] are fixed to the belt /Up [9] and the clinchers /Rt [2] and /Lt [4] to the belt /Lw [1]. They are moved in the sub scan direction by the stapler movement motor (M15) [5] via the connecting shaft [6]. To prevent the tooth skipping of the belts /Up and /Lw at the maintenance, the gear-shaped rotating knob [7] is provided on the connecting shaft [6]. Rotating the knob, you can manually move the staplers /Rt and /Lt and the II Composition/Operation

clinchers /Rt and /Lt simultaneously.

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[6]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[1]

Belt /Lw

[6]

Connecting shaft

[2]

Clincher /Rt

[7]

Rotating knob

[3]


[8]

Stapler /Lt

[4]

Clincher /Lt

[9]

Belt /Up

[5]


[10]

Stapler /Rt

15ant2c038na

B. Control The stapler movement motor (M15) rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal turns ON and moves the staplers and the clinchers to the position for the appropriate paper size. They go back to their home position at the end of the printing operation.

2-48




Saddle stitching hold control

A. Mechanism The saddle stitching hold is the mechanism to prevent the paper misalignment at stapling. The saddle stitching hold /Up [1] moves down to the saddle stitching hold /Lw [2] at its lower position and hold the center folded paper [3] at the fold line from both up and down. The eccentric cam [5] moves the saddle stitching hold /Up [1] up and down via the arm [6].


[6]

[1]

[5] [2]

[3]

[4]

15ant2c039na

[1]


[4]

Left side view

[2]


[5]

Eccentric cam

[3]

Center folded paper

[6]

Arm

2-49




The saddle stitching hold /Up [6] is enforced by the spring [3] toward the saddle stitching hold /Lw [5]. When the saddle stitching press motor (M21) rotates the eccentric cam [2] via the gear [1], the arm [4] moves along with the shape of the eccentric cam and the saddle stitching hold /Up is lowered by the spring [3]. The saddle stitching hold /Up [6] holding the center folded paper at its lower position is pushed up to its upper position by the saddle stitching hold /Lw [5] during the stapling operation. This allows the paper to be moved from the lower position to the upper position without any misalignment. The saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) [8] detects the home position of the eccentric cam.


[8] [6]

[7]

[1]

[5] [4]

2-50

[3]

[2]

15ant2c040na

[1]

Gear

[5]


[2]

Eccentric cam

[6]


[3]

Spring

[7]


[4]

Arm

[8]

Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)




B. Control (1) Saddle stitching mode At the end of the paper alignment operation [1], the saddle stitching press motor (M21) rotates to move the saddle stitching hold /Up downward [2] and hold the paper between the saddle stitching holds /Up and /Lw. Then, the clincher up down motor (M20) starts rotating and the saddle stitching hold /Up is pushed up by the saddle stitching hold /Lw while holding the paper [3]. M20 rotates in the reverse direction and lowers the saddle stitching hold /Lw [5] when the clinching operation [4] is started. The saddle stitching hold /Up is also lowered by the spring. M21 turns ON and go back the saddle stitching hold /Up to its standby position [6] after a specified

[1]


period of time since the clinching operation is started.

[5]

Saddle stitching Forward alignment motor /Rt (M9) Reverse Clincher up down Forward motor (M20) Reverse Clinchers /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10) Saddle stitching press motor (M21) Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)

[2]

[3]

[4]

[6]

15ant2c088na

[1]

Alignment operation

[4]

Clinching operation

[2]

Saddle stitching hold /Up moved down

[5]

Saddle stitching hold /Lw moved down

[3]

Saddle stitching hold /Lw moved up

[6]

Saddle stitching hold /Up moved up

(2) Multi center folding mode At the end of the paper alignment operation [1], the saddle stitching press motor (M21) rotates to move the saddle stitching hold /Up downward [2] and stack the paper securely. Then, M21 keeps rotating to move the saddle stitching hold /Up upward to its standby position [3].

[1] Saddle stitching Forward alignment motor Reverse /Rt (M9) Saddle stitching press motor (M21) Saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27)

[2] [1]

Alignment operation

[2]

Saddle stitching hold /Up moved down

[3] [3]

15ant2c089na

Saddle stitching hold /Up moved up

2-51




Clincher up down control

A. Mechanism The clincher shelters at the lower position to obtain space between the stapler and the clincher when the paper is conveyed between them. After the alignment operation, the saddle stitching hold /Up [7] moves down and holds the center folded paper [6]. Then the eccentric cam [5] drives the saddle stitching hold /Lw [2] and the clincher [3] to push up the saddle stitching hold /Up [7] to the position where the stapler [1] is positioned while holding the center folded paper.


[1]

[2] [7]

[3]

[6]

[5] [1]

2-52

Stapler

[4] [5]

Left side view

[2]


[6]

Center folded paper

[3]

Clincher

[7]


[4]

Eccentric cam

15ant2c041na




The clincher [7] moves down to the lower position by its own weight and moves upward by the clincher up down motor (M20). The roller [2] attached to the arm [5] is pushed up and the clincher is contacted with the stapler when M20 rotates the eccentric cam [3]. The paper between the clincher and the stapler is hold securely by the spring [6]. Once the stapling operation is completed, M20 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the eccentric cam, and then the clincher moves down by its own weight.

[3]

[4]


[8]

[7]

[6]

[1]

[9] [5] [1]

[2]

[5]

[4]

[3] [2]

Left side view

[6]

Spring

[2]

Roller

[7]

Clinchers /Rt, /Lt

[3]

Eccentric cam

[8]


[4]

Clincher up down home sensor (PS26)

[9]


[5]

Arm

15ant2c042na

2-53




B. Control The clincher moves up or down only in the saddle stitching mode. Once the saddle stitching press motor (M21) moves down the saddle stitching hold /Up [1], the clincher up down motor (M20) rotates in the forward direction to move up the clinchers /Rt and /Lt and the saddle stitching hold /Lw [2]. M20 is stopped when the clincher up down home sensor (PS26) turns ON. M20 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the clinchers /Rt and /Lt and the saddle stitching hold /Lw when the clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) starts the clinching operation [4]. They are stopped at the


lower position [5] when PS26 turns OFF.

[2] Clincher up down motor (M20)

[3]

[5]

Forward Reverse

Clincher up down home sensor (PS26) Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10) Saddle stitching press motor (M21)

[1]

15ant2c090na

[1]

Saddle stitching hold /Up stopped at lower position

[4]

Clinching operation

[2]

Clinchers /Rt and /Lt moved up

[5]

Clinchers /Rt and /Lt stopped at lower position

[3]

Clinchers /Rt and /Lt stopped at the upper position

2-54

[4]




Stapler control

A. Mechanism The stapler operation is conducted by the stapler motors /Rt (M29) and /Lt (M30) [10] and the clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) [5]. The stapler operation is detected by the stapler home sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) [8] and the clincher start sensors /Rt (HS2) and /Lt (HS4) [11]. HS1, HS2, HS3, and HS4 are hall element sensors and control the position of the magnet [12] of the rotating eccentric cam [9]. M29 and M30 [10] drive the staple bending arm [3] and the stapling arm [2] via the eccentric cam [9]. The staple Then the SD9 and SD10 bend the staple by driving the clincher plate [4]. The stapling operation is completed by these operations. The staple empty switches /Rt (SW1) and /Lt (SW2) [7] detect whether the staple or cartridge is set or not.

[11]

[10]

[12]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[9]

[8]

[7]

[6]

[5]

15ant2c091na

[1]


[8]

Stapler home sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3)

[2]

Stapling arm

[9]

Eccentric cam

[3]

Staple bending arm

[10]

Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M30)

[4]

Clincher plate

[11]

Clincher start sensors /Rt (HS2) and /Lt (HS4)

[5]

Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10)

[12]

Magnet

[6]

Staple

[7]

Staple empty switches /Rt (SW1) and /Lt (SW2)

2-55


bending arm bends the rolled staple [6] into the U-shape and the stapling arm staples it toward the clincher.




B. Control (1) Stapling control The stapler motors /Rt (M29) and /Lt (30) start the stapling operation [2] when the clincher up down home sensor (PS26) detects that the clinchers /Rt and /Lt are contacted with the stapler unit [1]. The clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9) and /Lt (SD10) bend the staple and the stapling operation is completed when the clincher start sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) in the stapler unit turn ON [3]. M29 and M30 stop and return to the home position [4] when the stapler home sensors /Rt (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) detects the home position.


[1] Clincher up down home sensor (PS26) Stapler motors /Rt (M29), /Lt (M30) Clincher solenoids /Rt (SD9), /Lt (SD10) Stapler home sensors (HS1) and /Lt (HS3) Clincher start sensors /Rt (HS2) and /Lt (HS4)

[2] [3]

[4]

[1]

Clincher contacted

[3]

Clinching operation

[2]

Stapling operation

[4]

Returned to the home position

15ant2c092na

(2) Staple and cartridge detection When the remaining amount of the staple becomes 20 or the cartridge is not set, the staple empty switches /Rt (SW1) and /Lt (SW2) turn ON and the main body displays the message on its operation panel.

2-56




Bundle arm control

The bundle arm [4] rotates and moves in the sub scan direction. It rotates to convey the paper from the stapling section to the bundle clip section and moves in the sub scan direction to catch/release the paper. In the multi center folding mode, the bundle arm rotates to the stapling position after the last paper of the set is conveyed. In the saddle stitching mode, it rotates after the stapling operation. By moving the bundle arm, the tip of the bundle arm is inserted under the fold line of the paper and the paper is caught [1]. moves in the outside of the sub scan direction and releases the paper [3] when the bundle clip holds the paper at the folding side.

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

15ant2c043na

[1]

Paper catch

[3]

Paper release

[2]

Conveyance

[4]

Bundle arm

2-57


The caught paper is conveyed to the bundle clip section [2] by the rotation of the bundle arm. The bundle arm




A. Bundle arm movement mechanism The bundle arm [5] driven by the bundle arm motor (M10) [6] to catch/release the paper [4] in the sub scan direction via the belt. The bundle arm home sensor (PS32) [1] detects the home position of the bundle arm.

[4]

[5]

[6]


[1]

[2] [3]

2-58

15ant2c044na

[1]

Bundle arm home sensor (PS32)

[4]

Paper

[2]


[5]

Bundle arm

[3]

Guide shaft

[6]

Bundle arm motor (M10)




B. Bundle arm rotation mechanism The bundle arm rotation motor (M22) [2] drives the bundle arm [8] via the belt, slide guide [5], and guide shaft [6]. When M22 drives the slide guide [5] in the main scan direction, the guide shaft [6] passing through the long hole of the slide guide is rotated, and then the bundle arm [8] is rotated around the fulcrum. When it is driven to the paper [3] side, M22 stops where the ring [7] is contacted with the guide plate [4]. The bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) [9] detects the home position of the bundle arm.

[9]


[6]

[5] [1]

[2]

[3]

[8]

[1] [4]

[7]

[6]

[5]

15ant2c045na

[1]


[6]

Guide shaft

[2]


[7]

Ring

[3]

Paper

[8]

Bundle arm

[4]

Guide plate

[9]

Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31)

[5]

Slide guide

2-59




In the rotation drive of the bundle arm [8], the slide guide [5] has to be overrun to be sure to make the ring [7] of the bundle arm contact with the guide plate [6]. To prevent any parts from damage due to the overrun, the guide shaft [3] can be moved by the shock absorbing guide [4] and the spring [2].


[8]

[1]

[7]

[2] [6]

[5]

[3]

[4] 15ant2c046na

2-60

[1]


[5]

Slide guide

[2]

Spring

[6]

Guide plate

[3]

Guide shaft

[7]

Ring

[4]

Shock absorbing guide

[8]

Bundle arm



C. Bundle arm control The bundle arm motor (M10) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON and moves the bundle arm to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size. The bundle arm rotation motor (M22) rotates in the forward direction to rotate the bundle arm to the stapling section [3] after a specified period of time since the folding sensor /2 (PS44) detects the trailing edge of paper of the last set. It stops the bundle arm in an upright position [4] when the bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) turns OFF. Then, M22 rotates again [5] to drive the bundle arm until it is contacted with the guide plate on the stapling section [6]. The timing for M22 to restart the rotation [5] is different between in the multi center folding mode and in the saddle stitching mode. • Multi center folding mode: When the saddle stitching press home sensor (PS27) detects the saddle stitching hold /Up has been moved to the its upper position. • Saddle stitching mode: After a specified period of time since the clincher up down home sensor (PS26) detects that the clinchers are contacted with the staplers. M10 inserts the tip of the bundle arm under the fold line of the paper [7] when the bundle arm assist motor (M26) starts the assisting operation by pushing up the trailing edge of paper at the back side and M10 stops after a specified period of time [8]. M22 rotates in the reverse direction to convey the paper to the bundle clip section when M10 stops [8]. It stops after a specified period of time since PS31 turns ON. M10 rotates in the forward direction to pull out the bundle arm from the paper and take shelter it from the conveyance path [11] after a specified period of time since the bundle clip starts to catch the paper [10]. M10 stops when the bundle arm home sensor (PS32) turns ON [12]. M10 rotates in the reverse direction to go back the bundle arm to its standby position [13] for the subsequent set after a specified period of time since it stops.

[9]

[14]

[11] [12][13]

Folding sensor /2 (PS44) Bundle arm assist motor (M26) Clincher up down home sensor (PS26) Bundle arm motor (M10)

Forward


Forward

Reverse

Reverse

Bundle arm rotation home sensor (PS31) Bundle arm home sensor (PS32) Bundle clip motor (M11)

Forward Reverse

[1][2] [1]

[3]


[4] [5] [8]

[6][7] [8]

[10]

15ant2c093na

Insertion completed and conveyance started

[2]

Bundle arm moved in accordance with the paper size

[9]

Conveyance completed

[3]

Bundle arm started to rotate

[10]

Paper clip caught paper

[4]

Bundle arm stopped in an upright position

[11]

Bundle arm shelter operation

[5]

Bundle arm restarted to rotate

[12]

Shelter completed

[6]

Bundle arm contacted with the guide plate

[13]

Bundle arm moved for the subsequent set

[7]

Bundle arm inserted under the fold line

[14]

Time chart of the saddle stitching mode

2-61






Bundle arm assist control

A. Mechanism The bundle arm assist mechanism is the mechanism to assist the paper conveyance of the bundle arm rotation drive to be conducted without fault. It pushes up the fore edge side of the paper [6] with the bundle arm assist plate [4] to tilt it to the front. The bundle arm assist motor (M26) [2] drives the bundle arm plate [4] via the belt. The bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) [1] detects the upper home position and the bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38) [3] detects the lower home position. II Composition/Operation

The bundle arm assist plate [4] waits at the position 5 mm below the fore edge side of the paper during standby. To keep the error to a minimum, the small size paper (313 mm or less) and the large size paper (314 mm or more) are moved to the standby position from the position of PS39 and PS38 respectively since the standby position for the paper is positioned by the driving time of M26 (DC brush motor). In the bundle arm assist operation, the fore edge side of the paper is pushed up 35 mm (or until PS39 turns ON).

[6]

[1]

[2] [5]

[4]

[3] 15ant2c065na

2-62

[1]

Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39)

[4]

Bundle arm assist plate

[2]

Bundle arm assist motor (M26)

[5]


[3]

Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38)

[6]

Paper




B. Control (1) Small size paper (313 mm or less) For the small size paper, the bundle arm assist motor (M26) rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON to drive the bundle arm assist plate at the home position to the position at the bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) [2]. After a specified period of time, M26 rotates in the reverse direction to drive the bundle arm assist plate from the upper limit position to the standby position in accordance with the paper size [3] and stands by for the paper. Then, M26 rotates in the forward direction to push up the fore edge side of the paper [6] for assisting the bundle multi center folding mode and in the saddle stitching mode. • Multi center folding mode: When the bundle arm is contacted with the guide plate of the stapler section [4] by the bundle arm rotation motor (M22). • Saddle stitching mode: When the clincher moves downward [5] at the end of the stapling operation. M26 rotates in the forward direction to assist the bundle arm to convey the paper [7] after a specified period. Then the bundle arm assist plate is go back to the standby position and stands by for the subsequent set [8].

[2] Bundle arm assist motor (M26)

[3]

[6]

[9]

[7]

[8]

Forward Reverse

Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38) Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) Clincher up down motor (M20)

Forward


Forward

Reverse

Reverse

[1]

[4]

[5]

15ant2c095na

[1]


[6]

Assist of the insertion of the bundle arm

[2]

Movement to the upper limit

[7]

Assist of the bundle arm conveyance

[3]

Bundle arm moved in accordance with the

[8]

Bundle arm moved in accordance with the

paper size [4]


[5]

Clincher moved down

paper size [9]


2-63


arm to be inserted under the fold line of the paper. The operation timing [6] of M26 is different between in the




(2) Large size paper (314 mm or more) For the large size paper, the bundle arm assist motor (M26) rotates in the forward direction when the main body start signal [1] turns ON to drive the bundle arm assist plate to the standby position in accordance with the paper size [2] and stands by for the paper. The subsequent operation is conducted in the same manner as for the small size paper.

[2]

[5]

[8]

[6]

[7]


Bundle arm assist Forward motor (M26) Reverse Bundle arm assist home sensor (PS38) Bundle arm assist upper limit sensor (PS39) Clincher up down motor (M20)

Forward


Forward

Reverse

Reverse

[1]

[3]

15ant2c096na

[1]


[5]

Assist of the insertion of the bundle arm

[2]


[6]

Assist of the bundle arm conveyance

[3]


[7]

[4]

Clincher moved down


[8]

2-64

[4]





Bundle clip control

A. Mechanism The bundle clip is the mechanism to hold the paper that the bundle arm conveyed to the slope and convey the paper to the bundle press stage with its fore edge side to the trimmer section. The bundle clip catches, releases, and conveys the paper. It catches the paper at the upper limit position [1],


conveys it [2], and then release it at the lower limit position [3].

[1]

[2]

[3] [1]

Catching

[2]

Conveying

15ant2c047na

[3]

Releasing

2-65




The bundle clip motor (M11) [5] drives the bundle clip [1] up [8] and down [7] via the gear and belt. The spring [9] provides the bundle clip the force to catch the paper, and the wire [2] and the winding shaft [3] open the bundle clip to release the paper. The upper limit of the bundle clip is detected by the bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) [4] and the lower limit is detected by the bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30) [6].

[1]


[9]

[2]

[3]

[8]

2-66

[7]

[4]

[6]

[5]

15ant2c048na

[1]

Bundle clip

[6]

Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30)

[2]

Wire

[7]

Down

[3]

Winding shaft

[8]

Up

[4]

Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33)

[9]

Spring

[5]

Bundle clip motor (M11)




The bundle clip is closed all the time except when it is located at the upper and lower limit position. When the bundle clip moves up [1], the release roller /Up [6] gets onto [7] the release plate /Up [8]. Then the wire winding shaft [4] rotates [3] and takes up the wire [5] to open the bundle clip. In the same way, when the bundle clip moves down [2], the release roller /Lw [10] gets onto [12] the release plate /Lw [11] and then the wire winding shaft [4] rotates [9] and takes up the wire [5] to open the bundle clip.

[6]

[7]


[5]

[1]

[10]

[4]

[3]

[5]

[12] [1]

[11]

[10]

Up

[4]

[2]

[9]

[1]

15ant2c049na

[7]

Getting over at up

[2]

Down

[8]

Release plate /Up

[3]

Wire winding rotation

[9]

Wire winding rotation

[4]

Wire winding shaft

[10]

Release roller /Lw

[5]

Wire

[11]

Release plate /Lw

[6]

Release roller /Up

[12]

Getting over at down

2-67




B. Control The bundle clip motor (M11) rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle clip until the bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) turns ON [2] after a specified period of time since the bundle assist motor (M26) starts the assisting operation [1]. Then, the bundle clip stops with its clip opened. The bundle arm conveys the paper from the stapling section to the bundle clip section, and then the bundle arm rotation motor (M22) stops [3]. After a specified period of time, M11 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle clip and close the bundle clip to catch the paper, and then M11 stops after a specified period of time [4] II Composition/Operation

When the bundle arm motor (M10) completes the shelter operation [5], M11 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle clip [6]. The bundle clip opens the clip to release the paper [7] and M11 stops when the bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30) turns ON. M11 rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle clip after a specified period of time since M11 stops. Then, M11 stops to move the bundle clip at the standby position for the subsequent set after a specified period of time since PS30 turns OFF [8].

[3] Bundle arm motor (M10)

Forward


Forward

[5]

[8]

Reverse

Reverse

Bundle arm assist motor (M26) Bundle clip motor (M11)

Forward Reverse

Bundle clip upper limit sensor (PS33) Bundle clip lower limit motor (PS30)

[1]

[2]

[4]

15ant2c099na

[1]

Assisting operation by the bundle arm

[5]

Bundle arm shelter operation

[2]

Bundle clip opened

[6]

Conveyed by the bundle clip

[3]

Paper conveyance by the bundle arm completed

[7]

Paper released

[4]

Paper caught

[8]

Returned to the standby position for the subsequent set

2-68

[6] [7]



BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION

5. BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION 5.1

Composition [9]

[10] [1] II Composition/Operation

[8]

[2]

[7]

[6]

[3]

[5] Symbol

[4] Item

15ant2c050na


[1]

Registration method /1

Belt with claw

[2]

Bundle exit tray paper full detection method Photo sensor

[3]

Bundle exit conveyance method

Conveyance belt + extendable tray (2 step)

[4]

Trimmer scraps storage method

Drawer + storage detection sensor

[5]

Trimmer scraps press method

Press plate

[6]

Trimmer scraps full detection method

Photo sensor

[7]

Trimmer scraps removal method

Fan exhaust

[8]

Registration method /2

Registration plate

[9]

Press stage up down method

Wire

[10]

Bundle press method

Spring + wire

2-69




5.2

Drive

5.2.1

Bundle press stage up down drive


[10]

[11]

[12]

[13]

[1]

[9]

[2]

[8] [7]

[3] [6] [4] [5] 15ant2c051na

2-70

[1]

Bundle registration plate

[8]

Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35)

[2]

Bundle registration plate wire

[9]

Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45)

[3]

Up down wire

[10]

Bundle press stage up down motor (M24)

[4]

Bundle press stage

[11]

Over-winding-prevention stopper

[5]


[12]

Wire winding shaft

[6]

Bundle exit auxiliary roller

[13]

Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)

[7]

Knob




Bundle press movement drive


[1]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

15ant2c052na

[1]

Bundle press

[4]

Left side view

[2]

Bundle press movement home sensor (PS36)

[5]

Bundle press movement motor (M17)

[3]

Bundle press stage

5.2.3

Bundle registration drive

[1] [6]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

15ant2c053na

[1]

Exit claw

[4]

Registration press claw

[2]

Left side view

[5]

Bundle registration home sensor (PS34)

[3]

Bundle press stage

[6]

Bundle registration motor (M12)

2-71


BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION 5.2.4


Bundle press drive

[9]


[1]

[8]

[7]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[6] 15ant2c054na

2-72

[1]

Press plate

[6]


[2]

Release wire /Rt

[7]

Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47)

[3]

Wire winding shaft

[8]

Bundle press home sensor (PS37)

[4]

Bundle press motor (M23)

[9]

Spring

[5]

Release wire /Lt




Bundle exit drive

[1]

[11]

[10]

[9] [2]

[8]

[7]

[6]

[5]

[4] [7]

[3]

15ant2c055na

[1]

Bundle exit conveyance belt

One-way clutch (for the bundle exit convey-

[2]

Left side view

[3]

Bundle exit drive belt

[8]

Trimmer scraps press plate

[4]

Trimmer scraps press claw

[9]

Pin (homeward)

[5]

Belt

[10]

Scraps press home sensor (PS48)

[6]

Bundle exit motor (M5)

[11]

Pin (outward)

[12]

One-way clutch (for pressing the trimmer

ance belt)

scraps)

2-73


[12]




5.3

Operation

5.3.1

Bundle press stage up down control

The bundle press stage conducts the up and down operation to convey and exit the paper by the switch back method. The bundle press stage is moved up [7] to decrease the angle difference when receiving the paper [8] conveyed by the bundle clip from the slope [1]. The bundle press stage exits the paper [5] to the bundle exit tray at the horizontal position [4] at the paper exit. II Composition/Operation

The bundle registration plate [6] and the bundle exit auxiliary roller [3] move up and down together with the up and down operation of the bundle press stage.

[7]

[8]

[1] [2]

[3]

[6]

[5]

[4]

15ant2c057na

[1]

Slope

[5]

Paper path at the paper exit

[2]


[6]


[3]


[7]

Bundle press stage (upper position)

[4]

Bundle press stage (horizontal position)

[8]

Paper path to the bundle press stage

The registration claw [3] pushes in the paper to make sure that the paper is conveyed to the bundle press stage when the bundle press stage [4] receives the paper from the bundle clip [6].

[5]

[6] [1]

[2]

[4]

2-74

[3]

15ant2c061na

[1]

Slope

[4]

Bundle press stage

[2]


[5]

Paper conveyance

[3]

Registration claw

[6]

Bundle clip




A. Mechanism The bundle press stage up down motor (M24) [12] rotates the wire winding shaft [14] and winds up the up down wire [3]. During the initial phase, the wire is tightened and the wire arm [4] comes to the horizontal position but the bundle press stage [5] doesn't move up. At the time, as the wire arm comes horizontal, the up down wire is loosen and the bundle registration plate [1] moves down and works as the stopper against the registration operation. Then, the bundle press stage moves up as the wire winding shaft [14] rotates and winds up the up down wire [3] and it stops when the bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) [11] turns ON. by the bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16) [15] and the bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) [10] respectively. The over-winding-prevention stopper [13] prevents the over winding since you can move up and down the bundle press stage manually by rotating the knob [9].

[12]

[13]

[14]

[15]

[1]

[11]

[2]

[10] [9]

[3]

[4]

[5] [7]

[1]

[8]

[6]

15ant2c056na


[9]

Knob

[2]

Bundle registration plate wire

[10]

Bundle press stage up down home sensor

[3]

Up down wire

[4]

Wire arm

[11]

Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45)

[5]

Bundle press stage

[12]

Bundle press stage up down motor (M24)

[6]

Bundle exit auxiliary roller arm

[13]

Over-winding-prevention stopper

[7]


[14]

Wire winding shaft

[8]


[15]

Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)

(PS35)

2-75


The home positions (shelter position) for the bundle registration plate and the bundle press stage are detected




B. Control (1) Trimming mode The bundle press stage up down motor (M24) rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle press stage [2] when the main body start signal [1] turns ON. M24 stops while holding the bundle press stage in slanting position when the bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) turns ON [3]. M24 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle press stage [5] after the bundle clip releases the paper, the bundle registration motor (M12) assists the paper conveyance operation, and the bundle press movement motor (M17) conveys the paper to the paper conveyance position [4]. M24 stops when the bundle press II Composition/Operation

stage up down home sensor (PS35) turns ON [6]. M24 starts to rotate in the forward direction and moves up the bundle registration plate [8] to open the paper path to the trimmer section when the bundle press motor (M23) completes the paper press operation after the registration operation. M24 moves up the bundle press stage [10] for the subsequent set when M12 completes the paper exit [9].

[7] Bundle press movement motor (M17)

Forward


Forward

[9]

*

Reverse

Reverse

Bundle registra- Forward tion motor Reverse (M12) Bundle press stage up down motor (M24)

Forward Reverse

Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)

[1] [2] [3]

[4][5][6]

[8]

15ant2c100na

[1]


[7]

Paper press completed

[2]

Bundle press stage moved up

[8]

Bundle registration plate moved up

[3]

Stopped at the upper limit

[9]

Paper exit completed

[4]

Paper conveyance assisting operation completed

[10]


[5]

Bundle press stage moved down

[6]

Returning to the home position

* Only for the paper of 297 mm or more (before folding)

2-76

[10]




(2) No trimming mode The bundle press stage up down motor (M24) rotates in the forward direction to move up the bundle press stage [2] when the main body start signal [1] turns ON. M24 stops while holding the bundle press stage in slanting position when the bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) turns ON [3]. M24 rotates in the reverse direction to move down the bundle press stage [5] after the bundle clip releases the paper, the bundle registration motor (M12) assists the paper conveyance operation, and the bundle press movement motor (M17) conveys the paper to the paper conveyance position [4]. M24 stops when the bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) turns ON [6]. II Composition/Operation

M24 moves up the bundle press stage [8] for the subsequent set when M12 completes the paper exit [7].

[7] Bundle press movement motor (M17)

Forward


Forward

*

Reverse

Reverse

Bundle registra- Forward tion motor (M12) Reverse Bundle press stage up down motor (M24)

Forward Reverse

Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) Bundle press stage up down limit sensor (PS45) Bundle registration plate home sensor (PS16)

[1] [2] [3]

[4][5][6]

[8]

[1]


[6]


[2]


[7]

Paper exit completed

[3]

Stopped at the upper limit

[8]


[4]

Paper conveyance assisting operation completed

[5]


15ant2c101na


2-77


BUNDLE PROCESSING SECTION 5.3.2


Bundle press movement control

The bundle press movement is the mechanism to convey the paper to the trimmer section by pressing the paper with the press section to prevent the trimming skew at the trimmer operation after the paper registration operation. A. Mechanism The bundle press movement motor (M17) drives the bundle press section [9] in the main scan direction. When receiving the paper with the bundle press stage [2], the bundle press section [9] moves 100 mm backII Composition/Operation

ward from the home position to obtain the paper conveyance path. When conducting the bundle registration operation, the bundle press section moves to the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size. The bundle press movement home sensor (PS36) [3] detects the home position of the bundle press section. When the bundle press section moves to the home position, the metal plate [7] gets down the actuator [6] for the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) [8] and obtains the paper conveyance path. The bundle sensor /4 (PS54) [10] is for the paper jam detection.

[9]

[8]

[10]

[1]

[8]

[6] [5]

[7] [6]

2-78

[4]

[3]

[2] 15ant2c058na

[1]

Actuator

[6]

Actuator

[2]

Bundle press stage

[7]

Metal plate

[3]


[8]

Trimmer registration sensor (PS55)

[4]

Actuator

[9]

Bundle press section

[5]


[10]

Bundle sensor /4 (PS54)




B. Control (1) Trimming mode The bundle press movement motor (M17) rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle press section to the paper conveyance position [2] after specified period of time since the bundle clip motor (M11) starts conveying the paper [1]. Then M17 rotates in the forward direction to move the bundle press section to the appropriate press standby position in accordance with the paper size [3]. M17 rotates in the reverse direction and searches for the press position [6] for the paper when the bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) detects that the bundle press stage has been moved down [5]. M17 stops of time since the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) turns OFF. M17 searches the home position [8] and then moves the bundle press section to the paper trimming position [9] after a specified period of time since the bundle press motor (M23) completes the paper press operation. The bundle press section is returned to the home position [10] after a specified period of time since the trimming operation is completed.

[1] Bundle clip motor (M11)

Forward


Forward


Forward

[2] [3] [4][6] [7]

[8] [9]

[10]

Reverse

*

Reverse

Reverse


Trimmer registration sensor (PS55) Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) Trimmer blade motor (M31)

[5] [1]

15ant2c102na


[7]

Stopped at the press position

[2]

Moved to the paper conveyance position

[8]

Searching the home position

[3]

Moved to the press standby position

[9]

Moved to the trimming position

[4]

Home position detected

[10]


[5]


[6]

Searching the press position


2-79


the bundle press section at the appropriate position in accordance with the paper size [7] after a specified period




(2) No trimming mode The bundle press movement motor (M17) rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle press section to the paper conveyance position [2] after a specified period of time since the bundle clip motor (M11) starts conveying the paper [1]. Then M17 rotates in the forward direction to move the bundle press section to the appropriate press position in accordance with the paper size [3]. M17 rotates in the forward direction to return the bundle press section to the home position [5] when the bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35) detects that the bundle press stage has been moved down [4].


[1] Bundle clip motor (M11)

Forward


Forward

[2]

[3]

[5]

Reverse

*

Reverse


Bundle press stage up down home sensor (PS35)

[4] [1]


[4]

Bundle press stage up down home position

[2]

Moved to the shelter position

[5]


[3]

Moved to the press position


2-80

15ant2c103na




Bundle press control

The bundle press is the mechanism to hold the paper during trim operation to prevent the trimming skew after the paper registration operation. A. Mechanism The bundle press plates /Up [1] and /Lw [15] hold the paper. The bundle press plate /Up is pulled to the bundle press plate /Lw [15] (to the direction to hold and press the paper) by the spring [13] via the press wires /Rt [2] and /Lt [12]. The bundle press plate /UP [1] moves down by the spring [13] when the wire winding shaft [4] is the spring presses the paper. When M23 keeps rotating, the press wire /Lt [6] is loosen and the bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) [8] turns OFF by the actuator [9] due to the spring [10], and then the paper press position is detected. The wire winding shaft [4] winds the release wires /Rt [3] and /Lt [6] to move up the bundle press plate /Up [1] for releasing the press on the paper [16] when M23 rotates in reverse. The bundle press home sensor (PS37) [11] detects the home position of the bundle press plate /Up [1].

[12]

[13]

[1] [11]

[10] [2] [6] [3]

[9] [8]

[7]

[5]

[4]

[14]

[16]

[15] 15ant2c059na

[1]

Bundle press plate /Up

[9]

Actuator

[2]

Press wire /Rt

[10]

Spring

[3]

Release wire /Rt

[11]

Bundle press home sensor (PS37)

[4]

Wire winding shaft

[12]

Press wire /Lt

[5]


[13]

Spring

[6]

Release wire /Lt

[14]

Bundle press plate /Up (down)

[7]


[15]

Bundle press plate /Lw

[8]

Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47)

[16]

Bundle press plate /Up (up)

2-81


rotated by the bundle press motor (M23) [5] and the release wires /Rt [3] and /Lt [6] are released. The force of




B. Control The bundle press motor (M23) rotates in the forward direction to conduct the paper press operation [2] to press the paper properly when the bundle press movement motor (M17) completes the press position search [1]. M23 rotates in the reverse direction to move up the bundle press plate /Up slightly to prevent the paper from becoming loose [4] when the bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) detects the lower limit [3] and turns OFF. M23 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper [5] after a specified period of time since the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) detects the completion of the registration operation. M23 rotates in the reverse direction to return the bundle press plate /Up to the home position [7] when the trimII Composition/Operation

mer blade motor (M31) completes the paper trimming operation [6].

[1][2] Bundle press movement motor (M17) Bundle press motor (M23)

[5]

[7]

Forward Reverse Forward Reverse

Trimmer registration sensor (PS55) Bundle press home sensor (PS37)

Bundle press lower limit sensor (PS47) Trimmer blade motor (M31)

[3][4] [1]

2-82

Searching the press position completed

[6] [5]

Press

[2]

Press operation

[6]

Trimming completed

[3]

Lower limit detected

[7]


[4]

Press release

15ant2c105na




Bundle registration control

The paper registration operation reforms the skew at trimming. A. Mechanism The bundle registration motor (M12) drives the registration claws [4]. Two registration claws [4] conduct the registration by making the paper [14] contact [3] with the bundle registration plate [13] from the gutter side. In the registration operation, the bundle press section [7] conducts the pressing by moving to the appropriate the paper until the actuator [2] on the bundle press section comes in the upright position and the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) [1] turns ON. The bundle exit claws [9] are located at the 180° opposite to the registration claws on the belt. M12 rotates in the reverse direction [10] to exit the paper at the paper exit. The home position of the registration claws [4] is detected when the registration claws push the actuator [11] and turns ON the bundle registration home sensor (PS34) [12].

[14]

[1]

[2]

[13] [3] [4]

[12] [11]

[10]

[9]

[8]

[7]

[6]

[5] 15ant2c060na

[1]

Trimmer registration sensor (PS55)

[8]


[2]

Actuator

[9]

Bundle exit claws

[3]

Registration direction

[10]

Drive direction of the bundle exit tabs

[4]

Registration claws

[11]

Actuator

[5]

Left side view

[12]

Bundle registration home sensor (PS34)

[6]


[13]


[7]

Bundle press section

[14]

Paper

2-83


position in accordance with the paper size. To conduct the bundle registration, the registration claws [4] press




B. Control The bundle registration motor (M12) rotates in the reverse direction when the main body start signal turns ON and the registration claws move to the standby position in accordance with the paper size [2]. The bundle registration motor (M12) rotates in the reverse direction to conduct the paper conveyance assisting operation [4] and the preregistration operation [5] after a specified period of time since the bundle clip motor (M11) starts conveying the paper [3]. Then M12 stops when the registration claws reach at the specified position. M12 rotates in the reverse direction and conducts the registration operation [7] with the registration claws when II Composition/Operation

the bundle press motor (M23) completes the press releasing operation [6]. The registration claws stop when the trimmer registration sensor (PS55) turns ON [8]. M12 rotates in the forward direction to move the registration claws to the specified shelter position [10] when M23 completes the press operation [9]. M12 rotates in the forward direction to let the bundle exit claws push the paper to conduct the paper exit operation [12] after a specified period of time since the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes the trimming operation [11]. M12 stops when the bundle registration home sensor (PS34) turns ON [13]. M12 rotates in the reverse direction to move the bundle exit claws to the standby position [14] after a specified period of time. Then it stands by for the subsequent set.

[2] Bundle clip motor (M11) Bundle press motor (M23)

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[9][10]

[12]

[14]


Bundle registra- Forward tion motor Reverse (M12) Trimmer registration sensor (PS55)

Trimmer blade motor (M31) Bundle registration home sensor (PS34)

[1]

2-84

[7] [8]

[11]

[13] 15ant2c106 na

[1]


[8]

Registration operation completed

[2]

Moved to the standby position

[9]

Paper press completed

[3]

Conveyance by the bundle clip started

[10]

Shelter operation

[4]

Paper conveyance assisted

[11]

Trimming completed

[5]

Pre-registration

[12]

Paper exit operation

[6]

Press release

[13]


[7]

Registration

[14]

Moved to the standby position




Bundle exit control

A. Mechanism (1) Bundle exit mechanism The paper is exited to the bundle exit tray [12]. The paper exited to the bundle exit tray is conveyed to the front by the bundle exit conveyance belt [1] and stacked. The bundle exit motor (M5) [5] drives the bundle exit conveyance belt [1] via the bundle exit drive belt [4] and the bundle exit belt drive shaft [3]. every paper exit. The bundle exit tray is expandable. The bundle tray set sensor (PS58) [9] detects whether the bundle exit tray is stored or not. M5 also drives the scrap press plate [11]. In each drive path from M5 to the bundle exit drive belt and the scraps press plate, there is a one-way clutch respectively that switches the rotational direction of M5. Therefore, the bundle exit drive and the scraps press plate are not driven simultaneously.

[12]

[13]

[1] [2] [11]

[3]

[10]

[4] [9]

[5]

[8] [6] [7] [8]

15ant2c062na

[1]

Bundle exit conveyance belt

Scrap press claws

[2]


[9]

Bundle tray set sensor (PS58)

[3]

Bundle exit belt drive shaft

[10]

Trimmer scraps full sensor (PS41)

[4]


[11]

Scraps press plate

[5]


[12]

Bundle exit tray

[6]


[13]


[7]

Scraps box set sensor (PS40)

2-85


M5 drives the bundle exit conveyance belt for a specified period of time to convey the paper to the front [13] for




(2) Bundle exit tray expanding mechanism The bundle exit tray is expandable. The folded bundle exit conveyance belt [6] is also expanded [1] when the bundle exit tray is expanded. At the time, it also moves the bundle exit conveyance belt drive shaft [5] for the bundle exit conveyance belt [1] and [6].

[5]


[6]

[4] [3] [1]

[2] 15ant2c063na

2-86

[1]

Bundle exit conveyance belt (expanded)

[4]


[2]

Folding stand

[5]

Bundle exit conveyance belt drive shaft

[3]

Drive shaft

[6]

Bundle exit conveyance belt (folded)




(3) Trimmer scraps press mechanism In the trimmer scraps press, the bundle exit motor (M5) drives the outward pin [10] via the press claws [9] to move the scraps press plate [5] to the front and press the trimmer scraps. When the belt [6] rotates and the scraps press claws [9] pass the maximum movement position [12], the scraps press claws comes off the pin [10] for the onward route and the scraps press plate returns to the home position [5] by the return auxiliary spring [11]. When it is not brought back to the home position by the return auxiliary spring [11], the scraps press claws drive the pin [2] for the homeward route. The distance from the maximum movement position [12] to the home position [5] is 200 mm.

[11]

[10]


The scraps press home sensor (PS48) [8] detects the home position of the scraps press claws [9].

[12]

[9]

[8] [1] [7]

[6]

[5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

15ant2c064na

[1]


[7]

Drive shaft

[2]

Homeward pin

[8]


[3]

Scraps box

[9]

Scrap press claws

[4]

Left side view

[10]

Outward pin

[5]

Scraps press plate (home position)

[11]

Return auxiliary spring

[6]

Belt

[12]

Scraps press plate (maximum movement position)

2-87




B. Trimmer scraps removal control The scraps removal fan (FM1) [3] blows air [4] to make sure to put the trimmer scraps to the scraps box.


[5]

[4]

[6]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Left side view

[4]

Air

[2]

Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30)

[5]

Bundle press

[3]

Trimmer scraps removal fan (FM1)

[6]

Bundle clip

[1]

15ant2c115na

The trimmer scraps removal fan (FM1) operates only in the trimmer mode. When the main body start signal [1] turns ON, FM1 is rotated and the bundle clip releases [2] the paper, FM1 stops for a time to prevent the paper from having the uneven edge. When the bundle press motor (M23) completes the paper press [3], FM1 is rotated again to send air so that sheet trimming scraps get in the scraps box without fail.


Forward Reverse

Trimmer scraps removal fan (FM1) Bundle clip lower limit sensor (PS30)

[1]

2-88

[1]


[2]

Bundle clip released the paper

[2]

[3] [3]

15ant2c116na

Paper press operation completed




C. Bundle exit control The bundle exit motor (M5) rotates in the forward direction and the bundle exit conveyance belt conveys the exit paper [2] after a specified period of time since the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes the trimming [1]. M5 stops after a specified period of time since the bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57) detects the trailing edge of paper[3].

[2] Forward Reverse

Trimmer blade motor (M31) Bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57)

[1] [1]

Trimming completed

[2]

Bundle exit conveyance

[3] [3]

[1] [1]

15ant2c107na

Trailing edge of paper detected

15ant2c114na

Bundle exit sensor /2 (PS57)

2-89






D. Trimmer scraps press control The bundle exit motor (M5) rotates in the reverse direction to conduct the paper press operation [2] after a specified period of time since the bundle exit motor (M5) completes the paper exit and M5 stops [1]. Then, M5 stops when the belt goes around and the scraps press home sensor (PS48) detects the home position [3]. The trimmer scraps press control is conducted either every 5 trimming operation or after exiting a print for which total of more than 60 sheets of paper is trimmed, whichever comes first.


[1] Bundle exit motor (M5)

[2]

Forward Reverse


[3] [1]

Bundle exit conveyance completed

[2]

Paper press operation

[3]

15ant2c108na


E. Bundle exit paper full control The bundle tray paper full sensor (PS61) [1] detects the bundle exit paper full. The main body displays the message on its operation panel when the paper full is detected.

[1] [1]

F.

15ant2c109na

Bundle tray paper full sensor (PS61)

Trimmer scraps full control

The trimmer scraps full sensor (PS41) detects the paper scraps full of the scraps box. The main body displays the message on its operation panel when the paper scraps full is detected. G. Trimmer scraps tray set detection The scraps box set sensor (PS40) detects whether the scraps box is set or not. The main body displays the message on its operation panel when the scraps box is not set.

2-90



TRIMMER SECTION

6. TRIMMER SECTION Composition


6.1

[1]

[2]

15ant2c066na

Symbol

Item


[1]

Trimming method

Blade + board method/Fore-edge trimming

[2]

Trimmer board movement method

Solenoid + one-way clutch

2-91


TRIMMER SECTION


6.2

Drive

6.2.1

Trimmer press drive

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]


[4]

[3]

2-92

[2]

[1]

15ant2c067na

[1]

Trimmer board

[5]

Press drive screw

[2]

Press arm

[6]

Trimmer press home sensor (PS53)

[3]

Trimmer press motor (M32)

[7]

Trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52)

[4]

Slide block

[8]

Trimmer press plate


bizhub PRO 1050/1050P Theory of Operation Ver.1.0 Trimmer blade drive

[5]

[6]

[4]

[7]

[3]


6.2.2

TRIMMER SECTION

[8]

[2]

[1]

15ant2c068na

[1]

Trimmer blade drive screw

[5]

Trimmer blade

[2]

Drive plate

[6]

Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)

[3]

Drive guide holes

[7]

Trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51)

[4]

Drive shafts

[8]

Trimmer blade motor (M31)

2-93


TRIMMER SECTION 6.2.3


Trimmer board drive

[1]


[2]

[6] [7] [5]

2-94

[3]

[4]

[1]

Trimmer board solenoid (SD11)

[5]

Trimmer board

[2]

Trimmer board replacement sensor (PS59)

[6]

One-way clutch

[3]

Pinion

[7]


[4]

Rack

15ant2c069na



6.3

Operation

6.3.1

Trimmer press control

TRIMMER SECTION

A. Mechanism The trimmer press is the mechanism to hold the paper at its fore-edge side to prevent the trimming misalignment. There is approximately 5 mm of opening at the home position. The press arms [4] press the paper with the trimmer board [2] when the trimmer press motor (M32) [1] drives and the slide blocks [7] move to the closing direcM32 rotates in the reverse direction to widen the opening to approximately 20 mm before conveying the paper to the trimmer section if the number of the print paper is 16 or more (32 or more for the saddle stitched paper). The trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [6] and the trimmer press home sensor (PS52) [5] detect the home position and 20 mm of opening respectively.

[6]

[7]

[8]

[5]

[1]

[4]

[3]

[2]

15ant2c070na

[1]


[5]


[2]

Trimmer board

[6]


[3]


[7]

Slide blocks

[4]

Press arms

[8]

Press direction

2-95


tion [8]. M32 detects the completion of the paper press via overcurrent.


TRIMMER SECTION


When changing the trimming position of the trimmer board or replacing the trimmer board via the I/O check mode, M32 rotates in the reverse direction to move up the press board higher than the position of the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) and release the trimmer board [3] by pushing the trimmer board retaining spring


[2] by the plate [1]. At the time, the opening is approximately 23 mm. The position is detected via overcurrent.

[3]

2-96

[1]

Plate

[2]

Trimmer board retaining spring

[2] [3]

Trimmer board

[1]

15ant2c071na



TRIMMER SECTION

B. Control (1) The number of the print paper is 16 or more (32 or more for the saddle stitched paper) The trimmer press motor (M32) rotates in the reverse direction [2] when the bundle clip motor starts conveying the paper [1]. When the trimmer press upper limit sensor (PS52) [3] detects upper limit position of the trimmer board, M32 is stopped and waits for the paper. At this time, the opening is approximately 20 mm. M32 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper when the paper is conveyed to the opening by the bundle press movement motor (M17) [4]. M32 stops when the overcurrent is detected [5]. The returning operation to the home position [7] is conducted when the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes

[1]

[2]

[4]


the trimming [6].

[5]

Bundle clip motor (M11) Bundle press movement motor (M17)

Forward


Forward


Forward

Reverse

Reverse

Reverse



[6]

[3]

[7]

15ant2c110na

[1]


[5]

Trimmer press completed

[2]

Opening operation

[6]

Trimming completed

[3]

Stopped when the opening is approx. 20 mm

[7]

Returning operation to the home position

[4]

Conveyance of the trimmed paper completed

(2) The number of the print paper is 15 (30 for the saddle stitched paper) M32 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper without widening the opening when the paper is conveyed to the opening [4].

2-97


TRIMMER SECTION


(3) The number of the print paper is 15 or less (30 or less for the saddle stitched paper) The trimmer press motor (M32) rotates in the forward direction [2] when the bundle clip motor starts conveying the paper [1]. M32 is stopped and the opening is narrowed after a specified period of time in accordance with the number of paper, and then it stands by for the paper. M32 rotates in the forward direction to press the paper when the paper is conveyed to the opening by the bundle press movement motor (M17) [3]. M32 stops when the overcurrent is detected [4]. The returning operation to the home position [6] is conducted when the trimmer blade motor (M31) completes


the trimming [5].

[1]

[3]

[4]

Bundle clip motor (M11) Bundle press movement motor (M17)

Forward


Forward


Forward

Reverse

Reverse

Reverse



[5]

[2]

2-98

[6]

15ant2c111na

[1]


[4]


[2]

Narrowing operation

[5]

Trimming completed

[3]

M17 completed the paper conveyance

[6]




TRIMMER SECTION

Trimmer blade control

A. Mechanism The trimming is conducted by the trimmer blade driven by the trimmer blade motor (M31) while the paper is pressed by the trimmer press. The drive shafts [4] moves up in a slanting direction along with the drive guide holes [2] when M31 pulls the trimmer blade retaining plate [5] to the direction [1]. It trims the paper with the trimmer blade [6] attached on the trimmer blade retaining plate [5]. The completion of the trimming is detected by the overcurrent of M31 caused when the trimmer blade retaining If the overcurrent of M31 is not detected even if the trimmer blade keeps moving up, the trimmer blade upper limit sensor (PS51) detects the upper limit.

[7]

[5]

[6]

[1] [5]

[4]

[3]

[2]

15ant2c072na

[1]

Trimming direction

[5]

Trimmer blade retaining plate

[2]

Drive guide holes

[6]

Trimmer blade

[3]


[7]

Trimmer stoppers

[4]

Drive shafts

2-99


plate [5] is contacted with the trimmer stoppers [7] attached to the trimmer press plate.


TRIMMER SECTION


B. Control The trimmer blade motor (M31) starts the trimming [2] when the trimmer press motor (M32) completes the press and stops [1]. M31 stops when the overcurrent is detected [3]. M31 starts the returning operation to the home position [5] when the bundle press motor (M23) starts releasing the press [4]. M31 stops when the trimmer blade home sensor (PS50) turns ON [6].


[1] Bundle press motor (M23)

Forward


Forward


[4]

Reverse

Reverse Forward Reverse

Trimmer blade home sensor (PS50)

[2]

[5]

[3]

[6]

15ant2c112na

[1]


[4]

Releasing the press started

[2]

Trimmer operation

[5]


[3]

Stopped by the overcurrent

[6]


2-100



TRIMMER SECTION

Trimmer board control

A. Mechanism The trimmer operation may be conducted improperly due to the damage on the trimmer board if the trimmer board is subjected to the trimmer blade many times at the same position. For this reason, the trimmer board is slid 1 mm backward for sheet cutting each time a job of 700 times trimming is completed. The trimmer board solenoid (SD11) [1] slides the trimmer board [5] with its fixing released by the trimmer press motor (M32). The pinion [3] pushes the rack [4] 0.5 mm every time SD11 turns ON. The rotation of the pinion is transmitted to rotate and push the trimmer board when SD11 turns OFF by the one-way clutch. Each time a job of 700 times trimming is completed, SD11 is turned on twice to move the trimmer board 1 mm. The trimmer board can be slid up to approximately 26 mm. The main body displays the message on its operation panel when the trimmer board replacement sensor (PS59) [2] turns ON. The trimmer operation is prohibited when the trimming is conducted 700 times since PS59 turns ON. NOTE • Changing software DIPSW22-5 to 1 in the service mode, the operation timing of the trimmer board solenoid can be selected among 700/500/300 (700 by default) in the user mode adjustment screen. The barr may occur on the trimmed edge of the paper before the movement cycle of the trimmer board depending on the paper type.

[1]

[2]

[6] [7] [5]

[4]

[3]

[1]

Trimmer board solenoid (SD11)

[4]

Rack

[2]

Trimmer board replacement sensor (PS59)

[5]

Trimmer board

[3]

Pinion

[6]

One-way clutch

15ant2c073na

2-101


the rack by the one-way clutch [6] and pushes the trimmer board when SD11 turns ON. The pinion does not


TRIMMER SECTION


B. Control The trimmer press motor (M32) starts the returning operation [2] to the home position when the 700th trimmer operation [1] is completed. M32 does not stop by defection of the trimmer press home sensor (PS53) [3]. The opening keeps widening until the overcurrent of M32 is detected [4]. When M32 stops, the trimmer board solenoid (SD11) turns ON and OFF twice [5] to move the trimmer board 1 mm. Then, M32 starts the returning operation to the home position [6].


[4] [5]

[6]

Trimmer board solenoid (SD11) Trimmer press motor (M32) Trimmer blade motor (M31)




[1]

[2]

[3]

15ant2c113na

[1]

700th trimmer operation

[4]

Overcurrent of M32 detected

[2]

Opening operation of the trimmer press

[5]

Trimmer board moved 1 mm

[3]


[6]


2-102

rc501ma.book Page 1 Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:38 PM

SERVICE MANUAL

Theory of Operation

RC-501

2005.03 Ver. 1.0


rc501ma.book Page i Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:38 PM


CONTENTS


OUTLINE


Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3

Capacity:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.4

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.5

Machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.6


2. UNIT COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

II


1. WASTE TONER CONVEYANCE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1.2

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2. WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 2.1

Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.2

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

i


I

I Outline

CONTENTS

rc501ma.book Page ii Tuesday, March 15, 2005 8:38 PM



I Outline

CONTENTS

Blank page

ii




I Outline


Type

Name:

Toner recycle cut unit

Type:

Air conveyance waste toner collecting unit

1.2

Functions

Toner ejection:

Air conveyance by the diaphragm pump

Waste toner container:

Waste toner recycle box

1.3

Capacity:

Recycle amount of the untransferred toner: Max. 8,000 g Recycle rate of the untransferred toner: 98% or more

1.4

Maintenance

Maintenance:




1.5

Machine data

Power source:

24V DC (supplied from the main body)

Maximum power consumption: 10W or less Dimensions:

Recycle pump: W 70 mm x D 135 mm x H 100 mm Waste toner recycle box: W 200 mm x D 330 mm x H 500 mm

Weight:

Recycle pump: 0.85 kg Waste toner recycle box: 1.2 kg Others: 0.65 kg (hose, recycle pump control board, accumulator)

1.6


Temperature:

10°C to 30°C

Humidity:


1-1


UNIT COMPOSITION


I Outline

2. UNIT COMPOSITION

[1]

[2]

[4]

1-2

[3]

14rtt1c001na

[1]

Accumulator

[3]

Recycle pump drive board (RCPDB)

[2]

Recycle pump

[4]




WASTE TONER CONVEYANCE SECTION

II COMPOSITION/OPERATION 1. WASTE TONER CONVEYANCE SECTION Composition


1.1

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Symbol

Item

[1]

Waste toner backflow prevention method

Accumulator

[2]

Waste toner suction method

Recycle pump + conveyance hose

[3]

Recycle pump drive method

Recycle pump drive board (RCPDB)

[4]

Waste toner conveyance method

Recycle pump + conveyance hose

14rtt2c001na


2-1



1.2


Operation

A. Purpose The surplus of the toner used at the printing is recycled to the developing section by the recycling mechanism. The toner circulating in the devise may slightly deteriorate the print quality because the paper dust adhering to the drum at the transfer/separation is mixed in the cleaning section. To maintain the certain print quality, the toner circulation must be stopped and the fresh toner must be used for


development. The recycle cut device makes it possible. B. Characteristics As the recycle cut unit discharges the non-transferred toner to the outside before it is returned to the developing unit, only unused toner is kept always in the developing unit. It also makes possible to perform the development with the toner in which no paper dust is mixed so that you can maintain the certain print quality. However, the toner consumption is increased because it ejects the used toner. C. Waste toner conveyance path The waste toner sucked from the toner recycle intake [2] of the toner recycle pipe [1] is conveyed to the accumulator [3] via the accumulator hose [10]. The one-way valves are provided at the outlet and inlet of the accumulator to prevent the backflow of the waste toner. The waste toner passing the accumulator is conveyed to the intake [5] of the recycle pump [8] via the hose joint [9] and the hose /5 [4]. The waste toner in the recycle pump is pressurized by the recycle pump and ejected from the outlet [7] to the hose /6 [6].

[7]

[6]

2-2

[8]

[4]

[9]

[5]

[10]

[4]

[3]

[1]

Toner recycle pipe

[6]

Hose /6

[2]

Toner recycle intake

[7]

Outlet

[3]

Accumulator

[8]

Recycle pump

[4]

Hose /5

[9]

Hose joint

[5]

Intake

[10]

Accumulator hose

[2]

[1] 14rtt2c002na




Hose /6 connected to the hose joint [1] conveys the waste toner to the outside. The toner conveyed to the outside is conveyed and recycled to the waste toner recycle box [3] via the hose /3 [2].


[1]

[3]

[2] [1]

Hose joint

[2]

Hose /3

[3]

14rtt2c003na


D. Operation timing The recycle pump turns ON/OFF in sync with ON/OFF of the drum motor (M2) to perform the waste toner recycle during the drum rotation. The recycle pump is operated only when the software DIPSW12-5 is set to ON.

2-3


WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX


2. WASTE TONER RECYCLE BOX 2.1

Composition


[1]

[2]

[3]

14rtt2c004na

Symbol

2-4

Item


[1]

Toner/air separation method

Filter (bilayer type)

[2]

Waste toner container

1st recycle box

[3]

Toner/air path separation method

2nd recycle box



2.2


Operation

A. Purpose The large amount of air is contained in the recycled waste toner. In the waste toner box, the waste toner and the air is separated to recycle the waste toner only. B. Waste toner/air separation mechanism The waste toner [8] conveyed to the top of the 1st recycle container [4] via the hose /3 [10] falls in the 1st recycle into the hose [5] from the air inlet [3] provided on the top of the No.1 collection box. It provides the area to which the waste toner can fall at the maximum as well as it decreases the content of the waste toner in the air taken to the hose [5]. The conveyance direction of the air taken to the 2nd recycle container [6] is switched upward. Waste toner contained in the air drops into the No.2 collection box by its own weight so that the waste toner conveyed to the filter [2] can be further reduced. The air is conveyed to the filter [2] via the hose [9] and the waste toner is separated from the air definitively, and then the air [1] is exhausted to the outside.

[10] [1] [9]

[2]

[8]

[3] [7]

[4]

[6] [5] 14rtt2c005na

[1]

Air

[6]

2nd recycle box

[2]

Filter

[7]

Air + Waste toner (less)

[3]

Air intake

[8]

Air + Waste toner

[4]

1st recycle box

[9]

Hose

[5]

Hose

[10]

Hose /3

2-5


container by its own weight and it is accumulated. The air conveyed together with the waste toner is introduced





Blank page

2-6

SERVICE MANUAL

Theory of Operation

IC Unit

2004.10 Ver. 1.0


CONTENTS


I

I Outline

CONTENTS

OUTLINE

II

1.1

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2

Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3

Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.4

Maintenance and Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.5

Machine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.6

Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2


1. COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1.1 1.2

Print Controller’s Capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Print Controller’s Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 1.2.1

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

1.2.2

PostScript Protection Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2. OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 2.1

Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.2

Each Function on the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.3

Data flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

i


1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1



I Outline

CONTENTS

Blank Page

ii



I Outline


Type

Type:

1.2

Built-in box type for the KONICA MINOLTA Printer/Copier

Functions

Resolution:

Printing System: 600 x 600 dpi Scanning Resolution: 200 dpi / 300 dpi/ 400 dpi / 600 dpi

Gradation: Printable Area:

binary PCLXL: 2.54mm (left, right, top and bottom without variation) PCL5e: 4.23mm (left, right, top and bottom without variation) PS: 2.84mm (left, right, top and bottom without variation) 314 x 460mm (The maximum paper size: 324 x 460mm)

No. of Print:

1 to 9999

Continuous Print Speed:

105 ppm (A4, 8.5 x 11) / (600 x 600 dpi)

Printer Description Language:

PCL (TIFF/PDF) PostScript3 (TIFF/PDF) (Option)

Built-in fonts:

Agfa Microtype fonts Adobe PostScript Font (optional PS3 kit required)

Compliant OS:

Windows 98/Me Windows NT 4.0 (NT Service Pack 3 or more) Windows 2000 Windows XP Mac OS 8.x - 9.x (optional PS3 kit required) Mac OS X v10.2/v10.3 (optional PS3 kit required)

Printer Driver:

Printer driver for Windows 98/Me/NT 4.0/2000/XP PS printer driver for Windows (optional PS3 kit required) PS printer driver for Windows/Macintosh (optional PS3 kit required)

Network Functions Protocols:

TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPP, EtherTalk

Compliant OS (NOS):

Novell NetWare (3.x, 4.x-6), Windows 95/98/Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS 8.x - 9.x, Mac OS X v10.2/v10.3

Multiple Protocols: Printing Method:

Automatic selection Peer-to-Peer (TCP/IP for Windows 95/98/Me), Pserver (IPX/SPX), lpd/lpr (TCP/IP for Windows NT 4.0/2000), lpd/ lpr (TCP/IP for UNIX), AppleTalk (EtherTalk), NPrinter/ RPrinter (IPX/SPX), Port9100(TCP/IP)

Dedicated Utilities:

Peer to Peer Printing Tool

Compliant Web Browser:

Netscape Navigator, Internet Explorer

1 -1


1.3

Paper

Paper Size:

I Outline


Same as copier

Paper Type:

Same as copier

Paper Weight:

Same as copier

1.4

Maintenance and Life

Maintenance:

Same as copier

Machine Service Life:

Same as copier

1.5

Machine Data

CPU:

Low Voltage Pentium III Tualatin 933 MHz

System Memory:

256 MB (Standard), Expandable up to 512 MB (Option: EM-701)

Host Interface:

Parallel port Centronics (IEEE 1284 / amphenol 36 pin male connector)

Hard Disk Drive:

EIDE drive 40 GB or more

Option:

PS3 kit Memory: (EM-701: 256 MB)

Power:

Obtain from main body printer

Network Functions Network Interface:

IEEE 802.3

Ethernet Connection:

100Base-TX / 10Base-T

Network Connector:

RJ-45

LED:

Green 2

1.6

1 -2

Ethernet (100Base-TX / 10Base-T)

Frame Type:

Operating Environment

Temperature:

Same as copier

Humidity:

Same as copier


COMPOSITION

II COMPOSITION/OPERATION 1. COMPOSITION 1.1

Print Controller’s Capabilities

This product is a print controller to serve as a printer or as a network scanner when used in combination with the over networks and converts their contents into image data for the copier to be able to print out. Also, the copier functions as network scanner thus making it possible to send images that scanned into the copier to e-mail recipients as an attachment, to send to the FTP server/SMB server, or to store those scanned images on the hard disk in the print controller and import them by Adobe Acrobat or other TWAIN-compliant applications. This chapter describes product structure, how to use service tools, how to disassemble and reassemble, HDD formatting, troubleshooting, etc. When used as a printer For use as a network printer

Copier

For use as a local printer Print Controller

prn_1050_system

2 -1


copier that may be connected to computers or to networks. This print controller gets files from computers or

COMPOSITION


When used as a scanner Receiving as an E-Mail attached file: E-Mail software

Downloading from FTP:

Import

Storing in the internal HDD: TWAIN-compliant applications Network Scanner Driver

FTP client

File sharing using SMB protocol


Original SCAN

Copier SMB server

Box0003 Box0002 Report Report Box0001Copy 0001 Copy Report Report 0001 Copy Document Printing DocumentScanning Document Copy Report Report DocumentScanning Document 0001 Copy Document Printing Copy Report Report 0002 Copy Document Printing DocumentScanning Document Copy Report Report 0002 Copy Document Printing DocumentScanning Document Copy Report Report 0002 Copy Document Printing DocumentScanning Document Copy Document Printing DocumentScanning Document

FTP server

Internal HDD

Data flow in scanning by the copier Data flow in importing by a computer

SMTP server (E-Mail)

2 -2

prn_Scan_sys_10_v100


1.2

COMPOSITION

Print Controller’s Options

The Print Controller has the following options. Memory (EM-701), PostScript Protection Kit (PS-502) 1.2.1

Memory

The IC unit is equipped with 256 MB memory by default. Memory expansion is available by adding DIMM in the memory slot of the system board. Memory expansion enables more complex printing. When expanding memII Composition/Operation

ory, be sure to install 256 MB memory (EM-701). About memory expansion, see “3.2.2 Removal / Installation of Memory” in Field Service section. Combinations of memory expansion DIMM1

DIMM2

256 MB

---

Total Memory Size 256 MB

256 MB

256 MB

512 MB

Caution • At maximum, 512MB can be installed. Use the specified memory (EM-701) only. • Use the memory slot with smaller number first.

1.2.2

PostScript Protection Kit

Adding PostScript Protection Kit enables to print PostScript data. If PostScript Protection Kit is fitted and print PostScript data, data are rasterized and printed with the highest resolution of the resulting in high-definition results. About installation of PostScript Protection Kit, see “3.2.3 Removal / Installation of PostScript Protection Kit” of Fild service section.

2 -3

OPERATION


2. OPERATION 2.1

Operating Environment

The print controller includes a 933-MHz Intel Low Voltage Pentium III CPU to perform high-speed image processing (rasterization). While rasterized image data are sent to the engine, data in the following pages are simultaneously rasterized. Thus, it has 256MB memory by default, and this memory is expandable to 512 MB to accommodate extremely complex print data processing requirements. This design enables the print controller to II Composition/Operation

produce outputs at high speed without causing the print engine to stop in the process even when processing a large number of pages. The print controller system software runs on VxWorks from Wind River and is included on the CF(Compact Flash). The hard disk is used for storing configured settings, storing the copier’s scanned data and downloaded fonts, and for spooling print data. The scanned data is sent to PCs via the standard Ethernet Network Interface. The transmission and reception of scanned data between the print controller and the print engine is a task of a built-in engine interface (video interface). As well, the serial interface is used for checking software operations/memory, thus giving access to the system in the print controller.

System Board CPU

HDD2

Compact Flash

Memory (Standard)

Service Port

Memory (Optional)

BIOS (Flash ROM)

GMCH*1

Serial I/F

ICH2*2

IDE Bus

LPC Bus

PCI Bus

PS Protection Kit

Network I/F

Ethernet Network

Rasterization Parallel I/O

Parallel Port

Engine I/F

Engine

*1:GMCH =Graphics & Memory Controller Hub *2:ICH2 =I/O Controller Hub

2 -4

prn_1050_system_flow


2.2

OPERATION

Each Function on the System Board Clock Generator

BIOS Chip

Slot for Memory2


Slot for Memory1

GMCH*1

CPU Serial Port (for servicing)

Parallel I/F Connector

Super I/O

ICH2*2 EBC

Slot for Compact Flash Parallel Chip

PostScript Protection Kit

RJ-45 Ethernet Network Port

PHY*3

Compression / Decompression Chip IDE Connector prn_1050fig20

*1: GMCH = Graphics & Memory Controller Hub *2: ICH2 = I/O Controller Hub *3: PHY = PHYsical layer device (for LAN) I/F Controller Hub:

Hard Disk Controller Compact Flash Controller PCI I/F LAN Controller Parallel I/F Controller EBC Controller

Graphics & Memory Controller Hub:

CPU Local Bus I/F Memory Controller

Super I/O:

Serial I/F Controller

2 -5

OPERATION

2.3


Data flow Application

Computer

Web Browser

Print Commands Printer Driver


Spooler

Ethernet Network I/F

Parallel I/F ( IEEE 1284 )

( TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk )

Parallel I/F ( IEEE 1284 )

RJ-45 Network I/F

Interface

I/F

Print Controller

PCI bus Input Buffer

Hard Disk

PDL Processing ( Rasterization ) / Interpreter

Page Memory

Printer Engine

PCI bus Image Memory

Print Engine ( Print )

PDL command

Rasterized image data

Printer status prn_1050_data_flow

2 -6

Konica-Minolta BizHub Pro 1050,1050P Theory of Operation

Recommend Documents